i 

 *FM 17-97 

Field Manual HEADQUARTERS 

No 17-97 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

Washington, DC 3 October 1995

CAVALRY TROOP 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

 Page 

Preface ................................................................ iv 

Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION ................................ 1-1 

 Organizations...................................... 1-2 

Missions, Capabilities, and 

 Limitations......................................... 1-16 

 Responsibilities ................................... 1-18 

Chapter 2 BATTLE COMMAND .......................... 2-1 

 Troop Leading Procedures ................. 2-2 

 Situational Awareness ........................ 2-13 

 Communications ................................. 2-17 

 Techniques of Tactical Control ........... 2-22 

 Command Guidance and 

 Organizational Control ...................... 2-27 

 Tactical Movement Formations........... 2-34 

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public 

release; distribution is unlimited. 

*This publication supersedes FM 17-97, September 1988. 
iii 

Chapter 3 RECONNAISSANCE .......................... 3-1 

 Purpose, Fundamentals, 

 and Capabilities ................................ 3-2 

 Planning Considerations, Methods, 

 and Techniques ................................ 3-5 

 Route Reconnaissance....................... 3-29 

 Zone Reconnaissance ........................ 3-41 

 Area Reconnaissance......................... 3-53 

Chapter 4 SECURITY.......................................... 4-1 

 Purpose, Fundamentals, 

 and Capabilities ................................ 4-2 

 Screen................................................. 4-5 

 Guard.................................................. 4-31 

 Cover .................................................. 4-32 

 Route Security..................................... 4-33 

 Area Security....................................... 4-33 

 Convoy Security.................................. 4-34 

Chapter 5 OFFENSE........................................... 5-1 

 Purpose and Fundamentals................ 5-1 

 Movement to Contact.......................... 5-2 

 Hasty Attack........................................ 5-11 

 Deliberate Attack................................. 5-22 

 Raid..................................................... 5-24 

Chapter 6 DEFENSE ........................................... 6-1 

 Purpose, Fundamentals, and 

 Schemes of Maneuver...................... 6-2 

 Defend From a Troop 
iv 

 Battle Position ................................... 6-6 

 Defend in Troop Sector....................... 6-10 

 Delay in Troop Sector ......................... 6-22 
v 

Chapter 7 OTHER TACTICAL OPERATIONS .... 7-1 

 Tactical Road Marches ....................... 7-1 

 Assembly Areas.................................. 7-9 

 Relief in Place ..................................... 7-15 

 Battle Handover/Passage of Lines...... 7-21 

 Hasty Water Crossing......................... 7-31 

 In-Stride Breach.................................. 7-35 

 NBC Defensive Operations................. 7-42 

Chapter 8 COMBAT SUPPORT .......................... 8-1 

 The Fire Support Team....................... 8-1 

 Mortar Support.................................... 8-9 

 Artillery Support................................... 8-12 

 Engineer Support ................................ 8-14 

 Ground Surveillance Radar Support... 8-20 

 Air Defense ......................................... 8-23 

 Army Aviation Support ........................ 8-26 

 Close Air Support................................ 8-28 

Chapter 9 COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT ......... 9-1 

 Organization........................................ 9-1 

 Logistics.............................................. 9-6 

 Personnel Service Support ................. 9-16 

 Prisoners of War................................. 9-19 

Appendix A FRATRICIDE PREVENTION.............. A-1 

Appendix B STANDING OPERATING 

 PROCEDURES................................... B-1 

Appendix C OPERATIONS ORDER ...................... C-1
vi 

Appendix D OPERATIONS OTHER THAN WAR .. D-1

Glossary .........................................................Glossary-1 

References ................................................References-1 
vii 

Preface 

This publication serves as a doctrinal guide for 

commanders and subordinate leaders of both light (HMMWV 

equipped) and heavy (M1 and M3 equipped) cavalry troops. 

Heavy cavalry troops are found in Armored Cavalry 

Regiments (ACR), in Armor/Mechanized Divisions, and in 

Separate Armor/Mechanized Brigades. Light cavalry troops 

are found in Light Armored Cavalry Regiments (LACR), in 

Light Infantry Divisions, and in Separate Light Infantry 

Brigades. 

Although FM 17-97 does not specifically address the TOE 

of the Light Division Cavalry Troop or the troops of a 

Separate Heavy or Light Brigade, the tactics, techniques, and 

procedures outlined in this publication still apply. 

This publication lays out the organization, command and 

control, tactical employment, and service support of the 

cavalry troop in combat. It establishes the responsibilities 

and duties of key personnel in the troop during combat. 

FM 17-97 is one of three publications in the cavalry troop 

family. It provides troop leaders with a doctrinal reference to 

link training and fighting. ARTEP 17-487-30-MTP, Mission 

Training Plan for the Regimental Armored Cavalry Troop,

outlines how to train the troop. FKSM 17-97-3, Cavalry Troop 

Common SOP, describes troop operating procedures. This 

family of publications supports FM 17-15, Tank Platoon; 

FM 7-91, Tactical Employment of Antiarmor Platoons, 

Companies, and Battalions; and FM 17-98, Scout Platoon. 
viii 

The information in this manual is based on the objective 

table of organization and equipment (TOE) for the ACR and 

LACR troops. Differences between actual unit organizations 

and equipment and those described in this manual are 

caused by differences in the modified table of equipment and 

organization (MTOE). 

The proponent for this publication is HQ TRADOC. 

Submit changes for improving this publication on DA Form 

2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank 

Forms), and forward it to Commandant, USAARMS, ATTN: 

ATSB-SBA-F, Fort Knox, KY 40121-5211. 

Although this manual does not implement any particular 

international agreement, the material presented herein is in 

accordance with related international agreements. A list of 

related international agreements and other references can 

be found in the References section. The paragraph in 

Chapter 2, Section I, entitled Issue a Warning Order is in 

compliance with STANAG 2014. Chapter 7, Section III, Relief 

in Place, and Section IV, Battle Handover and Passage of 

Lines, are in compliance with STANAG 2082. Tables 7-2 and 

7-4 are in compliance with STANAG 2083. 

Unless this publication states otherwise, masculine nouns 

and pronouns do not refer exclusively to men. 
I-1 

Article I. Chapter 1 

Section 1.01 Introduction 

The role of the cavalry troop in Army operations remains 

unchanged from the traditional role of cavalry throughout the 

history of warfare. The troop is organized, equipped, and 

trained to protect and preserve the fighting ability of other 

combined arms forces. While its primary missions are 

reconnaissance and security, the cavalry troop may be called 

upon to execute attack, defend, and delay missions as part 

of squadron and regimental missions. The troop 

accomplishes its missions by communicating, moving, and 

shooting in that order. 

The purpose of this chapter is— 

• To depict organizations of the cavalry troop in— 

Heavy Troop: 

− The Armored Cavalry Regiment (ACR) (M1 and M3 

equipped). 

− The Heavy Division Cavalry Squadron (M1 and M3 

equipped). 

Light Troop: 

− The Light Armored Cavalry Regiment (LACR) 

(HMMWV equipped). 

Contents 

Page

Section I. Organizations ..........................................1-2 

Section II. Missions, Capabilities, and Limitations ...1-16 

Section III. Responsibilities .......................................1-18 
I-2 

• To outline missions each troop performs and to 

highlight each troop’s capabilities and limitations. 

• To establish responsibilities of key personnel in 

combat. 

(a) Section I. Organizations 

(I) THE HEAVY CAVALRY TROOP 

The heavy cavalry troop consists of 6 officers and 126 

enlisted soldiers. The troop is organized into a headquarters 

section, two scout platoons, two tank platoons, a mortar 

section, and a maintenance section (see Figure 1-1). 

a) Figure 1-1. Heavy cavalry troop organization. 

HQ

MAINT

MORT
I-3 

2) The Heavy Troop Scout Platoon 

The scout platoon is organized and equipped to conduct 

reconnaissance and screening in support of its parent troop. 

However, when the parent unit is performing missions within 

an economy-of-force role, the scout platoon may conduct 

offensive, defensive, and retrograde operations in support of 

the troop mission. The platoon consists of 1 officer and 29 

enlisted soldiers, and is equipped with six M3 cavalry fighting 

vehicles (CFV) organized into three scout sections (see 

Figure 1-2). 

3) 

a) Figure 1-2. Scout platoon organization. 

4) 

SECTION

LEADER

SQUAD

LEADER

SQUAD

LEADER

PLATOON

LEADER

SQUAD

LEADER

PLATOON

SERGEANT
I-4 

5) The Heavy Troop Tank Platoon 

The tank platoon is organized and equipped to perform its 

three primary missions—attack, defend, and move. The 

platoon consists of 1 officer and 15 enlisted soldiers manning 

four M1A1 Abrams main battle tanks organized into two 

sections (see Figure 1-3). 

6) 

a) Figure 1-3. Tank platoon organization. 

PLATOON LEADER

PSG
I-5 

7) The Heavy Troop Mortar Section 

The mortar section is organized and equipped to provide 

immediate indirect fires in support of troop operations. Such 

supporting fires are usually suppression, screening, 

obscuration, or illumination. The section consists of nine 

enlisted soldiers. It is equipped with two 107-mm mortars 

mounted in two self-propelled mortar carriers (see Figure 

1-4). 

Figure 1-4. Mortar section organization. 
I-6 

8) The Heavy Troop Maintenance Section 

This section is organized and equipped to diagnose and 

repair most equipment faults at troop level. It has the 

capability to recover all troop vehicles and to maintain the 

troop’s equipment records. The section consists of 18 

enlisted soldiers equipped with one armored personnel 

carrier (APC), one heavy recovery vehicle, one utility truck 

with cargo trailer, and two cargo trucks with cargo trailers 

(see Figure 1-5). 

a) Figure 1-5. Maintenance section 

organization. 
I-7 

9) The Heavy Troop Headquarters Section 

a) 

The troop headquarters section is organized and 

equipped to perform command and control and logistical 

support functions for the troop. The section consists of 2 

officers and 11 enlisted soldiers. It is equipped with one main 

battle tank, one command post (CP) carrier, one APC, one 

M3 CFV, one cargo truck with a 400-gallon water trailer, and 

two utility trucks with one cargo trailer (see Figure 1-6). 

b) Figure 1-6. Headquarters section 

organization. 

CO XO

1SG SUPPLY
I-8 

10) The Fire Support Team (FIST) 

The FIST comes from the squadron howitzer battery in 

the heavy cavalry regiment and the division artillery in the 

division cavalry squadron. The FIST consists of one fire 

support officer (FSO), one NCO (team chief), one enlisted 

fire support specialist, and one enlisted radio operator. The 

FIST is responsible for coordinating indirect fires for the 

troop. In the heavy troop the team is mounted on an M981 

FIST vehicle (see Figure 1-7). 

11) 

a) Figure 1-7. FIST organization. 
I-9 

(II) THE LIGHT CAVALRY TROOP 

The light cavalry troop consists of 6 officers and 107 

enlisted soldiers. The troop is organized into a headquarters 

section, two scout platoons, two antitank (AT) platoons, a 

mortar section, and a maintenance section (see Figure 1-8). 

a) Figure 1-8. Light cavalry troop organization. 

HQ MAINT

MORT
I-10 

2) The Light Troop Scout Platoon 

The scout platoon is organized and equipped to conduct 

reconnaissance and screening in support of its parent troop. 

However, when the parent unit is performing missions within 

an economy-of-force role, the scout platoon may conduct 

offensive, defensive, and retrograde operations in support of 

the troop mission. The platoon consists of 1 officer and 29 

enlisted soldiers. It is equipped with ten M1025/M1026 

HMMWVs (five MK-19 equipped and five cal .50 equipped). 

The platoon can organize into various configurations, usually 

from two to five sections, depending on factors of METT-T 

(see Figure 1-9). FM 17-98 details the tactics, techniques, 

and procedures for employing the HMMWV scout platoon. 

a) Figure 1-9. Light troop scout platoon 

organization. 

SEC LDR

.50 CAL SQD LDR

MK 19

PL

.50 CAL PSG

MK19

SEC LDR

.50 CAL SQD LDR

MK 19

SEC LDR

.50 CAL SQD LDR

MK 19

SEC LDR

.50 CAL SQD LDR

MK 19

HQ SEC

A B C D
I-11 

3) The Light Troop Antitank Platoon 

The AT platoon is organized and equipped to perform its 

three primary missions—attack, defend, and move. The 

platoon consists of 1 officer and 11 enlisted soldiers manning 

four M996 HMMWVs (TOW carriers) organized into two 

sections (see Figure 1-10). 

a) Figure 1-10. Light troop AT platoon 

organization. 

PLATOON LEADER PLATOON SERGEANT
I-12 

4) The Light Troop Mortar Section 

The mortar section is organized and equipped to provide 

immediate indirect fires to support troop operations. Such 

supporting fires are usually suppression, screening, 

obscuration, or illumination. The section consists of nine 

enlisted soldiers. It is equipped with two 120-mm mortars 

trailered by three M1025/M1026 HMMWVs (see Figure 

1-11). 
I-13 

a) Figure 1-11. Light troop mortar section 

organization. 
I-14 

5) The Light Troop Maintenance Section 

This section is organized and equipped to diagnose and 

repair most equipment faults at troop level. It has the 

capability to recover all troop vehicles and to maintain the 

troop’s equipment records. The section consists of eight 

enlisted soldiers equipped with one M998 cargo/troop carrier 

HMMWV, one cargo truck with cargo trailer, and one 5-ton 

wrecker (see Figure 1-12). 

6) 

a) Figure 1-12. Light troop maintenance section 

organization. 

MOTOR SGT

MAINTENANCE TRUCK

5 TON WRECKER
I-15 

7) The Light Troop Headquarters Section 

The troop headquarters section is organized and 

equipped to perform command and control and logistical 

support functions for the troop. The section consists of two 

officers and ten enlisted soldiers. It is equipped with one 

M1025 HMMWV, one M1037 HMMWV shelter carrier with 

S250 shelter, one M998 HMMWV with cargo trailer, and one 

2 1/2-ton cargo truck with 400-gallon water trailer (see Figure 

1-13). 

CO

XO

SUPPLY

1SG
I-16 

a) Figure 1-13. Light troop headquarters 

section organization. 
I-17 

8) The Fire Support Team (FIST) 

The FIST comes from the squadron howitzer battery in 

the light cavalry regiment. The FIST consists of one officer 

(FSO), one NCO (team chief), one enlisted fire support 

specialist, and one enlisted radio operator. The FIST is 

responsible for coordinating indirect fires for the troop. In the 

light troop the team is mounted on a HMMWV (see Figure 

1-14). 

(b) 

a) Figure 1-14. Light troop FIST organization. 
I-18 

(c) Section II. Missions, Capabilities, and 

Limitations 

(I) MISSIONS 

Heavy and light cavalry troops perform reconnaissance 

and security missions to protect and preserve the fighting 

ability of the units to which they are assigned or attached. 

Both troops also conduct offensive, defensive, and 

retrograde operations in an economy-of-force role. Cavalry 

troops in general have limitations and capabilities associated 

with their TOEs and METT-T that must be considered when 

employing them in a specific mission role (see Figure 1-15). 

 Hvy Trp Lt Trp 

Reconnaissance Missions

 Route Recon ✔ ✔

 Zone Recon ✔ ✔

 Area Recon ✔ ✔

Security Missions

 Screen ✔ ✔

 Area Security ✸ ✸

 Convoy Security ✗ ✗

Economy-of-Force Role

 Offensive Missions

 Hasty Attack ✔ ✸

 Attack ✔ ✸

 Movement to Contact ✔ ✸

 Defensive Missions 

Defend a Battle Position ✔ ✸

 Defend in Sector ✔ ✸

 Retrograde Missions 

Delay ✔ ✸

 ✔ = fully capable 

 ✗ = capable when reinforced 

 ✸ = capable under permissive METT-T

a) Figure 1-15. Cavalry troop mission profiles. 
I-19 

(II) CAPABILITIES 

a) The heavy cavalry troop is a unit that can be 

deployed by rail, sea, or both into a theater of 

operations. It can perform its missions under all 

visibility conditions and in any terrain that 

supports heavy armor movement. The 

integrated thermal sights on the M1A1 tank and 

M3 CFV along with ancillary passive night sights 

and night vision devices authorized to the troop 

provide an outstanding nighttime/reduced 

visibility acquisition and fighting capability. 

Additionally, the firepower and survivability 

organic to the heavy cavalry troop allow it to 

execute missions aggressively across the 

spectrum of warfare. 

The light cavalry troop is a unit that can be rapidly 

deployed by air, rail, or sea into a theater of operations. It can 

perform its missions under all visibility conditions and in any 

terrain that supports wheeled vehicle movement. The 

ancillary thermal and night vision devices authorized to the 

troop provide an excellent reduced visibility acquisition 

capability. However, the light cavalry troop’s ability to fight 

under reduced visibility conditions is limited because of its 

lack of integrated passive and thermal sights on stabilized 

weapons platforms. 

(III) 

(IV) LIMITATIONS 

a) Given suitable terrain conditions, the ability of 

heavy and light cavalry troops to accomplish 

their assigned missions is mainly limited by the 

size and strength of threat forces encountered. 

Both troops are limited in close terrain, 

especially urban environments, due to their 

limited number of dismounted scouts. Also, the 

troops are dependent on their parent squadrons 

and regiments for additional combat support 

(CS) and combat service support (CSS) assets. 
I-20 

(d) 

(e) 
I-21 

(f) Section III. Responsibilities 

(I) THE TROOP COMMANDER 

The troop commander is responsible to the squadron 

commander (SCO) for the discipline, combat readiness, and 

training of the troop, and for the maintenance of its 

equipment. He must be proficient in the tactical employment 

of the troop and its assigned and attached CS elements. He 

must also know the capabilities and limitations of the troop’s 

personnel and equipment as well as those of CS elements 

attached to him. 

a) The troop commander’s responsibility in combat 

is twofold. He will— 

• Accomplish all missions assigned to the troop in 

accordance with the SCO’s intent. 

• Preserve the fighting capability of the troop. 

(II) THE EXECUTIVE OFFICER 

In combat, the troop executive officer (XO) is second in 

command. He supervises the troop tactical operations center 

(TOC), where he stays abreast of the tactical situation in the 

troop’s area of operations (AO). He manages the flow of 

combat information between the troop and the squadron 

from the troop TOC. With the assistance of the troop first 

sergeant (1SG), he plans and coordinates CSS for the troop. 

(III) THE FIRST SERGEANT 

The primary responsibility of the troop 1SG is sustaining 

the troop’s ability to fight. He supervises the procurement 

and distribution of fuel, ammunition, food, water, clothing, 

equipment, replacements, and repair parts. He receives 

incoming personnel and assigns them to subordinate 

elements as needed. He is responsible for the medical 

evacuation of sick, injured, and wounded soldiers to the 
I-22 

supporting medical treatment facility. He is also responsible 

for the evacuation of soldiers killed in action to the supporting 

graves registration collection point. He is also responsible for 

the recovery and evacuation of damaged combat equipment. 

(IV) THE TROOP FIRE SUPPORT OFFICER 

The troop FSO is responsible for the planning and 

coordination of the troop fire support plan. He relays troop 

requests for indirect fire and advises the commander on the 

employment of indirect-fire weapons in support of the troop’s 

maneuver. The troop FSO may control and position the 

mortars during combat operations. 

(V) THE PLATOON LEADER 

The platoon leader is responsible to the troop commander 

for the discipline, combat readiness, and training of the 

platoon, and for the maintenance of its equipment. He must 

be proficient in the tactical employment of the platoon and 

know the capabilities and limitations of the platoon’s 

personnel and equipment. 

The platoon leader’s responsibility in combat is twofold. 

He must— 

• Accomplish all missions assigned to the platoon in 

accordance with the troop commander’s intent. 

• Preserve the fighting capability of the platoon. 

(VI) THE PLATOON SERGEANT 

The platoon sergeant (PSG) leads elements of the 

platoon as directed by the platoon leader, and assumes 

command of the platoon in his absence. The PSG assists the 

platoon leader in maintaining discipline, conducting training, 

and exercising control. He supervises platoon CSS, which 

includes supply and equipment maintenance. 
I-23 

(VII) THE MORTAR SECTION SERGEANT 

The mortar section sergeant is responsible for providing 

responsive indirect fires to support the troop commander’s 

concept of the operation. 

(VIII) THE SUPPLY SERGEANT 

The supply sergeant picks up, transports, and issues 

supplies and equipment to the troop. He works closely with 

the 1SG to accomplish these tasks. He also evacuates 

enemy prisoners of war and assists in the evacuation of 

soldiers who are killed in action to the graves registration 

collection point. 

(IX) THE MAINTENANCE SERGEANT 

The maintenance sergeant is responsible for the prompt 

battlefield repair or recovery of damaged or inoperable 

equipment. He works closely with the 1SG to accomplish 

these tasks. 

(X) THE COMMUNICATIONS SERGEANT 

The communications sergeant ensures the troop TOC 

and its crew are prepared for combat operations, and assists 

the XO in the TOC during combat operations. Within his 

capability, he repairs the communications equipment of 

subordinate elements. 

(XI) THE NUCLEAR, BIOLOGICAL, CHEMICAL 

(NBC) NCO 

The troop NBC NCO is responsible for troop NBC 

defense activities. He supervises radiological monitoring, 

chemical detection, and decontamination operations. He 

assists in maintaining NBC equipment and training NBC 

equipment operators and decontamination teams. 
2-1 

Chapter 2 

Battle Command 

Battle command is the art of battle decision making, 

leading and motivating soldiers and their organizations into 

action to accomplish missions. Battle command includes 

visualizing the current state and the future state, then 

formulating concepts of operations to get from one state to 

the other at least cost. Other functions of battle command 

include assigning missions; prioritizing and allocating 

resources; selecting the critical time and place to act; and 

knowing how and when to make adjustments during the fight. 

Instantaneous response to orders is the hallmark of 

effective battle command in any cavalry operation. Leaders 

must quickly analyze information, make tactical decisions, 

and turn those decisions into successful battlefield actions. 

Battle command of cavalry units is typically decentralized 

due to the size of the area of operations, vagueness of the 

enemy situation, and terrain unknowns. This places the 

burden of sound, timely decision making at the lowest levels. 

Leaders must develop a keen sense of situational awareness 

and constantly track the actions of subordinate units as well 

as those to the front, flank, and rear. 

Contents 

 Page

Section I. Troop Leading Procedures...........................2-2 

Section II. Situational Awareness..................................2-13 

Section III. Communications ..........................................2-17 

Section IV. Techniques of Tactical Control.....................2-22 

Section V. Command Guidance and 

 Organizational Control..................................2-27 

Section VI. Tactical Movement Formations....................2-34 
2-2 

Effective battle command begins in the planning phase 

and continues through the execution phase of each mission. 

This chapter outlines the tools and techniques a troop 

commander needs to effectively command and control a 

cavalry troop in combat. 

Section I. Troop Leading Procedures 

The nine troop leading procedures are— 

• Receive and analyze the mission. 

• Issue a warning order. 

• Make a tentative plan. 

• Start necessary movement. 

• Conduct a reconnaissance. 

• Make final decisions and complete the plan. 

• Issue an operations order. 

• Rehearse. 

• Supervise and refine. 

RECEIVE AND ANALYZE THE MISSION 

The troop commander will receive missions from 

squadron in the form of written, briefed, or radioed operation 

orders (OPORD) and fragmentary orders (FRAGO). Upon 

receipt of a mission, he will conduct a mission analysis to 

determine the who, what, when, where, and why elements of 

the mission and how much time is available until mission 

execution. 

Mission. The mission analysis must identify the following: 

• Specified tasks. 

• Implied tasks. 

• Essential tasks. 

• Intent of the higher commander. 

• Any constraints or limitations. 
2-3 

The items for analysis are derived from the squadron 

order as noted below. 

• Paragraph 2, MISSION. 

− Mission Statement. 

• Paragraph 3, EXECUTION. 

− Concept of the Operation. 

− Commander’s Intent. 

− Maneuver. 

− Specific Instructions. 

− Coordinating Instructions. 

• Execution matrixes. 

• Thorough map reconnaissance. 

List all specified and implied tasks not covered by unit 

SOP in a mission list. Identify those tasks that are vital to the 

squadron accomplishing its mission. These are essential 

tasks. Put the essential tasks in the form of a restated 

mission for the troop. The restated mission statement should 

be short and simple, and should cover who, what, when, 

where, and why.

One final note on this—keep the mission list at hand. It 

makes the job easier when preparing a course of action and 

assigning missions or tasks to platoons and sections. 

Time. Because time is usually the most limited resource 

available, it must be used as efficiently as possible. Figure 

out what has to be done and what can be done in the time 

available. Use the backwards planning process to determine 

when critical events in the planning process must occur and 

stick to the timeline developed. Get the timeline out to 

subordinates in the warning order. Strive to use no more than 

one-third of the time available in the planning process at 

troop level. The remaining two-thirds is for subordinate 

leaders to plan and prepare. 
2-4 

Consider the following in terms of time when conducting 

mission analysis and preparing the troop warning order: 

• Combat service support. 

• Precombat inspections. 

• Route reconnaissance (time/distance factors): 

− Assembly area to route start point. 

− Start point to command posts. 

− Command posts to release point. 

− Release point to line of departure. 

• Subordinate’s planning time. 

• Platoon rehearsals: 

− Battle drill rehearsals. 

− Actions on contact. 

− Obstacle breaching/emplacement. 

− Movement formations. 

Note. The preparatory actions above are triggered by receipt 

of a warning order at platoon level. 

• Time to issue troop OPORD. 

Note. One-third of the available time includes the time it 

takes to issue the troop OPORD. 

• Troop rehearsals: 

− Backbriefs. 

− Rock drills. 

− Radio rehearsals. 

• Time to move from— 

− Assembly area to line of departure. 

− Phase line to phase line. 

− Line of departure to objective. 

• Effect of weather on movement. 
2-5 

Once the mission and time available have been analyzed, 

move to the next step in the trooping leading procedures. 

ISSUE A WARNING ORDER 

Issue the warning order promptly. Elements of the 

warning order include— 

• Situation. 

• Mission. 

• Earliest time of movement. 

• Time and place of OPORD. 

• Attachments and detachments. 

• Actions triggered: 

− Security. 

− Reconnaissance. 

− Combat service support actions. 

− Precombat inspections. 

− Sleep plans. 

− Rehearsals. 

MAKE A TENTATIVE PLAN 

Develop a course of action (COA). Consider the factors of 

METT-T when developing two, or better yet, three separate 

COAs. 

• Mission. See Receive and Analyze the Mission

paragraph on page 2-2. 

• Time. In addition to the factors mentioned in the 

Receive and Analyze the Mission paragraph on page 2-2, the 

commander should consider the following details in relation 

to time when developing his tentative plan.

− Time to move from— 

 Line of departure to phase lines. 

 Phase line to phase line. 

 Line of departure to objective. 
2-6 

− Time for enemy to— 

 Attack. 

 Counterattack. 

 Reinforce. 

− Effect of weather on movement and identification of 

friend or foe. 

− Effect of NBC operations on movement. 

• Enemy. Conduct intelligence preparation of the 

battlefield (IPB). IPB integrates enemy doctrine with weather 

and terrain to determine and evaluate enemy capabilities, 

vulnerabilities, and probable courses of action. IPB is a key 

part of preparing for battle. Much of the IPB workup can be 

found in Paragraph 1 of the squadron OPORD. 

• Terrain. Analyze terrain in the area of operations. 

Consider the factors of OCOKA. (Arranged here in a more 

logical, systematic approach, based on IPB procedures and 

preparation of the modified combined obstacle overlay 

[MCOO].) 

 Obstacles. Identify all obstacles and restricted and 

severely restricted terrain throughout the sector or zone (a 

terrain sketch may be beneficial). Consider the following as 

obstacles: 

− Water. 

− Power lines. 

− Bridges. 

− Defiles. 

− Slopes. 

− Towns. 

− Embankments. 

− Railroads. 

− Existing engineer obstacles. 

− Wooded areas. 

Terrain that flows around, or in some instances through or 

over, the obstacles identified is the primary maneuver 

corridor, or avenue of approach. 
2-7 

 Avenues of Approach. Consider the following for 

each avenue of approach: 

− What size force does it support? In what 

formation? 

− Does it support long range observation and 

fields of fire? From where? 

− Does it provide any cover and concealment? 

Where? 

− Where does it lead? 

 Through sector/zone? 

 Enters/exits a flank? 

The answers to these questions will help determine what 

terrain, if any, is key terrain. 

 Key Terrain. Key terrain is that terrain which control 

over would provide a clear advantage over another force. 

Seizing, securing, or even avoiding key terrain in sector/zone 

will figure prominently in the final plan. Identify what terrain is 

key and evaluate it in terms of observation and fields of fire 

along each avenue of approach. 

 Observation/Fields of Fire. Evaluate all terrain along 

the avenues of approach in terms of observation and fields of 

fire. Determine the following: 

− What terrain provides the best observation of 

critical areas or along avenues of approach? 

 At night? 

 When visibility is obscured by smoke or 

fog? 

− What terrain offers effective range of friendly and 

enemy weapon systems? 

− What terrain provides the best fields of fire? For 

what size force? 
2-8 

 Cover and Concealment. Evaluate all terrain along 

the avenues of approach in terms of cover and concealment. 

Determine the following: 

− What terrain affords the best cover and 

concealment to the enemy and to the friendly 

forces? 

− Where are likely hide positions that support 

potential enemy and friendly battle positions? 

− What routes would a force use to move from 

hide positions to battle positions? 

• Troops Available. Analyze the troops available to 

execute the mission. Determine the following: 

 Soldiers.

− What is the strength of the platoons in the troop? 

− Can all weapon systems be manned? 

− How is the morale of the troop? 

− What is the experience level of the troop? 

− What training and skills are required? Are 

specialists such as engineers needed? 

− What is the general health status and fatigue 

level of the soldiers? 

 Equipment.

− How many weapon systems are operational and 

employable? 

− Is special equipment or additional equipment 

needed to accomplish the mission? 
2-9 

START NECESSARY MOVEMENT 

While developing his tentative plan, the commander may 

decide to reposition some of his forces before the operation 

starts so that he is prepared to meet mission requirements. If 

the entire troop needs to move, he will often execute the 

movement in accordance with a squadron plan. The amount 

of time he has to reposition his forces is determined by the 

readiness condition (REDCON) in effect. 

Note. See Chapter 7 for a discussion of REDCON. 

CONDUCT A RECONNAISSANCE 

If sufficient time is available after determining his tentative 

course of action, the commander should make every effort to 

get out into his AO and look at the terrain. Ground 

reconnaissance is the norm; however, air transportation may 

be available. Staying on the ground gives a better feel for the 

terrain than does reconnoitering by helicopter, but it is 

slower. Although faster, aerial reconnaissance does not 

provide an appreciation of the terrain from a vehicle 

commander’s point of view in terms of fields of fire and cover 

and concealment. If circumstances permit, subordinate 

leaders should accompany the commander to help perform 

the reconnaissance. It gives them an opportunity to become 

familiar with the area. 

MAKE FINAL DECISIONS AND COMPLETE THE PLAN 

Based on the new information gathered by his personal 

reconnaissance, the commander makes final adjustments to 

his plan and nails down the details. Once the plan is 

complete, he prepares the order. Troop orders need not be 

written and handed to subordinate leaders. Speak face to 

face with them if possible. Put the plan in the form of a 

standard five-paragraph field order. Jot it down in a notebook 

so every detail can be recalled. 
2-10 

ISSUE THE OPERATIONS ORDER 

Assemble the orders group. Make sure everyone in the 

orders group is present. Issue necessary graphics to 

subordinate leaders and give them time to prepare their 

maps. Ensure the overlays are neat and accurate. Messy 

overlays with broad pen strokes cause confusion and waste 

valuable time. Once the subordinate's overlays are prepared, 

check them for accuracy. (A technique for ensuring accuracy 

is to include in the order a list of grid coordinates for key 

locations that might be ambiguous in the operational 

graphics. Even neat graphics, once copied from squadron 

down to platoon, may often deviate by as much as 500 

meters.) Arrange the orders group in a semicircle from left to 

right in the order in which they will be addressed when giving 

specific instructions. 

Issue the order. Use notes when issuing the order; do not 

rely on memory. If possible, issue the order while overlooking 

the AO. Keep in mind that the order will be translated a 

couple of times before the privates receive it, and it must 

make sense to them. Talk in their language. The order 

should be short and simple, and must be logical and easy to 

follow; be clear, organized, and concise so that no one 

becomes confused. Misunderstanding the commander’s 

intent most often occurs in the transmission of orders to the 

platoon leader and his subordinates. 

Note. See Appendix C for the operations order format and 

sample OPORD. 

Conduct the confirmation brief. Immediately after the 

order is issued, call for questions from the subordinate 

leaders. After all questions concerning the order have been 

answered, begin the confirmation brief by each of the troop's 

subordinate leaders. 

The confirmation brief is used by the commander to 

confirm that his intent and guidance for the conduct of the 

operation are clearly understood by everyone in the orders 
2-11 

group before they are dismissed to begin their planning. The 

confirmation brief adjourns only when the commander is 

confident his subordinates understand their mission, his and 

the higher commander’s intent, his concept of the operation, 

the scheme of maneuver, the time plan, and the type and 

location of the rehearsal. 

REHEARSE 

Rehearsals are of paramount importance before 

executing any plan. Rehearsals help in the following ways. 

• Clarify the commander’s intent. 

• Expose combat, combat support, combat service 

support, or disconnected activities in the plan. 

• Reinforce the scheme of maneuver and fire support 

plan. 

• Focus on actions and decision points critical to 

mission accomplishment. 

• Ensure subordinates explicitly understand their 

missions, how their missions relate to each other, and 

how each mission relates to the commander’s plan. 

• Outline conditions that, when present, would 

necessitate execution of branch plans. 

• Provide feedback to the commander. 

Rehearsals instill confidence in participants by— 

• Giving participants faith in the success of their own 

plan as well as in their commander’s plan. 

• Providing subordinates with purpose, direction, and 

motivation. 

• Enabling leaders to execute missions with speed, 

flexibility, and audacity. 
2-12 

There are generally seven types of rehearsals—full, key 

leader, terrain model, sketch map, map, radio, and backbrief. 

Preparation time and resources for each range from 

extensive to minimal. At troop level, the most common 

rehearsal types are backbrief, map, sketch map, terrain 

model, and radio. 

Backbrief. During the backbrief, each subordinate leader 

briefs the commander of how he intends to accomplish his 

mission before he issues his OPORD to his respective unit. 

By having subordinates explain their intent and concept of 

operation, the commander can ensure their plans support his 

own. Flaws or potential problems with the plan may be 

revealed at this time. 

Do not confuse the backbrief rehearsal with the 

confirmation brief the commander uses immediately after he 

issues an OPORD to determine how well his subordinate 

leaders understand the order. 

Map/Sketch Map/Terrain Model. Using either a map and 

overlay of the same scale as used to plan and execute the 

operation, a large scale sketch map, or a terrain model, the 

commander and subordinate leaders move unit markers in a 

sequential (either by phase, event, or time), interactive, 

verbal execution of the operation. These type rehearsals are 

essentially conducted like a war game to show the planned 

sequence of action-reaction-counteraction to critical events 

or phases of the operation. This is a good opportunity to 

coordinate not only actions of the unit but also critical 

locations such as contact points, checkpoints, boundaries, 

battle positions, and hide positions among subordinate 

leaders. 

Radio. Using existing communications networks (either 

FM or wire), the commander and subordinate leaders 

verbally and interactively execute critical portions of the 

operation. This technique can have obvious communications 

security disadvantages; if so, then only the essential, most 

critical portions of the operation are rehearsed. Radio 
2-13 

rehearsals require few resources and little time and are best 

used in conjunction with other methods or to further refine 

the plan. 

SUPERVISE AND REFINE 

The last step in troop leading procedures must not be 

neglected. Failure to supervise the execution of the order, or 

to refine the plan as the situation changes, is the road to ruin. 

The importance of this step cannot be overemphasized. 

Actions during the final step may include, but are not limited 

to, higher commander and his staff being present in the 

subordinate unit staff planning process. 

Section II. Situational Awareness 

Situational awareness is always keeping a clear picture of 

the tactical situation, both mentally and graphically. This 

picture includes both the friendly and enemy situation and an 

understanding of the relevant terrain. Since the troop 

normally operates dispersed over wide frontages, it is 

essential that all leaders maintain situational awareness so 

they can make sound, quick tactical decisions. Situational 

awareness also permits the leaders to anticipate events and 

relate separate pieces of information to form logical 

conclusions. One of the critical outcomes of situational 

awareness observed by all leaders is a reduction of fratricide 

incidents. 

BATTLEFIELD FRAMEWORK 

How the commander has structured the battlefield 

impacts the troop commander’s ability to maintain good 

situational awareness. A commander will structure the 

battlefield based on the conditions of METT-T. The 

framework of the battlefield can vary from a very rigid 

extreme with an obvious front and rear boundary and closely 

tied adjacent units, to a very dispersed and decentralized 

structure with no secure areas, unit boundaries, or definable 

front. Between these extremes is an unlimited number of 

possible variations. Maintaining situational awareness will 

become more difficult the more unstructured the battlefield 
2-14 

is. Modern, highly mobile operations with small forces lend 

themselves to a less rigid framework which will challenge the 

ability to maintain a good picture of the battlefield. 

PICTURING THE BATTLEFIELD 

To have a good picture of the battlefield, all leaders must 

have virtually perfect knowledge of the friendly situation one 

level higher than their own. This means that all principal 

subordinate leaders must know the troop situation and the 

troop commander must know the squadron situation. All 

leaders must have accurate knowledge of the terrain, and 

they must know as much as possible about the enemy. The 

requirement to maintain a real-time picture of the battlefield 

one level higher does not relieve leaders of the requirement 

to understand the situation two levels higher. The difference 

is that a leader’s understanding of the situation two levels 

higher than his own does not have to be as specific or in real 

time. 

Most of the information passed between elements is in 

the form of reports over FM radio. The troop commander 

receives many reports as a result of his troop graphics. Good 

graphics require that the subordinate elements report 

periodically as they accomplish tasks. The troop commander 

must be aware of when subordinates report so he will know 

how current his visualization of the situation is. If an element 

does not report in a timely manner, the commander must 

quickly determine the situation of the overdue element. 

Although many reports may not be addressed specifically 

to him, particularly on the squadron net, the commander 

must monitor them by eavesdropping on the nets as traffic is 

sent. How effectively he can accomplish this is, to some 

degree, experience dependent; however, there are 

techniques he can use to relate the information to his map 

and thereby track the tactical situation. The troop XO plays 

an important role in assisting the troop commander and 

platoon leaders in maintaining situational awareness. The 

troop XO provides leaders with periodic updates of friendly 

units to the front, flanks, and rear, based on traffic from the 

squadron operations and intelligence (OI) net. 
2-15 

The commander’s map is the key to maintaining 

situational awareness (see Figure 2-1). He should plot all 

friendly position reports up to one level higher than his own. 

Information from spot reports should also be plotted. Using 

different colors for friendly and enemy elements allows quick 

distinction. To avoid cluttering the map, he should place a dot 

or symbol with a number on his map where the element is 

located. The same number is then written in the map margin 

(or beyond the area of operations) with the complete spot 

report or unit identification next to it. This notation should 

also include the time. As positions or reports are updated, 

the old symbol is crossed off and a new one with a 

corresponding notation is added. This system allows the 

commander to easily track and monitor the tactical situation. 

This system is augmented by a formal operations log kept in 

the troop TOC by the XO or NCOIC. 

Figure 2-1. Sample situation map (troop commander). 

RA RA RA RB

RB BA BA BA

BB

BB

BC

BC

BC

RC RC

RC

RB BC

W/G

W G W G

A-B B-C

PL OAK (LOA)

PL PINE

PL SPRUCE

PL MAPLE (L/D)

1 2

B

1 201

R = Red

W = White

B = Blue

G = Green

= Mortars

= Trp TOC

= Sqdn TOC

A = Alpha Sec

B = Bravo Sec

C = Charlie Sec

1 = 1 BRDM

(0630)

2 = 2 BTR

(0642)

1 3
2-16 

BATTLE SPACE 

Situational awareness, as previously discussed, is critical 

to successful reconnaissance and security missions; 

however, the troop commander’s primary attention must be 

on his battle space. Battle space for the cavalry troop is 

determined by the location of individual platoons and 

sections, the range of direct-fire weapons, observation, 

sensors, and the terrain on which they are applied. This 

space is the immediate area over which the troop has 

influence. The troop commander must be aware of the 

general situation, but he must actively direct and manage all 

activity within his battle space. Most of the troop 

commander’s command and control efforts focus on what is 

happening within his battle space and shaping his battle 

space to make it more efficient. 

FRATRICIDE 

Fratricide is a significant danger to all forces operating on 

a mobile battlefield where weapon system lethality is 

significantly greater than friend or foe identification ability. For 

this reason, situational awareness on the part of all leaders, 

particularly the commander, is critical not only to mission 

success but also to survival. 

Under these types of conditions, it is critical that the 

commander know where other friendly elements are 

operating. With this knowledge of the situation, he must 

anticipate dangerous situations and take steps to either avoid 

or mitigate them. The commander must constantly be vigilant 

to changes and developments in the situation that may place 

his elements in danger. He must also ensure all subordinate 

unit positions are constantly sent to higher headquarters so 

all other friendly elements are aware of where they are and 

what they are doing. When the commander perceives a 

potentially dangerous situation, he must personally use the 

squadron command net to coordinate directly with the 

friendly element involved. 
2-17 

Section III. Communications 

NETS 

Several troop radio nets are used to circulate the volume 

of information in any combat operation. A troop command 

net links the troop commander with his subordinate units 

(see Figure 2-2). A troop fire support net links subordinate 

units with the fire support team (FIST) and mortar section 

(see Figure 2-3). Each net has an assigned radio frequency, 

but not necessarily a dedicated radio. 

Figure 2-2. Troop command net. 

3D

PSG

4TH

PLT LDR

1ST

PLT LDR

1ST

PSG

TROOP

CP

TROOP

CDR

2D

2D PSG

PLT LDR

3D

PLT LDR

1SG

4TH

PSG

FSO
2-18 

Figure 2-3. Troop fire support net. 

In the troop CP, three additional radio nets are 

established to link the troop with the SCO and his 

headquarters. The squadron operations and intelligence (OI) 

net is used primarily to transfer enemy and friendly 

information by FM radio. All routine and recurring reports 

from the troop to squadron are transmitted on this net. 

Squadron headquarters uses this net to transmit information 

about current enemy and friendly situations within the 

squadron’s AO. It is often used to issue FRAGOs. The troop 

commander and the XO are linked to the SCO by an FM 

squadron command net. This net is reserved strictly for use 

by the SCO, XO, S3, and CPs; and by subordinate troop, 

company, and battery commanders. In addition, an AM 

3D

PSG

ENTER AS NECESSARY

OPERATES ON NET

1ST

PSG

2D

PLT LDR

2D

PSG

4TH

PLT LDR

MORT

FDC

FSO

(FIST)

4TH

PSG

TROOP

CDR

3D

PLT LDR

XO/

TOC

1ST

PLT LDR
2-19 

squadron command net allows the SCO to command and 

control the squadron when it is spread over distances that 

exceed the range of FM radios (see Figure 2-4). 

Figure 2-4. Troop command post external nets. 

EAVESDROP 

This tool is used by all cavalrymen. It is designed to give 

leaders time to think before they act. Most leaders have a 

hard time making decisions while they are talking on the 

radio. Decisions are usually better if the commander listens 

closely to what is said, and if he has uninterrupted time to 

consider information received. Eavesdropping is a method of 

communicating based on that principle. Everyone simply 

listens to the information sent from one leader to another, 

and unless necessary, stays off the radio net. In the troop, for 

SQDN CMD NET

FM SECURE

SQDN OI NET

FM SECURE

SQDN CMD NET

AM VOI

S

CE

QDN A/L NET

FM SECURE

(ENTER AS NECESSARY)

TROOP

CP

SQDN

CDR

SQDN

TAC &

TOC

SQDN

TOC

SQDN

ALOC
2-20 

example, reports from scout platoons are transmitted to the 

troop CP, where the XO reviews and records them. All others 

listen in and record the information themselves. Everyone 

stays off the net yet remains informed. If all or part of a 

transmission is missed, enter the net and quickly get the 

needed information from the troop CP. 

FIXED CALL SIGNS 

Fixed call signs are tools that establish immediate identity 

of subunits and leaders, thereby reducing the length of 

transmissions on the radio. These call signs eliminate the 

confusion often caused by the ever-changing signal 

operation instructions (SOI). Each platoon is referred to by a 

color, and leaders are referred to by numbers. These call 

signs do not change. An example of fixed call signs for a 

cavalry troop is outlined below. 

Fixed Call Signs 

Element Call Sign

 TROOP HEADQUARTERS BLACK 

 FIST Black 1 

 Medics Black 2 

 TOC Black 3 

 Supply Black 4 

 XO Black 5 

 Commander Black 6 

 1SG Black 7 

 Maintenance Black 8 

 Mortars Black 9 

 NBC Black 10 
2-21 

 1ST PLATOON (Scout) RED 

 Plt Ldr 11 Red 1 

 Sec Ldr 12 Red 2 

 Sqd Ldr 13 Red 3 

 PSG 14 Red 4 

 Sec Ldr 15 Red 5 

 Sqd Ldr 16 Red 6 

 *Sec Ldr 17 Red 7 

 *Sqd Ldr 18 Red 8 

 *Sec Ldr 19 Red 9 

 *Sqd Ldr 10 Red 0 

 2D PLATOON (Tank or AT) WHITE 

 Plt Ldr 21 White 1 

 TC 22 White 2 

 TC 23 White 3 

 PSG 24 White 4 

 3D PLATOON (Scout) BLUE 

 Plt Ldr 31 Blue 1 

 Sec Ldr 32 Blue 2 

 Sqd Ldr 33 Blue 3 

 PSG 34 Blue 4 

 Sec Ldr 35 Blue 5 

 Sqd Ldr 36 Blue 6 

 *Sec Ldr 37 Blue 7 

 *Sqd Ldr 38 Blue 8 

 *Sec Ldr 39 Blue 9 

 *Sqd Ldr 30 Blue 0 

 4TH PLATOON (Tank or AT) GREEN 

 Plt Ldr 41 Green 1 

 TC 42 Green 2 

 TC 43 Green 3 

 PSG 44 Green 4 

*Light troop only 
2-22 

Section IV. Techniques of Tactical Control 

CHAIN OF COMMAND 

The troop commander cannot personally supervise the 

execution of all combat tasks he assigns. He must depend 

on a trusted team of subordinate leaders. The chain of 

command in the troop extends from the commander to the 

platoon leaders and section leaders. Within the platoons, it 

extends from platoon leaders and their platoon sergeants to 

section sergeants to vehicle/crew commanders. The troop 

XO and the first sergeant serve as the commander’s 

principal assistants. They help coordinate the actions of 

subordinate units to ensure unity of effort. They also ensure 

the troop has what it needs to accomplish its assigned tasks. 

ORDERS GROUP 

The troop orders group consists of all subordinate leaders 

required to receive and execute the troop commander’s 

orders. As a minimum, the orders group should include the 

XO, the first sergeant, the platoon leaders, the mortar section 

sergeant, the fire support officer (FSO), and the leaders of 

any units that are attached or under the troop's operational 

control (OPCON). 

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURES 

A troop SOP is a written collection of standing orders. It 

establishes procedures for performing routine combat tasks. 

For example, the SOP tells subordinates what procedures to 

follow when the troop occupies an assembly area, breaches 

an obstacle, conducts a passage of lines, or reacts to air 

attack. It lists reports that are routinely sent to troop and 

squadron headquarters, and shows their correct formats. It 

also states procedures for communicating within the troop, 

obtaining indirect fire, or getting additional fuel or 

ammunition. The SOP is a valuable time saver for troop 
2-23 

leaders. Most important, the SOP keeps everyone in step, 

reduces confusion, and provides the backbone of combat 

proficiency. Disciplined execution of the troop SOP is the 

hallmark of outstanding units. 

TERRAIN INDEX REFERENCE SYSTEM 

Terrain index reference system (TIRS) is used to 

maneuver the troop, rapidly report friendly locations without 

fear of compromise, and pass out control measures. TIRS is 

not used to report enemy locations. 

Description

Each TIRS point is shown by a tick mark located on a grid 

line intersection. Each point is given a designator of one 

letter and two numbers, such as X56, placed in the upper 

right quadrant of the tick mark. TIRS point designation is 

SOP, and units determine which letters they will use. They 

may designate specific letters for specific unit sectors or AO. 

The TIRS point is then recorded as X56, located at PA2450 

(four-digit grid). 

TIRS point-to-point references designate kilometers. For 

example, 500 meters is given as “POINT FIVE,” 1,000 

meters as “ONE,” and 3,500 meters as “THREE POINT 

FIVE.” 

For shifts from the TIRS point, use cardinal directions 

instead of left, right, up, or down. Using TIRS, “FROM X-RAY 

FIVE SIX—EAST ONE POINT SEVEN—NORTH POINT 

SEVEN” translates to “From the tick mark for TIRS point 

X56, shift east 1,700 meters and north 700 meters.” When 

each TIRS point is placed on a four-digit grid intersection, the 

use 
2-24 

of shifts makes the TIRS as accurate as the six-digit grid 

system. For an example of a TIRS point in use, refer to 

Figure 2-5. 

Figure 2-5. Placing TIRS on the map. 

Application 

The squadron normally issues the TIRS to be used for the 

operation as early as possible, perhaps with the warning 

order. The TIRS list should be issued to elements as an 

annex to a written OPORD. 

The squadron should designate four to six TIRS points in 

each 10-kilometer square. The squadron TIRS should 

normally be sufficient for the troop to operate; however, if the 

troop designates additional TIRS, it should always ensure 

only squadron TIRS are referenced in its communications 

with higher headquarters. 

53

52

51

50

49

48

47

22 23 24 25 26 27 28

EAST RIVER

K TOWN

31

30
2-25 

TIRS should be used routinely to control combat 

operations. Use them— 

• To identify BPs and to pass out control measures 

(such as LDs, PLs, and boundaries) quickly. 

• To report friendly unit locations. 

Passing control measures, such as BPs, sector 

boundaries, and PLs, are quick and accurate using TIRS. 

Figure 2-6 shows BP B22. A troop commander could 

report “TROOP ESTABLISHED VICINITY ALFA ZERO 

SEVEN.” To be more precise, he could report “TROOP 

BRAVO ESTABLISHED ALFA ZERO SEVEN WITH RED AT 

FROM ALFA ZERO SEVEN EAST POINT THREE— 

NORTH POINT FIVE—WHITE AT FROM ALFA ZERO 

SEVEN WEST POINT THREE—NORTH POINT EIGHT— 

BLUE AT FROM ALFA ZERO SEVEN EAST ONE POINT 

NINE—NORTH ONE POINT NINE—TO FROM ALFA ZERO 

SEVEN WEST POINT NINE—NORTH ONE POINT 

SEVEN—AND GREEN AT FROM ALFA ZERO SEVEN 

EAST ONE POINT ZERO—NORTH POINT FIVE.” In the 

second transmission, the troop commander gives the precise 

location of the center of mass for all his platoons: red, white, 

blue, and green represent the 1st, 2d, 3d, and 4th platoons. 

Figure 2-6. Reporting location using TIRS. 

48

47

EA

S

T

46

45

22 23 24 25 26 28 27
2-26 

Using this transmission, the SCO orders Troop B to 

occupy a BP that is not on the troop commander's map: 

“BRAVO SIX SIX OCCUPY A BP EXTENDING FROM ALFA 

ZERO EIGHT WEST POINT SEVEN—SOUTH ONE POINT 

ZERO—TO FROM ALFA ZERO EIGHT EAST POINT SIX—

SOUTH POINT FIVE—ORIENT NORTHEAST.” 

Figure 2-7 shows how the SCO could quickly establish 

new phase lines and boundaries between troops. 

Figure 2-7. Establish graphic control measures using TIRS. 

The SCO could transmit a new boundary between troops 

B and C by radio: “BRAVO SIX SIX AND CHARLIE SIX SIX 

BOUNDARY IS FROM DELTA EIGHT ZERO EAST POINT 

NINE—NORTH POINT EIGHT—TO FROM DELTA NINE 

TWO EAST TWO—SOUTH THREE—TO FROM DELTA 

NINE TWO EAST ONE POINT NINE—SOUTH POINT 

ONE.” 

PL BOOT

PL BOOT

PL SADDLE

PL SADDLE

N

X

X

X

X

X

BEA

R

RIVER

EAST

RIVER

D 80

D 92 PL SPUR

53

52

51

50

49

48

47

46

45

18 23 24 25 26 27 28 19 20 21 22
2-27 

PL SPUR could be sent as “PL SPUR IS FROM DELTA 

NINE TWO WEST POINT NINE—TO FROM DELTA NINE 

TWO EAST FIVE POINT THREE—NORTH POINT SEVEN.” 

Section V. Command Guidance and 

 Organizational Control 

TROOP COMMANDER 

The troop commander is mounted in an M1A1 tank in the 

heavy troop or a HMMWV in the light troop. His first priority is 

the command and control of the troop. 

The commander must provide the troop with clear intent 

and guidance for the mission. Intent and guidance facilitate 

positive command and control over subordinate platoons yet 

provide flexibility in execution for subordinate leaders. 

The commander positions himself where he can best 

command and control the troop. He may maneuver along 

with one of the tank/AT platoons or between the tank/AT 

platoons and scout platoons. It is imperative that the troop 

commander not become decisively engaged with fighting his 

vehicle. He must retain the ability to control the actions of his 

troop. The troop commander operates on both troop and 

squadron command radio nets. He must have the capability 

to communicate to subordinates as well as to the squadron 

commander. 

TROOP TOC 

The purpose of the troop tactical operations center (TOC) 

is to report information to the higher headquarters. The troop 

TOC is the critical link between squadron and troop. One of 

the primary purposes of the cavalry troop is to report, and the 

troop TOC is central to that function. The troop TOC 

operates under the direction of the troop XO who is 

responsible for assisting the commander in the command 
2-28 

and control of the troop. The troop TOC takes reports from 

subordinate units in the troop, processes the information, 

and reports the information to the higher headquarters. The 

TOC tracks the battle at the troop and squadron level and 

relays information to the commander and subordinate 

platoons pertaining to the friendly/enemy situation. The TOC 

is the net control station for the troop command net and 

operates on the squadron command and OI net. The troop 

TOC also monitors and operates as necessary on the 

squadron A/L and the troop fire direction net. 

In the heavy troop the TOC vehicle is an M577. An M3 

CFV moves with the heavy troop TOC to provide local 

security for the M577 and to serve as a command and 

control vehicle for the XO if the commander is out of action. 

The XO should not conduct TOC operations out of the CFV 

because his experience is needed in the TOC vehicle to 

handle the information flow between troop and squadron 

over the OI and command nets. If the commander is out of 

action, the XO should avoid, if possible, rushing forward to 

assume command of the troop because of the importance of 

the activities in the TOC. The XO should assume command 

of the troop from the TOC until the battle is over. However, if 

the XO does need to move forward to command and control 

the troop, a qualified replacement must be placed in the TOC 

to assume his duties. This individual may be the FIST chief, 

one of the platoon leaders, or the first sergeant. The correct 

replacement for the XO in the TOC should be based on the 

depth available at any one of the above mentioned positions. 

The light troop TOC is a cargo HMMWV with a shelter. 

The primary concern when positioning the troop TOC is 

based on the TOC’s ability to communicate with the 

squadron and the subordinate elements of the troop. The 

TOC position should also be an area that provides good 

cover and concealment from enemy and limited access to 

civilian population. During reconnaissance or offensive 

operations, maneuver the TOC at least one terrain feature 

behind troop combat elements. During security or defensive 

operations, the TOC should be positioned in sufficient depth 
2-29 

to avoid contact with the enemy yet maintain 

communications with the forward scout platoons. The TOC 

and the troop trains may collocate for increased local 

security. 

FIST 

The FIST is the critical link with the supporting artillery 

and responsible for coordinating indirect fires (both mortar 

and FA) for the troop. The team processes calls for fire from 

the platoons and allocates the appropriate indirect-fire 

system based on the commander’s guidance for fire support. 

The FIST can also assist the squadron ALO with the 

employment of close air support. 

The FIST operates on three radio nets: troop command, 

troop fire direction, and squadron FSE digital/voice. The FIST 

monitors at least one of the following nets: squadron 

command, squadron OI, and howitzer battery (supporting 

artillery headquarters in the heavy and light division). 

The FIST vehicle also may serve as the alternate troop 

TOC. The FSO has ready access to the higher level situation 

and the radio systems to replicate the troop TOC if it 

becomes damaged or destroyed. 

Command guidance to the FIST should include the 

following: 

• Purpose of indirect fires. How does the commander 

intend to use field artillery and mortar fires to support his 

maneuver? 

− Screening. 

− Suppression. 

− Development of the situation. 

− Disengagement. 
2-30 

• Engagement/attack criteria. How many rounds and of 

what type and mix will be fired at a particular target? Which 

targets will be engaged with artillery and which with mortars? 

• Control of troop mortars. If the FIST controls 

movement of troop mortars, how far forward of the scouts 

will the mortars be able to range? Where are the mortars 

going to move? When are the mortars going to move? 

• FIST movement. The primary considerations when 

positioning the FIST are security of the team and the ability to 

communicate with the squadron FSE, howitzer battery, or the 

DS artillery. The FIST is not the forward observer team for 

the troop; the troop has 19Ds who act as forward observers. 

The five techniques to maneuvering the FIST are— 

− Maneuvers with the commander. 

− Maneuvers with or near the mortar section. 

− Maneuvers with the TOC. 

− Maneuvers alone to maintain communications. 

− Maneuvers with the scouts or tanks to directly 

 control fires or to use the ground laser designator 

 (GLD). 

Note. See Chapter 8 for a more in-depth discussion of troop 

fire support command and control techniques.

TROOP MORTARS 

The troop mortars provide responsive indirect-fire support 

to the troop. In the light troop they are equipped with three 

cargo HMMWVs and two 120-mm towed mortars. The heavy 

troop is equipped with two M106 mortar carriers with 107-

mm mortars. The mortars operate on the troop command 

and fire direction nets. 
2-31 

Command guidance for the mortars should include the 

following: 

• Purpose of mortar fires. How does the commander 

intend to use mortar fires to support his maneuver? 

− Screening. 

− Suppression. 

− Development of the situation. 

− Disengagement. 

• Engagement/attack criteria. How many rounds and of 

what type and mix will be fired at a particular target? 

• Positioning. How far forward of the scouts will the 

mortars be able to range? 

• Movement. Where will the mortars move and what will 

the mortars orient their movement on, for example, 

checkpoints, a route, mortar firing positions? Who will control 

the movement of mortars—the mortar section sergeant, the 

FIST, or the troop XO?

SCOUT PLATOONS 

The scout platoons, HMMWV or Bradley equipped, 

perform reconnaissance and security missions for the troop. 

They may also perform missions within an offensive or 

defensive role in certain METT-T situations. To enhance 

command and control and to provide scout platoons the 

freedom of action required in cavalry operations, the troop 

commander should give the following guidance to scouts, 

regardless of what missions they are performing. 

• Engagement, disengagement, destruction, and bypass 

criteria. 

• Tempo of the operation. Tempo is dictated by the 

higher commander’s intent for the operation, and is a 

function of the enemy situation as it relates to the survivability 
2-32 

and firepower of the systems conducting the operations 

(METT-T). Tempo for the scout platoon determines the rate 

at which they conduct their mission and develop the situation. 

High tempo operations, for example, could be characterized 

by very aggressive reconnaissance focusing on mounted 

avenues of approach and likely enemy defensive positions. 

Engagement criteria in high tempo operations would be 

unrestricted, allowing the scouts to rapidly develop the 

situation by fire and maneuver. Low tempo operations could 

be characterized by scouts conducting a very detailed 

reconnaissance and maximizing the use of stealth to develop 

the situation. 

The scout platoon leader and platoon sergeant operate 

on both the troop command and platoon command nets. As 

required, they will operate on the troop fire direction net. For 

platoon organization for combat, see FM 17-98, Chapter 2, 

Section VI. 

TANK/AT PLATOONS 

The tank/AT platoons are the principal killers in the troop. 

They assist the troop commander in the rapid development 

of the situation during operations by fire and maneuver. The 

troop commander should give the platoons the following 

guidance to facilitate their command and control during 

battle. 

• Location in the troop formation and distance behind 

the scout platoon. 

• Engagement, disengagement, and destruction criteria. 

When and where will they be employed and against what 

size force? Will they be used to suppress in support of 

another maneuver force, or destroy by fire and maneuver? 

• Tempo of the operation. (Same as for the scout 

platoons above.) 

The platoon leader and platoon sergeant operate on troop 

command and platoon command nets. As required, they will 

operate on the troop fire direction net. 
2-33 

TROOP TRAINS 

The troop trains provide logistical support and casualty 

evacuation to the troop. The trains are under the direction of 

the first sergeant and consist of the troop combat and field 

trains. The first sergeant monitors the troop command and 

squadron A/L nets. He directs resupply, treatment and 

casualty evacuation, and maintenance/recovery operations 

for the troop. 

The troop trains may be consolidated or echeloned. Either 

way, the trains should move one terrain feature behind the 

trail combat elements of the troop. If echeloned, the field 

trains move with the squadron field trains under the direction 

of the squadron HHT commander. The troop combat trains 

consist of the first sergeant in his vehicle, a maintenance 

contact team with recovery vehicle, and a medical 

evacuation vehicle. The field trains are made up of the 

supply sergeant and the remaining members of the 

maintenance team. 

Command guidance to the troop trains should include the 

following: 

• Trains organization. Should they move consolidated or 

echeloned? 

• Movement guidance. Where do the trains move in the 

troop formation and what is their orientation for movement? 

Use checkpoints, routes, or trains locations to orient the 

movement of the trains. 

Note. See Chapter 9 for a more in-depth discussion of the 

TTP for combat service support. 
2-34 

Section VI. Tactical Movement Formations 

During tactical operations, the troop normally moves in 

one of four movement formations: troop column, troop line, 

troop vee, or troop split-vee. 

TROOP COLUMN 

Use the troop column when moving on a designated 

route, when speed is essential, and when contact with the 

enemy is not expected. This formation moves the troop 

quickly and efficiently from one place to another. Control of 

the troop while moving in column is eased, but the troop is 

vulnerable to enemy air or ground attack. 

The troop usually moves at a designated speed and with 

a set distance between vehicles when moving in column 

formation. The march speed and distance between vehicles 

are designated by the troop SOP, based on the situation. 

Note. See Chapter 7 for a discussion of column formation. 

TROOP LINE 

The troop line formation can be used when conducting 

defensive or retrograde operations in the heavy and light 

troops (see Figure 2-8). The formation may also be used by 

the light troop during reconnaissance operations when the 

troop is scrambled. 

Figure 2-8. Troop line formation. 

MORT

TROOP LINE
2-35 

TROOP VEE 

The troop vee formation is used to conduct 

reconnaissance or security missions (see Figure 2-9). The 

purpose of the vee formation is to keep maximum 

reconnaissance forward; the two tank or AT platoons are 

positioned in depth, ready to attack or defend any where in 

the troop zone/sector. This formation allows the troop to 

mass combat power at the decisive point (see Figure 2-10). 

Figure 2-9. Troop vee formation. 

C-A

A-B 1 3

MORT
2-36 

Figure 2-10. Troop commander maneuvers 

his tank platoons (troop vee). 

In the troop vee formation, the two scout platoons work 

abreast in their respective zone/sector. The two tank/AT 

platoons are collocated in depth of the scouts, and they 

maneuver in the troop zone/sector. 

Heavy Troop. Normally the distance between the scouts 

and tanks varies from 1 kilometer to 4 kilometers. The tanks 

should be close enough to respond quickly, but far enough 

back to respond to enemy contact based on the 

commander’s guidance for engagement. Generally, do not 

position the tank platoons to overwatch the scout platoons. 

When the scouts make contact with the enemy, the tanks 

should be far enough in depth to maintain their ability to 

C-A

A-B 1 3 MORT
2-37 

maneuver. The scouts are usually responsible for providing 

their own security as they move. 

Light Troop. Normally the distance between the scouts 

and TOWs varies between 500 meters to 1,500 meters. 

TOW vehicles should respond quickly to enemy contact in 

order to assist in the scout platoon’s development of the 

situation. Because of the reduced fire power in the HMMWV 

scout platoon, the TOW systems may provide the scouts with 

additional security in the form of overwatch during 

reconnaissance operations. 

Position the mortars in or near the center of the troop 

zone/sector to provide indirect-fire support across the troop 

front. Keep them positioned to fire about one third to twothirds of their range (about 3 kilometers to 3.5 kilometers, 

terrain dependent) beyond the scouts, so the scouts can 

engage enemy forces at long range with indirect fires. (Line 

of sight is the determining factor in range forward of the 

scouts. In densely wooded terrain, the scout’s visibility may 

be only 100 to 200 meters forward of their front line trace, so 

mortar range need not always be 3,000 meters forward of the 

scouts.) 

TROOP SPLIT-VEE 

The troop split-vee is a variation of the troop vee, and can 

be used in reconnaissance and security missions (see Figure 

2-11). In the split-vee formation, the scout platoons work 

abreast and forward of the troop. The two tank/AT platoons 

work in depth of the scout platoons, but each tank/AT 

platoon initially follows a single scout platoon in its 

zone/sector. The scout platoons conduct their 

reconnaissance or screening mission within their 

zone/sector, and the tank/AT platoons key their movement 

on the progress of the scout platoons. Give the tank/AT 

platoon leaders command guidance on where they should 

move in relation to the scout platoons. Tank/AT platoon 

leaders eavesdrop on the troop command net to monitor the 

progress of the scouts and to move their platoons to maintain 
2-38 

their orientation with the scouts based on the troop 

commander’s guidance. 

Figure 2-11. Troop split-vee formation. 

Develop a habitual relationship between a scout platoon 

and a tank/AT platoon. First and second platoons work 

together, and third and fourth platoons work together. This 

builds teamwork between the scout and tank/AT units, and 

gives them confidence in each other. 

All four platoons still work for the troop commander in this 

formation. The purposes of having a tank/AT platoon work 

C-A

1 3 A-B

MORT
2-39 

with a scout platoon are to have combat power spread 

across the entire troop front, to keep the tanks/TOWs in a 

position to respond rapidly in support of a scout platoon, and 

to have scouts available to reconnoiter routes and positions 

for use by the tanks/TOWs. The troop split-vee is often used 

in close or restrictive terrain that reduces the tank/AT 

platoon’s mobility so that it cannot quickly maneuver across 

the troop zone/sector. Generally the troop commander is the 

only one who commits the tank/AT platoons to conduct a 

hasty attack, to counterattack, or to move into overwatch 

positions. If he must mass the combat power of both tank/AT 

platoons, the troop commander can still shift the tank/AT 

platoons across the troop zone/sector during the mission 

(see Figure 2-12). 

Figure 2-12. Troop commander maneuvers 

his tank platoons (troop split-vee). 

C-A

A-B

MORT

1 3
2-40 

LIGHT TROOP SCRAMBLE 

The light troop scramble is a task organization that allows 

the troop commander to use a mix of weapon systems to 

enhance acquisition and destruction of the enemy under 

reduced visibility conditions and in restrictive terrain, where 

massed TOW fires are not possible. This task organization 

can also be used to respond to multiple but separate 

taskings of a troop usually associated with operations other 

than war, for example, manning checkpoints and area 

security missions. The troop commander may maneuver his 

troop in a vee, split-vee, column, or line formation when task 

organized into a scramble. 

The troop is task organized into four like platoons of 

seven vehicles each. Five scouts and two AT vehicles are in 

each platoon (see Figure 2-13). The platoon may task 

organize and operate two ways: 

• TOWs integrated with the scout sections (see Figure 

2-14). 

• TOWs maneuvering as a section to overwatch the 

movement of the scouts (see Figure 2-15). 

Figure 2-13. Light troop scramble. 

.50

CAL

.50

CAL

.50

CAL

.50

CAL

.50

CAL

.50

CAL

.50

CAL

.50

CAL

.50

CAL

.50

CAL

MK-19 MK-19 MK-19 MK-19 MK-19 MK-19 MK-19 MK-19

MK-19

MK-19

TOW TOW TOW TOW TOW TOW TOW TOW

MTR

LINE

AT PSG

SCOUT PL SCOUT PSG

AT PL

AT PL

SCOUT PSG

TRP CO

AT PSG

SCOUT PL

.50

CAL
2-41 

Figure 2-14. TOWs integrated with scout section. 

Figure 2-15. TOWs maneuvering as a section 

to provide overwatch. 

MK-19

TOW

.50

CAL

.50

CAL

MK-19 MK-19

TOW

AT PL

SCOUT PSG

MK-19

TOW

.50

CAL

.50

CAL

MK-19 MK-19

TOW

AT PL

SCOUT PSG
3-1 

Chapter 3 

Reconnaissance 

Reconnaissance is a mission undertaken to obtain 

information about the activities and resources of an enemy or 

about the meteorologic, hydrographic, or geographic 

characteristics of a particular area. Reconnaissance 

produces combat information. Combat information is a byproduct of all operations acquired as they are in progress. 

Reconnaissance, however, is a focused collection effort. It is 

performed before and during other combat operations to 

provide information used by the commander to confirm or 

modify his concept. 

Cavalry is the corps or division commander’s principal 

reconnaissance organization. Cavalry troops perform 

reconnaissance using a combination of mounted and 

dismounted techniques. The cavalry troop is uniquely 

organized, trained, and equipped to perform the crucial task 

of reconnaissance for other combined arms forces. 

Reconnaissance is the cavalryman’s specialty. 

CONTENTS

Page

Section I. Purpose, Fundamentals and Capabilities...... 3-2 

Section II. Planning Considerations, Methods, 

 and Techniques............................................. 3-5 

Section III. Route Reconnaissance ................................. 3-29 

Section IV. Zone Reconnaissance................................... 3-41 

Section V. Area Reconnaissance ................................... 3-53 
3-2 

Section I. Purpose, Fundamentals, and 

Capabilities 

PURPOSE 

Cavalry troops conduct reconnaissance forward of 

another friendly force to provide information about the terrain 

and enemy within the area. The reconnaissance allows the 

follow-on force an opportunity to maneuver freely and rapidly 

to its objective. Reconnaissance keeps the follow-on force 

from being surprised or interrupted, and protects it against 

losing soldiers and equipment on the way to the objective. 

The cavalry troop performs three types of reconnaissance—

route, zone, and area. 

FUNDAMENTALS 

Successful reconnaissance operations are planned and 

performed with six fundamentals in mind. 

• Maximum reconnaissance force forward. 

• Orient on the location or movement of the 

reconnaissance objective. 

• Report all information rapidly and accurately. 

• Retain freedom to maneuver. 

• Gain and maintain enemy contact. 

• Develop the situation rapidly. 

Maximum Reconnaissance Force Forward. In 

reconnaissance, every pair of eyes makes a difference. Do 

not keep scouts in reserve. This does not mean that every 

scout should be forward in a strictly linear sense, but actively 

employed in the conduct of the reconnaissance. 

Orient on the Location or Movement of the 

Reconnaissance Objective. From the IPB (intelligence 

preparation of the battlefield) the S2 will identify gaps in the 

squadron’s knowledge of the enemy and terrain it will be 

operating in. These gaps together with the commander’s 
3-3 

guidance form the PIR (priority intelligence requirements) 

and direct the reconnaissance efforts of the troop. Focus the 

efforts of the troop in selecting a course of action and a 

scheme of maneuver that continuously orients the troop on 

its reconnaissance objective based on the commander’s 

guidance. The troop’s focus may be a terrain feature, a 

specific area, or an enemy force. 

Report All Information Rapidly and Accurately. Higher 

commanders base their decisions and plans on the 

battlefield information cavalry troops gather during 

reconnaissance. Combat information loses value as it ages, 

so the fresher the better. Scouts report exactly what they 

see. Troop commanders and executive officers may 

summarize or clarify reports to the squadron, but must never 

delete raw information reported by the scouts. Information 

that seems unimportant to the troop may be extremely 

valuable at higher echelons. 

Retain Freedom to Maneuver. Cavalry troops must be able 

to maneuver on the battlefield to continue the 

reconnaissance mission. If the troop becomes decisively 

engaged, the reconnaissance stops. Use of proper 

movement techniques and overwatch helps prevent decisive 

engagement. IPB provides the troop commander information 

that allows him to anticipate battlefield events and to retain 

freedom of maneuver. 

Gain and Maintain Enemy Contact. Contact is any 

condition ranging from a surveillance sighting to engaging in 

close combat. Surveillance is often sufficient and is the 

preferred method of maintaining contact. When necessary or 

required, troops will use fire and maneuver to maintain 

contact with an enemy force. Once contact is gained, 

however, it is not lost unless ordered by higher headquarters. 

Develop the Situation Rapidly. During reconnaissance 

operations cavalry troops frequently and repeatedly 

encounter situations that require action to determine what the 

troop must face. These situations may be terrain oriented, 

obstacles, or enemy. Terrain or obstacle situations require 

close reconnaissance, bypass, hasty breach, if necessary, 
3-4 

and marking. If an enemy force is encountered, the troop will 

determine the size, composition (What is the enemy force 

made up of—tanks, personnel carriers?), disposition (Is the 

enemy force in an offensive or defensive posture? Is he dug 

in? What is his orientation?), and activity. IPB provides the 

threat situational information that guides the effort. 

Reconnaissance techniques, often in the form of drills, are 

used while developing the situation. 

Troops must develop the situation rapidly to get inside the 

enemy’s decision cycle and force him to react to the actions 

of the troop rather than the troop reacting to the enemy. This 

requires the troop to rapidly execute development of the 

situation at the platoon level through the execution of 

rehearsed battle drills. 

CAPABILITIES 

The ability of a cavalry troop to conduct reconnaissance is 

a function of the enemy situation, the terrain the troop is 

operating in, and the type of troop conducting the 

reconnaissance. 

• Heavy Troop 

− Can reconnoiter up to a 10-kilometer wide zone. 

− Can reconnoiter up to two routes simultaneously. 

− Can conduct reconnaissance at the rate of about 1 

kilometer per hour, depending on the terrain. 

− When faced with a heavy-equipped threat, will 

conduct either aggressive or stealthy 

reconnaissance, depending on the higher 

commander’s guidance. 

• Light Troop 

− Can reconnoiter up to a 10-kilometer wide zone. 

− Can reconnoiter up to two routes simultaneously. 

− Can conduct reconnaissance at the rate of about 1 

kilometer per hour, depending on the terrain. 
3-5 

− When faced with a heavy-equipped threat, will 

conduct stealthy reconnaissance and aggressive 

reconnaissance when reinforced with heavy forces. 

− When faced with a light-equipped threat, will 

conduct either aggressive or stealthy 

reconnaissance, dependent on the commander’s 

guidance. 

Section II. Planning Considerations, Methods, 

and Techniques 

The purpose of this section is to outline the planning 

considerations, methods, and procedures a cavalry troop 

uses to execute reconnaissance missions. 

PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS 

When planning a reconnaissance mission, the troop 

commander must take into account his unit’s capabilities and 

limitations and consider the following: 

• Time available from mission receipt to completion. 

• Threat size, composition, disposition, and will to fight. 

• Terrain and weather effects on the troop’s ability to 

maneuver. 

• Tempo of the operation. 

• The squadron commander’s (SCO) intent and 

guidance, as follows: 

− What are the SCO’s focus and desired endstate of 

the reconnaissance? 

− What triggers the squadron’s employment of the 

tank/AT company? 

− What does the SCO want the troop to destroy, fix, 

and bypass? 

• Task organization or reinforcements. 

• Critical tasks to be accomplished by the troop. 

Specifically, identify which critical tasks may be 

deleted during the reconnaissance. 
3-6 

Based on the considerations above, the troop 

commander determines the following: 

• What is the focus of the reconnaissance? What 

critical tasks must be accomplished within the 

constraints of time and terrain? 

• What specified or implied missions are associated 

with the squadron endstate? 

Note. If given a limit of advance (LOA) for the 

reconnaissance mission, the troop commander 

should plan to screen along the LOA (see Chapter 4). 

• How will the troop deal with enemy contact? What 

are the troop’s criteria for engagement, destruction, 

and bypass? 

• Under what situations does the commander see 

employment of his tank (heavy troop) or antitank (AT) 

(light troop) platoons? 

• How will the commander use indirect fires from 

mortars and artillery to support his maneuver? 

• Who controls the troop’s attachments and how are 

they integrated into the reconnaissance? 

The troop may receive attachments from higher 

headquarters. These assets may be maintained under troop 

control or tasked down to platoons for their use in the 

execution of the platoon’s specified tasks. Examples include 

attached engineers, ground surveillance radar (GSR), or a 

chemical reconnaissance element. 

• Engineers. If an engineer platoon is attached to the 

troop, the commander may elect to keep them under 

his control and treat them as a maneuver platoon. He 

may assign them to conduct the reconnaissance of 

the route, while the scout platoons move just ahead 

and reconnoiter terrain on either side. If the troop 

receives a squad or section, the troop commander 

may elect to task it to the scout platoon conducting 

the reconnaissance of the route. 
3-7 

• GSR. If a GSR squad or section is attached, the troop 

commander may elect to task organize them to a 

platoon or keep them under troop control. During 

reconnaissance operations, GSRs may be focused 

on flank avenues of approach into the troop zone with 

their movement controlled by the scout platoon leader 

or commander. In either case the commander should 

give clear guidance for positioning and orientation of 

the reconnaissance. 

• Chemical reconnaissance element. If a chemical 

reconnaissance element (squad, section, or platoon) 

is task organized to the troop, the commander may 

maintain the element in reserve to reinforce a scout 

platoon that comes in contact with a contaminated 

area, or he may task organize the element down to 

one of the scout platoons. 

METHODS OF RECONNAISSANCE 

There are three methods of conducting reconnaissance at 

the cavalry troop level: dismounted, mounted, and 

reconnaissance by fire. The troop commander may use any 

method or combination of methods to accomplish the 

reconnaissance mission under the restrictions placed on him 

by METT-T (mission, enemy, terrain, troops, and time 

available) and the higher commander’s intent and guidance. 

A fourth method of reconnaissance, aerial reconnaissance, 

may be executed by an air cavalry troop conducting a 

coordinated reconnaissance forward of the ground troop. 

Dismounted Reconnaissance 

The troop commander may direct scouts to conduct 

dismounted reconnaissance when— 

• Time is not a limiting factor. 

• Detailed information is required. 

• Stealth is required. 

• Enemy contact is expected or has been achieved 

through visual means. 
3-8 

• Scout vehicles cannot move through an area because 

of terrain. 

• Security is the primary concern. 

Dismounted reconnaissance permits the cavalry troop to 

collect the most detailed information about the terrain and 

enemy within a given zone, area, or route. However, 

dismounted reconnaissance is also the most time-consuming 

of all the reconnaissance methods. The cavalry troop, heavy 

or light, is limited in the number of dismounted scouts it can 

employ at any time. 

Mounted Reconnaissance 

The troop commander directs scouts to conduct mounted 

reconnaissance when— 

• Time is limited. 

• Detailed reconnaissance is not required, or mounted 

method affords the same opportunity to collect 

information as the dismounted method. 

• Enemy locations are known. 

• Enemy contact is not likely. 

• An air cavalry troop is conducting a coordinated air 

reconnaissance. 

Reconnaissance by Fire 

When conducting reconnaissance by fire, the troop 

places direct and/or indirect fire on positions the enemy is 

suspected of occupying. This action causes the enemy to 

disclose his presence by moving or by returning fire. The 

troop commander may use reconnaissance by fire when— 

• Time is critical. 

• Natural or man-made obstacles that could be 

overwatched by an enemy force are encountered. 

• A suspected enemy position fits the situational 

template. 

• Bunker complexes that may or may not be occupied 

are encountered. 

• Enemy locations are known. 
3-9 

The disadvantage of the reconnaissance-by-fire method 

is that the troop will lose any element of surprise it may have 

had. However, reconnaissance by fire may reduce the 

chance of some portion of the troop being caught in an 

enemy kill zone. Reconnaissance by fire may not always 

provide the desired effect. A well-disciplined force will resist 

the inclination to move when probed by weapon fires. 

When indirect-fire situations exist, the troop commander 

ensures scouts are in a position to observe the target area. 

Once the decision is made to use reconnaissance by fire, 

weapons should be used in the following priority. 

• Indirect-fire systems. 

• Machine gun. 

• 25-mm chain gun or MK-19. 

• TOW or tank cannon fire. 

Reconnaissance by fire does not mean the indiscriminate 

use of direct and indirect fires at all woodlines and hilltops in 

the hopes of causing the enemy to react. Not only will the 

enemy recognize this ploy for what it is and not react to it, but 

also it wastes valuable ammunition. 

Aerial Reconnaissance 

Air cavalry troops perform aerial reconnaissance when 

time is critical. Aerial reconnaissance is often coordinated 

closely with a ground reconnaissance troop. The air and 

ground forces complement each other. The air element can 

move forward of the ground unit and reconnoiter key pieces 

of terrain or restrictive terrain, allowing the ground troop to 

concentrate its efforts in other areas or to increase the tempo 

of its reconnaissance. The air troop provides the ground 

troop with added security by clearing the ground forward of 

the ground unit, thereby facilitating movement of the ground 

force and quickening the pace of the operation. The ground 

troop can move rapidly mounted to the areas of interest 

within its area or zone of operations and have the time to 

dismount and collect detailed information (see Figure 3-1). 
3-10 

Figure 3-1. Air scouts conduct coordinated reconnaissance 

of zone with ground troop. 

- Air cavalry platoon identifies

two stationary BTRs along

the woodline.

- Air cavalry platoon leader

sends spot report to air cavalry

troop commander. Troop

commander tells platoon

leader to develop situation

and get in contact with ground

platoon leader in zone.

HMMWV

MK-19

- Air cavalry platoon leader

sends information to ground

platoon leader and assists

ground scout section in

developing situation.

- Air cavalry troop commander

and ground troop commander

choose a course of action.

- This coordination of airground supports squadron

commander's intent, which

increases troop survivability

and squadron operating

tempo of reconnaissance.

PLT LDR

HMMWV

MK-19

HMMWV

CAL .50

TWO BTRs

STATIONARY
3-11 

Aggressive Versus Stealthy Reconnaissance 

The cavalry troop uses various combinations of 

reconnaissance methods. The method or combination of 

methods chosen by the troop and its scout platoons is based 

on the higher commander’s guidance and METT-T. The 

method or methods chosen will characterize the 

reconnaissance as either aggressive or stealthy. 

The stealthy approach to reconnaissance is more timeconsuming. It emphasizes avoiding detection and 

engagement by the enemy. To be effective, a stealthy 

approach must rely primarily on dismounted reconnaissance 

and maximum use of covered and concealed terrain. 

Aggressive reconnaissance is characterized by the speed 

and manner in which the reconnaissance force develops the 

situation once contact is made with an enemy force. A troop 

conducting aggressive reconnaissance uses firepower from 

direct- or indirect-fire systems and maneuvers to rapidly 

develop the situation. The troop will primarily use mounted 

reconnaissance and reconnaissance by fire when conducting 

aggressive reconnaissance. 

Cavalry troops must be trained to conduct both 

aggressive and stealthy reconnaissance. The troop 

commander, scout platoon leader, and squad leaders will 

most likely use many different methods over the course of a 

reconnaissance operation. The constraints of commander’s 

guidance, the opposing threat, the capabilities of the troop, 

the terrain the troop is operating in, and the time available to 

complete the mission (METT-T) all have an impact on the 

method or methods chosen by the troop leadership. 
3-12 

TECHNIQUES 

Actions on Contact 

Actions on enemy contact are a series of steps the troop 

takes when it encounters an enemy force or situation that 

warrants/demands action. Actions on contact are important 

because they allow the troop to maintain its tempo of 

operation by rapidly developing the situation and taking 

action before the enemy can gain the initiative and force the 

troop to react. At platoon level, actions on enemy contact 

consist of four steps. 

• Deploy and report. 

• Develop the situation. 

• Choose a course of action.

• Recommend or execute a course of action. 

Note. See FM 17-98 for an in-depth discussion of platoon 

actions on contact during reconnaissance. 

While the platoon that makes contact executes actions on 

contact, the commander must continue to maneuver the 

remainder of the troop to ensure a clear picture of the enemy 

situation across the entire troop front. The following steps 

demonstrate the actions taken by the platoon in contact and 

the corresponding actions at the troop level. 

Deploy and Report 

Platoon Action. The elements of the scout platoon that 

make initial contact with the enemy immediately deploy to 

terrain that affords them both cover and good observation. If 

necessary, scouts return fire to suppress the enemy, and 

then deploy to their positions. The scout making contact 

sends a contact report to his platoon leader. The platoon 

leader forwards the report to the troop commander. Once the 

scout in contact is in a good covered and concealed position, 

he sends his initial spot report, which is forwarded through 

the platoon leader to the troop commander (see Figure 3-2). 
3-13 

Figure 3-2. Scouts deploy and report then begin to develop 

the situation. 

C

B

C

A

C

1

1

3

3

3 3

A

3

MORT

2

A-B

4

1 3

PL DOG

(LOA)

PL CAT

B

A 1

B 1

B-C

C

A B

3

1

1

CONTACT
3-14 

Troop Action. All other platoon leaders and platoon 

sergeants monitor the contact report. The troop commander 

assesses the information and moves, if necessary, to a 

position where he can observe the action. However, the troop 

must not lose focus of the reconnaissance mission. 

Develop the Situation 

Platoon Action. Next, the platoon in contact defines what it 

is up against. Scouts use dismounted and mounted 

reconnaissance to determine the enemy’s size, composition, 

and orientation, and the exact location of weapon systems. 

The platoon may also use reconnaissance by fire to 

determine the enemy’s tactical intentions. The 

reconnaissance-by-fire technique should, however, be 

conducted with indirect-fire assets when possible to avoid 

revealing the scouts’ position. The scout platoon will search 

for minefields, wire, antitank ditches, and other obstacles that 

could force a friendly unit into a fire sack or cause it to flank 

itself to the enemy. To determine if the enemy can be 

supported by any other forces, the scouts search for enemy 

flanks and scour all adjacent terrain. They identify good 

counterattack routes into the flanks or rear of the enemy. 

Once the platoon leader determines the extent of the 

situation, he forwards a follow-up spot report. 

Troop Action. The troop commander will most likely tell 

the scout platoon not in contact to continue its 

reconnaissance to a designated LOA to develop the situation 

across the entire troop front. By doing this, the troop can 

determine if there are any other enemy forces with which the 

troop must be concerned. The scout platoon not in contact 

will establish hasty observation posts along the LOA oriented 

on likely enemy locations or avenues of approach. The tank 

platoons will continue to monitor the troop command net and 

prepare to act based on the commander’s intent/guidance 

and the enemy situation. 

Choose a Course of Action 

Platoon Action. Now that the platoon leader knows what 

he is up against, he considers two or three possible courses 
3-15 

of action and selects the one that best meets the 

commander’s intent/concept of the operation, is within his 

capabilities, and allows the troop to resume its 

reconnaissance mission as soon as possible. The possible 

courses of action open to him, based on the commander’s 

intent/concept, might be hasty attack, bypass, hasty 

defense/screen, or support of a hasty attack by another 

platoon(s). Some courses of action will quickly be ruled out 

because they do not meet the commander's intent and 

guidance for the operation. 

• Hasty Attack. The platoon leader can conduct a hasty 

attack if he has enough combat power to defeat the 

enemy quickly. In most cases, the scout platoon does 

not have the capability to mass enough combat power 

to defeat an enemy in prepared positions. In addition, 

the scout platoon leader may not want to risk battle 

losses that would reduce his effectiveness and his 

ability to complete the mission. 

• Bypass. If the platoon does not have enough combat 

power to conduct a hasty attack, or if it wants to 

remain undetected and continue the reconnaissance 

mission, the scout platoon can bypass the enemy. The 

platoon leader must receive the troop commander’s 

permission to bypass. If he has permission to bypass, 

the platoon leader must leave scouts in contact with 

the enemy force unless ordered to break contact by 

the troop commander. The platoon leader will know 

from the troop commander's guidance in the 

operations order if this is a viable course of action. 

• Hasty Defense/Screen. If the platoon cannot conduct a 

hasty attack and cannot bypass, it establishes a hasty 

defense or screen. The platoon will conduct a hasty 

defense if it can defend against an enemy force. If the 

enemy contact exceeds the platoon's capability to 

conduct a hasty defense, it may elect to establish a 

screen and maintain contact through observation. The 

platoon concentrates on maintaining contact with the 
3-16 

enemy and fixing it in place with indirect or possibly 

direct fire until additional support comes from the 

troop. 

• Support a Hasty Attack by Another Platoon(s). The 

platoon in contact may become the support element 

for a hasty attack by a tank/AT platoon(s). 

Troop Action. The troop commander continues to 

maneuver the troop and assists the platoon leader as 

required. He maintains situational awareness. 

Recommend/Execute a Course of Action 

Platoon Action. If the course of action the platoon leader 

chooses meets the commander's guidance for actions on 

contact, the platoon leader executes the course of action. If 

the situation dictates that the platoon execute a hasty 

defense/screen, or support a hasty attack by another 

platoon, the platoon leader reports this information to the 

troop. The report is brief. He updates his spot report (Blue 1) 

with any additional information, tells the troop commander 

what he is doing about the situation, and recommends the 

course of action that he thinks best suits the situation. The 

platoon in contact has then completed its actions on contact. 

Troop Action. The commander must approve or 

disapprove the recommended course of action, based on its 

effect on the troop and squadron mission. 

If the scout platoon is required to establish a hasty 

defense/screen, the troop commander assumes 

responsibility for continuing to develop the situation. The 

commander can do this best in a position from which he can 

influence troop actions. Based on what the scouts have 

found and reported and what the commander can see, he 

must weigh the advantages and disadvantages of each 

course of action, and choose the one that best meets the 

troop’s mission requirements. 
3-17 

• Hasty Attack. The troop can conduct a hasty attack, 

which throws the weight of one or both tank/AT 

platoons against the enemy and destroys him quickly, 

then continue its reconnaissance. The commander 

may coordinate the efforts of the scout platoon and 

tank/AT platoon(s) in the hasty attack or delegate the 

responsibility to the scout platoon in contact. The hasty 

attack at troop level should have two elements: the 

assault/attack-by-fire element and the support

element. 

Steps to the execution of a hasty attack are as follows: 

− The scouts determine that the enemy force 

encountered cannot be bypassed based on the 

enemy disposition and composition. The enemy 

encountered meets the commander’s intent for 

destruction. 

− The scout platoon leader recommends hasty attack 

to the troop commander and identifies a good 

attack-by-fire or assault position for the tank/AT 

platoons. 

− The troop commander approves the scout platoon 

leader's recommended course of action and issues 

orders to execute a hasty attack. 

− The troop commander decides to use either attack 

by fire or assault as his method of destruction. 

Heavy troops equipped with tanks can perform 

attack by fire or assault. Because of the defensive 

nature of the TOW, light troops tend to use attack 

by fire when conducting hasty attack. 

− The scout squad or section moves to link up with 

the tank/AT platoons and guides them to an 

assault/attack position. The assault element 

reports when set in assault positions, and if time is 
3-18 

available, reconnoiters the attack-by-fire position or 

the attack axis. 

− The troop commander moves to the scouts who 

are positioned in overwatch of the enemy contact. 

He also positions the FIST in overwatch to assist in 

controlling indirect fires. 

− The troop commander designates the scouts in 

overwatch as the support element. He establishes 

direction of fire and methods of control for directfire weapon systems; for example, left and right 

limits for fires, and signals for the initiation of direct 

fires and the shifting of fires as the assault element 

begins its attack. 

− The troop commander directs the FIST to fire for 

effect on enemy positions when given the signal 

(AT MY COMMAND). The FIST reports when guns 

are ready. 

− The troop commander issues the fire command for 

the support force and indirect-fire systems and 

directs the attack-by-fire or the assault element to 

execute its movement. The troop commander lifts 

and shifts direct and indirect fires as necessary to 

cover the movement of the assault element and to 

seal off the enemy withdrawal (see Figure 3-3). 

• Bypass. The troop may bypass the enemy force and 

continue the reconnaissance to further develop the 

enemy situation throughout the depth of the zone while 

maintaining an element of surprise. The decision to 

bypass is based on the higher commander’s intent for 

the operation. The troop should leave an element in 

contact with the enemy force; however, the more 

elements in contact with the bypassed enemy mean 

the less reconnaissance will be conducted. 
3-19 

Figure 3-3. Troop positions for hasty attack. 

C

C

3

3

3

A

2

A-B

1 3

PL DOG

(LOA)

PL CAT

B

MORT

B-C

B

2

4

1

A 1

4 1

SHIFTS

FIRE

MORT
3-20 

• Hasty Defense. If the troop cannot conduct a hasty 

attack or bypass the enemy, it may establish a hasty 

defense to fix the enemy while waiting for further 

orders. If this is the troop’s course of action, the 

squadron commander has the responsibility to develop 

the situation further. 

The overriding considerations in selecting a course of 

action are the intent of the squadron commander and the 

troop’s ability to complete the mission with minimum losses. 

DANGER AREAS 

Obstacles 

Obstacles encountered during reconnaissance are 

treated as enemy contact, because all obstacles are 

assumed to be covered by enemy fire. Upon encountering an 

obstacle, scouts deploy to covered positions, report, and 

then begin to develop the situation. The troop commander 

may move his tank platoon(s)/AT platoon(s) forward to 

overwatch the obstacle while the scouts conduct dismounted 

and mounted reconnaissance to determine the following: 

• Is the obstacle defended by the enemy? If so, how 

many enemy soldiers are there and where are they? 

• What are the extent and composition of this obstacle? 

How deep, wide, steep, or long is it? 

• Can the obstacle be bypassed, or will breaching be 

necessary? 

Once the scouts have completed the reconnaissance of 

the obstacle and recommended a course of action (either 

bypass, hasty attack/breach, or hasty defense), the troop 

commander must choose the course of action that best 

meets the commander’s intent and guidance for the mission. 

If the commander’s decision is to bypass or breach the 

obstacle, the troop must mark the obstacle and any lane 

created through the obstacle (see Figure 3-4). 
3-21 

Figure 3-4. The troop develops the situation at the obstacle. 

LOA

PL RED

B C

B

B 3

1

2

4

1 3

DISMOUNT

TEAM

WOODS

WOODS

A 2

MORT

DISMOUNT

TEAM

A

A 3

C 3
3-22 

Open Areas 

Open areas are dangerous for cavalry troops because 

they permit the enemy to observe or engage units as they 

move through them. When reconnoitering a route, zone, or 

area that includes an open area, do not try to force the 

reconnaissance through it. Treat it like a danger area. 

Reconnoiter the flanks using good covered and concealed 

routes. The troop should try to clear the far side of the open 

area before attempting to reconnoiter the open area itself. 

Open areas within the troop’s zone or area of operations may 

force the troop commander to abandon the use of platoon 

boundaries to facilitate the reconnaissance to the flanks and 

rear of the open area (see Figure 3-5). 

Built-up Areas 

In most areas of the world the troop can expect to 

conduct reconnaissance of built-up areas (BUA). BUAs 

range from small hamlets to large towns, even portions of 

cities. BUAs are very dangerous for mounted units and 

should be avoided when possible. If the situation permits, the 

troop should conduct a reconnaissance of BUAs from a 

distance, and then bypass them. However, it may be 

necessary to move through a town as part of the troop’s 

reconnaissance mission. 

The troop’s ability to conduct reconnaissance of a BUA is 

constrained by the lack of dismounted scouts. The troop is 

capable of finding the following in BUAs: 

• Enemy vehicles. 

• Enemy command and control facilities. 

• Obstacles such as rubble, blown bridges, and craters. 

• Logistics elements. 

• Bypasses within the BUA. 
3-23 

Figure 3-5. The troop reconnoiters to the flanks and rear of 

an open area. 

C A

C

A

A B

C

B

B

B A

B

A

C

C

2 4

3

3

3

3

1

1

3

A-B

B-C

OPEN AREA

1 3

3

1

B
3-24 

If the troop is not augmented, it is not capable of 

performing the following in BUAs: 

• Reconnoitering each building and street. 

• Reconnoitering underground structures (basements 

and sewers). 

• Determining the strength of dug-in enemy units. 

• Determining the detailed disposition of dismounted 

enemy units. 

• Conducting hasty attacks against dismounted enemy 

units of larger than platoon size. 

The following are techniques and considerations for 

performing reconnaissance in BUAs: 

• Dirt roads, alleys, and curves in paved roads are 

excellent places to employ mines. Structures in BUAs 

are excellent places to employ booby traps. 

• Ask the S2 for detailed street maps of all major BUAs 

the troop might encounter during an operation. These 

are more useful than standard 1:50,000 military maps. 

• Clearly define platoon zones. Do not divide 

responsibility for a street between platoons. 

• Observe BUAs from outside for signs of enemy activity 

prior to entering them. 

• Main roads through towns are normally accompanied 

by open areas such as parks, traffic circles, and 

medians. The enemy may use these same open areas 

for logistics elements, concentrations of armored 

vehicles, artillery positions, and combat support 

vehicle locations. 

• Collateral damage constraints may limit the ability to 

employ some types of weapon systems. 
3-25 

LIGHT TROOP EXAMPLE 

The squadron is conducting a zone reconnaissance. The 

troop zone contains a large town, 2 to 3 kilometers square, 

and the squadron main supply route, ROUTE GOLD, passes 

through the town. The troop will have to reconnoiter enough 

of the town to ensure there are no enemy who can disrupt 

movement along ROUTE GOLD. 

On approaching the town, the troop has options on how to 

enter it. The techniques used will largely depend on the 

amount of time available for the mission. If time is limited, the 

scouts will halt short of the BUA, just off ROUTE GOLD, and 

observe the town from multiple vantage points before 

entering. If more time is available, the scouts will move well 

off the route and observe the BUA before entering. In any 

case, remember if enemy is present, he will probably cover 

the main road with fires. Once the platoon is inside the BUA, 

the main road may provide the best axis for the 

reconnaissance. 

As the scout platoon observes the town, they look for any 

signs of enemy presence. The antitank platoons move into 

overwatch positions. The mortars establish a firing position in 

support of the scouts. Scouts reconnoiter to the flanks and 

rear of the BUA to find a bypass and establish flank and far 

side security (see Figure 3-6). 
3-26 

Figure 3-6. The troop securing the BUA with one scout 

platoon, ATs in overwatch, and one scout platoon preparing 

to reconnoiter the BUA itself. 

1 3

RT GOLD

1 1

1

1

1

1

3

3 3

2

A

B

A B

MORT

B

WOODS 2

A

C

WOODS

3

3

A 3 4

C

C

4
3-27 

Once the area surrounding the BUA is secured, the 

scouts move mounted to the last concealed position and 

dismount, searching for suitable entry points into the BUA. If 

there is enemy contact, the overwatching vehicles suppress 

with direct and indirect fires while the scouts move to a 

covered and concealed position. At this point the troop 

commander must decide to maintain contact and bypass, or 

continue to probe for entry points into the BUA. The 

determining factors for the commander's decision are the 

intent of the higher commander and the level of threat in the 

BUA. In most instances, cavalry troops maintain contact and 

bypass BUAs occupied by enemy forces. The enemy forces 

are handed off to follow-on forces for destruction. 

If the troop does not encounter enemy contact on its initial 

reconnaissance of the outskirts of the BUA, the scout 

platoons continue their search for suitable entry points into 

the town. Once the scouts determine those entry points into 

the town are clear, they move into the BUA and reconnoiter 

nearby buildings (moving through side and back yards, 

alleys, and other off-street paths) and surrounding areas. 

The dismounted teams from the scout platoon do not enter 

or clear each building, but look for obvious signs of enemy 

presence. HMMWVs may be brought forward to overwatch 

the dismounted team's movement with caliber .50 machine 

guns or MK-19s (see Figure 3-7). The AT platoons should 

continue to overwatch from outside the BUA. After the scouts 

complete the reconnaissance of the BUA, the troop 

continues its reconnaissance in zone, ensuring that 

bypasses around the BUA are marked. 
3-28 

Figure 3-7. Scout section reconnoitering in a built-up 

area. 

1 3

RT GOLD

2

C 3

3

B

= DISMOUNT TEAM

WOODS

WOODS

A

C 1

3

B 1

4

MORT

A 1
3-29 

Section III. Route Reconnaissance 

Route reconnaissance is a directed effort to gain detailed 

information about a specific route and the terrain on either 

side of the route that the enemy could use to influence 

movement along the route. Depending on the terrain 

surrounding the route, a route reconnaissance mission may 

be accomplished by a single scout platoon, or it may require 

the entire troop to cover the terrain and accomplish the 

required tasks. 

A cavalry troop may be assigned the mission to conduct a 

zone reconnaissance (see Section IV of this chapter), but 

also have the task of reconnoitering a route that is within its 

zone. In this case, the troop mission would be zone 

reconnaissance. However, one of the subordinate units in the 

troop, scout platoon, or attached engineers may be given the 

route reconnaissance mission by the troop commander. 

CRITICAL TASKS 

During a route reconnaissance, the following critical tasks 

must be accomplished unless the SCO directs the troop to 

do otherwise: 

• Reconnoiter and determine trafficability of the route. 

• Reconnoiter all terrain the enemy can use to dominate 

movement along the route. 

• Reconnoiter all BUAs along the route. 

• Reconnoiter all lateral routes in the area of 

responsibility. 

• Inspect and classify all bridges along the route. 

• Locate fords or crossing sites near all bridges along 

the route. 

• Inspect and classify all overpasses, underpasses, and 

culverts. 
3-30 

• Reconnoiter all defiles along the route; clear all defiles 

of enemy and obstacles within its capability, or locate 

a bypass. 

• Locate mines, obstacles, and barriers, and within its 

capability, clear the route. 

• Locate a bypass around BUAs, obstacles, and 

contaminated areas. 

• Report route information. 

• Find and report all enemy that can influence 

movement along the route. 

TECHNIQUES 

The SCO directs the troop to conduct a route 

reconnaissance as a mission or as a specific task in another 

mission. This section discusses route reconnaissance in the 

context of an assigned troop mission. 

The troop commander considers several factors in 

formulating his concept. 

• Start point, release point, and designation of the route. 

• Mission to be performed at the start point and after 

reaching the release point. 

• Time the mission is to start, and if required, be 

completed. 

• Critical points along the route identified as 

checkpoints. 

• Any constraints or restrictions. 

• IPB information on the route, to include current enemy 

situation. 
3-31 

IPB provides critical information on the enemy and terrain. 

Enemy threats may be encountered in two basic forms. 

• Ambushes along the route in close or restricted terrain 

or even tied to obstacles along the route. 

• Attack by long-range direct or indirect fires from 

dominating terrain along the route. 

Analysis of the terrain provides an indication of danger 

areas and the nature of the potential threat. From this 

information, the commander determines how much terrain on 

each flank of the route must be reconnoitered and the 

organization for combat. Any constraints or restrictions may 

also influence how much terrain is reconnoitered. 

The troop commander adds control measures to provide 

an adequate framework for the mission. He places a 

boundary on both sides of the route far enough out to provide 

reconnaissance of the dominating terrain. A line of departure 

is placed perpendicular to the route short of the start point, 

allowing sufficient space to deploy into a tactical formation. 

An LOA is placed far enough beyond the release point to 

enclose dominating terrain that overwatches the release 

point. The commander uses additional phase lines to 

maintain a coordinated effort throughout the troop. 

Boundaries and phase lines are drawn along recognizable 

terrain features. The terrain features should be visible from 

both ground and air to facilitate air-ground integration. The 

commander uses other control measures as necessary for 

flexibility in the maneuver and execution of the mission (see 

Figure 3-8). 
3-32 

Figure 3-8. Troop graphic control measures for a route 

reconnaissance. 

PL

CHUCK

(LOA)

PL

JOHN

PL

JOHN

R

O

U

T

E

SA

B

E

R

19

23

RP 58

93 18

33

55

4

16

SP

12

25

57

PL

BOB

(LD)

PL

TOM

PL

TOM

PL

BOB

(LD)

PL

CHUCK

(LOA)
3-33 

The cavalry troop normally performs a tactical road march 

to the line of departure and deploys to execute the 

reconnaissance of the route. Based on the amount of 

intelligence known about the enemy, the commander will 

determine how much security is required for the move 

forward to the line of departure. Also the commander should 

consider the effect his final disposition of forces will have on 

the troop’s follow-on mission. 

One technique for accomplishing all tasks as rapidly and 

safely as possible is as follows: Draw a 2.5-kilometer to 3-

kilometer boundary on either side of the route. Near the start 

point, draw a line of departure from one boundary to the 

other. Next, draw an LOA about 3 kilometers forward of the 

release point from one boundary to the other. Add phase 

lines between the line of departure and LOA, as needed, to 

help control the progress of the troop. To control movement 

on the route, establish checkpoints. Use checkpoints to 

identify specific areas or locations to be reconnoitered. 

These checkpoints will serve as references to orient 

reconnaissance efforts. 

One scout platoon moves out early across the line of 

departure to reconnoiter the terrain or BUAs on either side of 

the route. The other scout platoon reconnoiters the route 

itself, trailing 1 kilometer to 2 kilometers behind the lead 

scout platoon. This provides a good measure of security for 

the troop and the platoon working to reconnoiter and classify 

the route. The mortar section follows the lead scout platoon 

and remains positioned to range from 3,000 to 3,500 meters 

forward of the lead scout elements. The mortar section 

avoids moving on the route and stays on the flanks near the 

route. The tank/AT platoons follow and support behind the 

second scout platoon. They key their movement on the 

advance of the scout platoons. The tank/AT platoons should 

be kept back in depth to retain flexibility, because they must 

be ready to react anywhere in the troop zone. The troop 

trains follow about 2 kilometers behind the tank/AT platoons, 

and bound from one covered and concealed position to 

another. The troop CP displaces generally along the route 
3-34 

using terrain that affords effective and continuous 

communications with troop elements and the squadron. The 

troop commander positions himself to observe the actions of 

the scout platoons. 

EXAMPLE OF A TROOP ROUTE RECONNAISSANCE 

The 1st platoon (scout) crosses the LD (PL BOB) using 

the two-section organization, and reconnoiters the terrain on 

either side of ROUTE SABER up to PL TOM. The platoon 

looks for the threat around the outskirts of the village, and 

explores routes into the village that intersect ROUTE 

SABER. The scouts also search the woods near checkpoint 

4 for the enemy. The platoon scans the terrain north of the 

stream, and then moves up. One section locates a fording 

site west of the bridge at checkpoint 16, and the other 

section swims the stream on the east. The platoon makes a 

quick visual inspection of the bridge, then searches for the 

threat in the forested terrain near checkpoints 12 and 55. 

The mortar section crosses the LD next, about 2 kilometers 

behind the 1st platoon (scout), and establishes a firing 

position on the outskirts of the village. The 3d platoon (scout) 

crosses the SP when the 1st platoon (scout) crosses PL 

TOM. 

The 3d platoon (scout) reconnoiters and classifies the 

route through the village, then moves up and classifies the 

bridge just north of town. The troop commander bounds 

closely behind the 3d platoon (scout) and observes their 

actions. The 2d and 4th platoons (tank) follow along the flank 

of ROUTE SABER about 1 kilometer behind the 3d platoon 

(scout), then move into the outskirts of the village. They 

observe the dominating terrain on the far side of the stream 

while the 3d platoon (scout) reconnoiters the bridge. The 

troop CP and trains remain in concealed positions south of 

the LD (see Figure 3-9). 
3-35 

Figure 3-9. Route reconnaissance (part one). 

PL

CHUCK

(LOA)

PL

JOHN

PL

JOHN

RO

U

T

E

SA

B

E

R

19

23

RP 58

93 18

33

55

4

16

SP

12

25

57

PL

BOB

(LD)

PL

TOM

PL

TOM

PL

BOB

(LD)

PL

CHUCK

(LOA)

MORT

CBT

TOC

B

3 2

1

A 1

4
3-36 

The 1st platoon continues to reconnoiter in zone up to PL 

JOHN. The platoon searches the wooded areas for the 

threat, and explores the high-speed lateral routes to the east 

and west of ROUTE SABER. The platoon clears the 

shoulders and makes a visual inspection of the defile on 

ROUTE SABER at checkpoint 19, then moves forward to 

search the outskirts of the village at checkpoint 33. As with 

the first village, the platoon looks for threat forces along the 

roads into the village. The mortar section follows the 1st 

platoon and establishes a firing position on the edge of the 

woods southwest of checkpoint 19. The 3d platoon continues 

classifying the route along ROUTE SABER. At the defile near 

checkpoint 19, scouts using mine detectors check the route 

to ensure it is free of mines. The 2d and 4th platoons cross 

the bridge at checkpoint 16, and then move into concealed 

positions in the woods on either side of ROUTE SABER near 

checkpoint 19. The troop CP moves to a concealed position 

on high ground near checkpoint 12. The troop trains move 

into covered and concealed positions in the village south of 

checkpoint 16 (see Figure 3-10). 

As the 1st platoon crosses PL JOHN and approaches the 

RP, the lead scout squad of Bravo section is hit by cannon 

and heavy machine-gun fire from concealed positions near 

checkpoint 93. The vehicle has its left track blown off and 

sustains external damage. The gunner and one scout are 

wounded by shell fragments. The PSG immediately returns 

fire and deploys to cover then reports the contact to the 

platoon leader who forwards a contact report to the troop 

commander. Once the PSG determines the location of the 

enemy force, he sends a spot report to the platoon leader 

and a request for immediate suppression to the troop FSO. 

After the call for fire is sent forward, the PSG directs his 

remaining scout squad to search for additional threat forces 

in the woods north of the RP and along the high-speed route 

heading northeast (see Figure 3-11). As mortar fire falls on 

the enemy position, the 1st platoon leader quickly moves up 

near checkpoint 58 to observe the threat. He directs his 

section to search the woods north of checkpoint 57, and to 

move around to the west flank of the threat and find out 
3-37 

Figure 3-10. Route reconnaissance (part two). 

PL

CHUCK

(LOA)

PL

JOHN

PL

JOHN

RO

U

T

E

SA

B

E

R

19

23

RP 58

93 18

33

55

4

16

SP

12

25

57

PL

BOB

(LD)

PL

TOM

PL

TOM

PL

BOB

(LD)

PL

CHUCK

(LOA)

CBT

B 1

2

TOC

A 1

3

4

MORT
3-38 

Figure 3-11. Route reconnaissance (part three). 

PL

CHUCK

(LOA)

PL

JOHN

PL

JOHN

ROUTE SABER

19

23

RP

58

93 18

33

55

4

16

SP

12

25

57

PL

BOB

(LD)

PL

TOM

PL

TOM

PL

BOB

(LD)

PL

CHUCK

(LOA)

2

TOC

3

4

MORT

B 1

2

4

A 1

MRP

CBT
3-39 

what the platoon is up against and whether or not the threat 

force is supported by other elements in the village at 

checkpoint 18. He then reports to the troop commander. The 

troop commander immediately moves forward to join the 1st 

platoon leader and to see the situation for himself. En route, 

the commander tells the 2d and 4th platoons to move into 

concealed positions in the village at checkpoint 33, and to 

prepare to counterattack. The 3d platoon continues to 

reconnoiter the route through the village at checkpoint 33, 

and then moves into covered positions along ROUTE 

SABER just south of checkpoint 33. The troop CP holds in 

place and reports the situation to squadron. The 1SG quickly 

leads the M88 and the medic vehicle forward to treat and 

evacuate the injured scouts and their damaged vehicle. 

Dismounted scouts from the 1st platoon determine that 

the threat force consists of three BMPs and one T-64 in 

prepared positions. Threat crews remain mounted and 

continue to slew turrets, scanning for more friendly elements. 

The threat reinforced platoon is oriented southeast toward 

the route. Their western flank is free of obstacles and 

unobserved. The troop commander decides to conduct a 

hasty attack (see Figure 3-12). 

When the tank platoons complete their hasty attack, the 

troop commander gets permission to advance beyond the 

LOA and reconnoiter the enemy position. The 3d platoon 

returns to complete the reconnaissance of ROUTE SABER. 

As the platoon checks for mines along the route to the RP, 

they discover the route is mined just short of the RP. They 

find a bypass around the obstacle and forward a bypass 

report (Blue 10) to the troop XO. The platoon then organizes 

into two sections and moves out to occupy OPs overlooking 

the lateral routes at the east and west flanks of the troop 

near PL CHUCK. The troop CP moves into position on high 

ground near checkpoint 58. The 1SG directs activities of the 

troop trains, to include evacuation of injured soldiers and 

inoperable vehicles, security and evacuation of injured 

prisoners, requests for casualty replacements and resupply. 
3-40 

Figure 3-12. Route reconnaissance (part four). 

PL

CHUCK

(LOA)

PL

JOHN

PL

JOHN

ROUTE SABER

19

23

RP

58

18

33

55

4

16

SP

12

25

57

PL

BOB

(LD)

PL

TOM

PL

TOM

PL

BOB

(LD)

PL

CHUCK

(LOA)

TOC

3

MORT

2

4

A 1 B

4

MRP

2

93

1

CBT
3-41 

Section IV. Zone Reconnaissance 

Zone reconnaissance is the directed effort to obtain 

detailed information concerning all routes, obstacles, terrain, 

and enemy forces within a zone defined by boundaries. 

Obstacles include chemical and radiological contamination. A 

zone reconnaissance is assigned when the enemy situation 

is vague or when information concerning cross-country 

trafficability is desired. It is appropriate when previous 

knowledge of the terrain is limited or when combat 

operations have altered the terrain. 

CRITICAL TASKS 

Zone reconnaissance is a deliberate, time-consuming 

process. During a zone reconnaissance, the troop 

accomplishes the following critical tasks unless specifically 

directed otherwise by the higher commander: 

• Reconnoiter all terrain within the zone. 

• Inspect and classify all bridges within the zone. 

• Locate fords or crossing sites near all bridges in the 

zone. 

• Inspect and classify all overpasses, underpasses, and 

culverts. 

• Locate and clear all mines, obstacles, and barriers in 

the zone within its capability. 

• Locate a bypass around BUAs, obstacles, and 

contaminated areas. 

• Find and report all enemy forces within the zone. 

• Report reconnaissance information. 
3-42 

TECHNIQUES 

The cavalry troop is usually assigned a zone 

reconnaissance as part of a squadron zone reconnaissance 

mission. 

A zone reconnaissance mission is very time-consuming. 

Any commander who orders this mission must remember the 

number and complexity of the tasks to be accomplished. If 

he wants a faster tempo, he must prioritize reconnaissance 

tasks for the troop. 

The cavalry troop can effectively reconnoiter a zone from 

6 to 10 kilometers wide. If stretched any farther, the troop 

quickly exceeds its ability to accomplish the critical tasks. 

Because the enemy situation is vague and knowledge of 

the terrain is limited to what is shown on maps or aerial 

photos, platoons will face unexpected situations around 

every corner; therefore, the course of action selected must 

also provide a good measure of protection for the troop as it 

executes the mission. When considering techniques of 

conducting a zone reconnaissance, the scheme of maneuver 

has to be flexible. The troop commander must convey his 

intent to subordinates so they can act quickly and without 

orders. He should employ forces, tank or AT platoons, in 

depth to give the troop flexibility and responsiveness. 

When the troop receives a zone reconnaissance mission, 

the zone is usually identified by lateral boundaries. The line 

of departure and a reconnaissance objective or LOA are 

specified. The commander should divide the troop zone into 

two platoon zones for the scout platoons. Use caution when 

drawing the boundary. Make sure it is on easily identifiable 

terrain that is not a high speed avenue of approach. The 

number of critical tasks within the troop zone, and terrain 

restrictions should guide the commander in determining the 

location of the scout platoon boundaries. Doctrinal distances 

are not always the best solution if one platoon will be 

overtasked. 
3-43 

Add phase lines every 5 to 8 kilometers on easily 

identifiable terrain to control progress of the troop through the 

zone. Place contact points near the intersection of the 

boundary and all phase lines. Ensure the contact points 

provide at a minimum the potential for concealment from 

enemy observation to allow the exchange of information 

between flank units. Use checkpoints to focus the efforts of 

scout platoons and to assist in maneuvering the troop (see 

Figure 3-13). Use TIRS on maps as described in Chapter 2. 

Use a troop vee or split-vee to conduct zone 

reconnaissance. As scout platoons reconnoiter the zone, the 

tank/AT platoons follow and support behind the scouts, 

keying their movement off the scouts' forward progress. The 

tank/AT platoons are kept far enough in depth to retain 

flexibility, and yet remain responsive to situations developed 

by the scout platoons. The distance from the scouts is 

determined by the terrain and enemy situation. Therefore, 

the distance the tanks/ATs move from the scouts may vary 

during the course of the operation. Control tank/AT platoon 

movement by one of the following methods: 

• Give movement guidance to the platoon leaders. Have 

them key movement off the scouts. 

• Move the platoons by CPs, battle positions, and hide 

positions. 

Move the mortar section center of the troop zone to range 

forward of the scouts. The range forward of the scouts is 

determined by the scouts’ ability to acquire the enemy. The 

mortars may move under the control of the FIST or 

eavesdrop on the troop net and key their movement off the 

progress of the scout platoons. Regardless of who controls 

their movement, the TOC and the FIST track the mortar 

position constantly to ensure they can support the scouts. 

Note. If the mortar section is busy firing missions and 

computing fire data, they may not be able to stay 

abreast of the friendly situation. Therefore, the FIST 

or XO should be ready to control the mortars 

displacement. 
3-44 

Figure 3-13. Zone reconnaissance graphic control 

measures. 

PL CAT

(LOA)

PL

COW

PL

DOG

PL

PIG

PL

SNAKE

(LD)

C

B

A

H

K

1 3

B A

A C

PL CAT

(LOA)

PL

COW

PL

DOG

PL

PIG

PL

SNAKE

(LD)

4

9

17

14 8

3

12

21

32

25 23

7 2
3-45 

The XO displaces the troop CP through the zone using 

terrain that affords effective and continuous communications 

with troop elements and the squadron. The 1SG moves the 

troop trains about 2 kilometers behind the tank platoons and 

bounds the trains from one covered and concealed position 

to another. The troop commander positions himself well 

forward to observe the actions of one scout platoon or the 

other. His position usually depends on where he expects 

initial enemy contact or problems to occur. 

LIGHT TROOP EXAMPLE 

The troop commander deploys the troop in a split-vee 

formation. The 1st and 3d platoons (scout) cross the LD, PL 

UTAH, abreast and reconnoiter the terrain in troop zone up 

to PL OHIO. The platoons determine both the open terrain 

and the trafficability of the route within their zone. Some hill 

slopes are greater than thirty percent and dense woods 

inhibit armor movement. Except for a marshy area north of 

checkpoint 9, the open terrain is dry and firm. Both routes will 

support heavy armor movement. The troop commander 

follows the 1st platoon. The mortar section eavesdrops on 

the troop command net to follow the progress of the scout 

platoons, and coordinates its moves with the troop FSO 

accordingly. As the scout platoons cross PL OHIO, the 2d 

and 4th platoons (antitank) cross the LD. They eavesdrop on 

the troop command net and key their movement on the 

progress of the scout platoons. The troop CP and the trains 

hold in place. 

The scout platoons continue reconnaissance up to the 

river (PL BAMA). They take a close look at the dominant 

terrain near checkpoint 17 and at the village near checkpoint 

4. As the platoons approach the river, scouts move into 

covered and concealed positions, dismount, and visually 

search the dominant terrain on the north side of the river. 

The 1st platoon inspects the bridge at checkpoint 14 and 

determines that it will support up to 40 tons. Scouts also 

verify that a good fording site exists near checkpoint 8. The 

3d platoon confirms there is a fording site with a rock bottom 

just east of the blown bridge at checkpoint 3. It will support 

heavy armored traffic (see Figure 3-14). 
3-46 

Figure 3-14. Zone reconnaissance (part one). 

4

PL IDAHO

(LOA)

PL

IOWA

PL

BAMA

PL

OHIO

PL

UTAH

(LD)

C

B

A

H

K

B A

A C

PL IDAHO

(LOA)

PL

IOWA

PL

BAMA

PL

OHIO

PL

UTAH

(LD)

4

9

17

14 8

3

12

21

32

25 23

7 2

1 1 3

C 1 A

C 3

3

3

B

2 MORT

B

A 1

CBT
3-47 

As the scout platoons continue reconnaissance towards 

PL IOWA, the 1st platoon observes two stationary BRDM-2s 

on the high ground near checkpoint 12. They look like a 

security outpost. The platoon engages with immediate 

suppression from the troop’s 120-mm mortars. As the rounds 

impact, the outpost withdraws behind the ridgeline to the 

north. The 3d platoon determines the dominant terrain near 

checkpoint 21 is clear of threat forces. The mortar section 

crosses the river at checkpoint 8. The 2d platoon follows, 

crossing at checkpoint 8, while the 4th platoon uses the ford 

near checkpoint 3. The troop CP bounds forward to high 

ground near checkpoint 17. The troop trains cross the river 

and move into the woods on the northern bank. 

The scout platoons continue reconnaissance while 

moving toward the troop LOA. As the 3d platoon crosses the 

ridge (PL IOWA), Bravo section receives heavy machine-gun 

fire from concealed positions south of checkpoint 2. The 

platoon immediately deploys, reports contact to the troop 

commander, and calls for indirect fire to suppress the threat 

(see Figure 3-15). 

Under this protection, the platoon, using primarily a 

dismounted technique, reconnoiters to the flanks and rear to 

develop the situation. The troop commander acknowledges 

the report, and moves immediately to link up with the 3d 

platoon leader. The troop commander orders the 1st platoon 

to continue its reconnaissance to locate the enemy's flank 

and coordinate with the FIST to switch indirect fires to the 

squadron howitzer battery. The 3d platoon is organized in a 

three-section, three-vehicle configuration; the platoon leader 

is with the Charlie section. The platoon leader sends his 

Bravo section forward on the enemy’s left and his Alpha 

section on the right to determine if the enemy is mutually 

supported by other threat forces from the flanks or rear. The 

Charlie section sergeant and a two-man dismount team 

move in closer and determine that the enemy consists of an 

MRP with three BTR 70s and one BMP-2. The Alpha scout 

section and scouts from 1st platoon identify the right flank of 

the threat and discover the flank is unprotected by obstacles 

and is exposed to direct fires. 
3-48 

Figure 3-15. Zone reconnaissance (part two). 

PL IDAHO

(LOA)

PL

IOWA

PL

BAMA

PL

OHIO

PL

UTAH

(LD)

C

A

H

K

B A

A C

B

4

PL IDAHO

(LOA)

PL

IOWA

PL

BAMA

PL

OHIO

PL

UTAH

(LD)

A 1

B 1

C

MORT

1 3

CBT

B 3

C 3

2

A 3

4

9

17

14 8

3

12

21

32

25 23

7 2
3-49 

While en route to the 3d platoon’s zone, the troop 

commander tells the 1st platoon to continue reconnaissance 

forward to PL IDAHO and determine if other enemy forces 

are providing mutual support to the enemy in the 3d platoon’s 

zone. At PL IDAHO, he tells the platoon to establish a 

screen. The troop commander tells the 4th platoon to move 

over and join the 3d platoon Charlie section in overwatch of 

the enemy MRP, and prepare to overwatch with fires. The 

troop commander tells 2d platoon to prepare to conduct a 

hasty attack of the enemy MRP. The 1st platoon scout squad 

moves to checkpoint 12, links up with the 2d platoon, and 

guides them into position to attack the threat platoon. 

The 2d platoon reports they are set in the assault 

position. The 4th platoon reports they are set in the 

overwatch position with the 3d platoon Charlie section. The 

3d platoon leader reports that his dismount teams from his 

Alpha and Bravo sections are out of the target area and set. 

The 1st platoon leader reports he is set in a screen along PL 

IDAHO. The troop commander orders the FSO to fire for 

effect on the enemy position at his command. The 

commander issues orders and guidance for limits of fire and 

signals for the initiation, shifting, and lifting of fires. The troop 

commander issues the fire command for indirect fire over the 

command net and follows with a fire command for direct fire 

for the 4th platoon and the Charlie section of 3d platoon. The 

indirect fire from the squadron’s howitzer battery and the 

troop mortars impact on the enemy position and is 

immediately followed by the fire from four TOWs, MK-19s, 

and M2 machine guns. The commander then issues the 

orders for 2d platoon to initiate its move to the attack-by-fire 

position followed by the order for the support element (4th 

platoon, Charlie section of 3d platoon) to shift fires. The troop 

FSO shifts fires to the rear of the enemy position. The 2d 

platoon moves forward and engages the enemy target from 

the flank to complete the destruction of the enemy force (see 

Figure 3-16). 
3-50 

Figure 3-16. Zone reconnaissance (part three). 

PL IDAHO

(LOA)

PL

IOWA

PL

BAMA

PL

OHIO

PL

UTAH

(LD)

C

A

H

K

B A

A C

B

PL IDAHO

(LOA)

PL

IOWA

PL

BAMA

PL

OHIO

PL

UTAH

(LD)

1 3

CBT

A 3 C 3

4

9

17

14 8

3

12

21

32

25 23

7

2

2

3

2

C 1

B

A 1

B 1

4

TOC

MORT
3-51 

The antitank platoons consolidate in covered and 

concealed positions west of checkpoint 2. Scout dismount 

teams from the 3d platoon move in quickly, capture two 

wounded prisoners, and search the vehicles and personnel. 

The 3d platoon leader orders one scout squad to stay and 

secure the prisoners, and then completes his 

reconnaissance up to the LOA. The 1SG leads the medics to 

the location of the 3d platoon scout squad and the EPWs. 

The XO collects and transmits final reconnaissance reports 

to the squadron. 

AIR-GROUND COORDINATION 

Cavalry troops will often conduct a coordinated 

reconnaissance with an air cavalry troop. Because of the air 

cavalry troop’s ability to maneuver faster and look deeper 

than ground cavalry, they are often placed to the flanks or 

forward of ground cavalry. The air cavalry troop should focus 

its reconnaissance efforts on areas that impede ground 

cavalry movement. 

The air cavalry troop quickens the pace or tempo of the 

ground reconnaissance because it provides the ground unit 

with added security during movement and increased 

situational awareness once contact is made. The air cavalry 

troop can gain initial contact with the enemy or a critical piece 

of terrain. Once the air troop develops the situation with his 

assets, he can pass off the information/contact to the ground 

troop (see Figure 3-17). 
3-52 

Figure 3-17. Air-Ground troop coordinated reconnaissance. 

RIVER

1 2

GUIDES

PLT FORWARD

GND TRP CDR

ACT CDR

- Ground troop and air troop

coordinate zone

reconnaissance operations.

- Air troop divides the zone

into platoon zones.

- Air troop will use checkpoints

to identify critical areas.

Checkpoints should

enhance ground troop

movement throughout the

zone.

- Platoon on the right

reconnoiters forward

of ground troop, identifies

platoon ford site, and

conducts route

reconnaissance.

- Platoon on the left

reconnoiters forward of

ground troop, supports the other

platoon in conducting route

sweep, checks lateral routes

in the zone, and looks for sites

along the obstacle (river/road).

- ACT commander and ground

troop commander identify

critical areas where air-ground

coordination is required or

needed.

- ACT commander positions

himself close to the ground

troop commander (if needed).

- If the ford site or bridge site is

blocked, ACT elements

reconnoiter the site forward of

the location. They also find a

bypass to the obstacle and

lead ground troops to bypass

the location. The ACT will start

the screen forward of ground

elements.
3-53 

Section V. Area Reconnaissance 

An area reconnaissance is a specialized form of zone 

reconnaissance. It is a mission conducted to gain detailed 

information about terrain features and enemy forces within a 

specified area or point that other forces intend to occupy, 

pass through, or avoid. A commander usually calls for area 

reconnaissance before he sends his forces into or near an 

area to avoid being surprised by actual terrain conditions or 

unexpected enemy forces. 

CRITICAL TASKS 

During an area reconnaissance, the following critical 

tasks must be accomplished unless the SCO directs the 

troop to do otherwise: 

• Reconnoiter all terrain within the area. 

• Inspect and classify all bridges within the area. 

• Locate fords or crossing sites near all bridges within 

the area. 

• Inspect and classify all overpasses, underpasses, and 

culverts. 

• Locate and clear all mines, obstacles, and barriers in 

the area within its capability. 

• Locate a bypass around BUAs, obstacles, and 

contaminated areas. 

• Find and report all enemy within the area. 

• Report reconnaissance information. 
3-54 

TECHNIQUES 

An area reconnaissance is conducted like a zone 

reconnaissance. When the troop receives an area 

reconnaissance mission, the assigned area is identified as 

the terrain inside a solid, continuous boundary. Planning the 

movement to the area is the first step. Select the route(s), 

establish a march order on each route, and specify a start 

point, checkpoints, and a release point. Use a movement 

technique that keeps the troop moving quickly and securely. 

If possible, avoid contact with the enemy while en route. 

Report and bypass. Be careful when approaching the area to 

begin the reconnaissance. Use common sense. Avoid known 

enemy forces outside of the area where reconnaissance will 

be conducted; start somewhere else. 

As in a zone reconnaissance, enclose the area within a 

troop zone. Draw a line of departure, an LOA, and lateral 

boundaries. Divide the troop zone into two platoon zones. 

Add phase lines along identifiable terrain to control 

movement through the area. Place contact points at the 

intersection of the platoon boundary and all phase lines. 

Place TIRS on the map. To identify specific areas or 

features, use checkpoints for reference (see Figure 3-18). 
3-55 

Figure 3-18. Area reconnaissance. 

PL

BOSTON

(LOA)

PL

BOSTON

(LOA)

PL

DENVER

PL

DENVER

PL

HOUSTON

PL

HOUSTON

PL

MEMPHIS

(LD)

PL

MEMPHIS

(LD)

1 3

POINT TO

M

D

8

A

3

C

A22

B15

A43

11

9 5

7 18

14

SP

RP

1
3-56 

 Use a troop vee or split-vee to conduct an area 

reconnaissance. Scout platoons deploy abreast from the 

release points to accomplish all the reconnaissance tasks. 

They move out across the line of departure first. The mortar 

section moves through the center of the troop zone, 

remaining in position to range from 3 to 3.5 kilometers 

forward of the lead elements in the scout platoons. The 

mortar section could also follow one of the scout platoons, 

depending on where initial enemy contact is expected. The 

tank platoons are kept back far enough in depth to retain 

flexibility, but remain responsive to situations developed by 

the scout platoons. They key their advance on the progress 

of the scout platoons. The tank platoons are told how far 

behind the scout platoons they should stay as the troop 

deploys across the line of departure. The distance between 

the tank platoons and the scout platoons will usually be 

adjusted as the terrain or enemy situation changes. The 

troop CP displaces through the zone using terrain that 

affords effective and continuous communication with troop 

elements and squadron. The troop trains follow about 2 

kilometers behind the tank platoons and bound from one 

covered position to another. The troop commander positions 

himself well forward to observe the action of one scout 

platoon or the other. The location usually depends on where 

initial enemy contact or problem situations are expected. 
4-1 

Chapter 4 

Security 

Security is an essential part of all offensive and defensive 

operations. Cavalry provides security for the commander 

along an exposed front, flank, or rear of the main body where 

a threat may exist. Surveillance is continuous during security 

operations. Even during security missions that involve 

fighting the enemy, the scouts' primary task remains 

gathering information. Scouts do this by establishing OPs, 

conducting patrols, and performing reconnaissance. 

Counterreconnaissance is an inherent task in all security 

operations. Counterreconnaissance is not a mission. It is the 

sum of actions taken at all echelons to counter enemy 

reconnaissance and surveillance efforts through the depth of 

the area of operations. Counterreconnaissance denies the 

enemy information about friendly units. It is both active and 

passive and includes combat action to destroy or repel 

enemy reconnaissance elements. 

CONTENTS

 Page

Section I. Purpose, Fundamentals, and 

 Capabilities ................................................. 4-2 

Section II. Screen ........................................................ 4-5 

Section III. Guard.......................................................... 4-31 

Section IV. Cover .......................................................... 4-32 

Section V. Route Security ............................................ 4-33 

Section VI. Area Security .............................................. 4-33 

Section VII. Convoy Security.......................................... 4-34 
4-2 

Section I. Purpose, Fundamentals, and 

Capabilities 

Security includes screening operations, guard operations, 

covering force operations, area security operations, convoy 

security operations, and route security operations. The 

squadron performs screen, guard, and route security 

missions. Covering force operations are normally the mission 

of a cavalry regiment. Separate brigades or task organized 

divisional brigades may perform cover operations as well. 

Both the heavy and light cavalry troops perform two 

security missions (screen and convoy security) independently 

or as part of their parent squadron. Both also participate in 

guard, cover, and route security missions as part of their 

parent squadron or regiment. Either troop will normally 

perform reconnaissance, screen, defend, delay, attack, or a 

combination of these missions in support of their parent 

squadron or regiment (see the applicable section of Chapters 

3, 5, and 6 for specifics). 

PURPOSE 

Security operations are designed to obtain information 

about the enemy and to provide reaction time, maneuver 

space, and protection to the main body. Security operations 

are characterized by conducting continuous reconnaissance 

to reduce terrain and enemy unknowns, gaining and 

maintaining contact with the enemy to ensure continuous 

information, and providing early and accurate reporting of 

information to the protected force. 
4-3 

FUNDAMENTALS 

Five fundamentals are common to all cavalry security 

operations. 

Orient on the Main Body. As a security force, the troop will 

be operating at a specified distance from a main body, 

between it and a known or suspected enemy force. If the 

main body moves, the troop also moves. The troop 

commander must know how the main body commander 

intends to maneuver his forces and where he wants the troop 

in relation to his movement. The troop commander 

maneuvers his troop to positions where he can provide the 

needed security. 

Perform Continuous Reconnaissance. The troop’s security 

and the security of the main body come in large measure 

from knowing everything about the terrain and the enemy 

within the troop’s area of operations (AO). Reconnaissance 

and continuous patrolling go hand in hand with security 

operations. Cover all the ground in the AO. Determine what 

the terrain will allow the troop and the enemy to do. 

Provide Early and Accurate Warning. Early and accurate 

warning of enemy approach is the cornerstone of security 

operations. The main body commander needs as much time 

as possible to shift and concentrate his forces to meet and 

defeat an unexpected enemy attack. Put observers in 

positions that afford long-range observation of expected 

enemy avenues of approach. Use aeroscouts and ground 

surveillance radar (GSR), if available, to enhance their ability 

to see. Place remote sensors in the ground to monitor 

avenues of approach that cannot be easily observed. If 

possible, send dismounted or mounted patrols forward of 

OPs to extend their ability to see, providing additional 

reaction time for the main body commander. 

Provide Reaction Time and Maneuver Space. All security 

operations are designed to provide reaction time and 

maneuver space for the main body so it can deal effectively 

with an unexpected enemy attack. The troop provides early 

warning to the main body commander and sometimes has to 
4-4 

fight hard to buy time and space so the main body's combat 

power can be concentrated on defeating the enemy. 

Maintain Enemy Contact. Once visual or physical contact 

with the enemy is gained, do not allow him to break the 

contact. Maintain enemy contact and continue to report his 

activities until told to stop. 

CAPABILITIES 

Capabilities of the heavy troop include— 

• Screen up to a ten-kilometer-wide sector. 

• Maintain continuous surveillance of up to six battalionsize avenues of approach.* 

• Can establish up to 12 short-duration OPs.

Capabilities of the light troop include— 

• Screen up to a ten-kilometer-wide sector. 

• Maintain continuous surveillance of up to six battalionsize avenues of approach.* 

• Can establish up to 16 short-duration OPs. 

*The maximum six long-duration OPs either cavalry troop 

can occupy is a function of personnel required to perform the 

following tasks at each OP: 

• Man the actual OP. 

• Maintain radio communications with the OP and with 

the platoon leader. 

• Provide local security for the vehicles. 

• Conduct dismounted patrols as required. 

• Conduct resupply. 

• Perform maintenance. 

• Sleep/rest. 
4-5 

The ability to perform the above tasks simultaneously for 

periods in excess of 12 hours requires at least 9 to 10 

personnel (collocation of two scout squads for M3-mounted 

scouts, or three scout squads for HMMWV-mounted scouts). 

Section II. Screen 

Screen is the most common security mission heavy and 

light cavalry troops conduct. Both troops conduct screen 

missions for their parent squadrons or other forces to— 

• Provide early warning of enemy approach. 

• Provide real-time information, reaction time, and 

maneuver space to the protected force. 

• Destroy enemy reconnaissance elements within their 

capability (perform counterreconnaissance). 

• Impede and harass the enemy. 

The screen mission provides the least amount of 

protection of any security mission, and is appropriate when 

operations have created extended flanks, when gaps 

between forces exist and cannot be secured in force, or 

when required to provide early warning over gaps that are 

not considered critical enough to require security in greater 

strength. A commander normally assigns cavalry this mission 

when he needs time to respond to an unexpected enemy 

attack, and cannot afford to commit other forces to the task. 

The screen mission is defensive in nature. As such, both 

heavy and light cavalry troops screen the front, flanks, and

rear of a stationary force but only to the flanks or rear of a 

moving force. Screening operations are not performed 

forward of a moving force. Zone reconnaissance or 

movement to contact is the appropriate cavalry troop mission 

suited to the requirements of the offensive force. 
4-6 

CRITICAL TASKS 

A screen mission has certain critical tasks that guide 

planning. To achieve the intent of a screen mission, the troop 

must accomplish the following critical tasks: 

• Maintain continuous surveillance of all battalion-size 

avenues of approach into the troop sector under all 

visibility conditions. 

• Destroy or repel all enemy reconnaissance patrols (if 

within the unit’s capability and directed by the higher 

commander). 

• Locate lead elements of enemy order of battle and 

determine the direction of movement of each. 

• Maintain contact with, report the activity of, and 

impede and harass the enemy while displacing. 

EXTENDED SCREENS 

Both the heavy cavalry troop and the light cavalry troop 

normally screen a sector up to ten kilometers in width. 

However, METT-T may dictate an extended screen across 

frontages in excess of the norm. Either troop's ability to 

accomplish its critical tasks, or its ability to screen in depth, 

can diminish rapidly as frontages increase. 

Examples of extended screens are described below. 

• Heavy cavalry troop screens 20 kilometers of southern 

bank of unfordable river crossed by four bridges in 

sector. 

• Light cavalry troop screens 25 kilometers of desert 

terrain, from dominant ridge. 
4-7 

DEPTH 

Depth is also important in a screen. The term “screen

line” is descriptive only of the forward trace along which 

security is provided. Depth allows an enemy contact to be 

passed from one element to another without requiring 

displacement. Depth is advantageous to— 

• Destroy an enemy reconnaissance patrol without 

compromising critical OPs. 

• Prevent an enemy from penetrating the screen line too 

easily. 

• Prevent gaps from occurring when OPs displace or 

are lost. 

• Maintain contact with moving enemy without 

compromising OPs. 

• Prevent enemy templating of the screen line. 

Depth is achieved primarily by positioning OPs, 

particularly where there are limited avenues of approach. 

Tank platoons, AT platoons, the mortar section, and attached 

elements positioned behind the screen line establish local 

security and provide surveillance. The degree to which depth 

can be attained is a function of many factors, which include— 

• Higher commander’s intent and concept as expressed 

in— 

− Graphical trace of the screen line (LOA). 

− Engagement criteria. 

− Destruction criteria. 

− Displacement/disengagement criteria. 

• Width of the sector. 

• Depth of the troop sector. 
4-8 

• Terrain and avenues of approach it will support. 

• Attachments and detachments. 

Screening is largely accomplished by establishing a 

series of OPs and conducting patrols to ensure adequate 

surveillance of the assigned sector. Screens are active 

operations. Stationary OPs are only one part of the mission. 

Employing patrols (mounted and dismounted), aerial 

reconnaissance, ground-based sensors, intelligence from 

space-based sensor systems, and OPs relocated on an 

extended screen ensure that continuous overlapping 

surveillance occurs. Inactivity in an immobile screen 

promotes complacency. 

PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS/GUIDANCE TO 

SUBORDINATES 

The enemy situation is often vague when planning a 

screen. The troop should develop plans that are flexible 

enough to react to any enemy course of action, particularly 

the worst case. Planning considerations for a screen should 

include a detailed description of how contact with the enemy 

reconnaissance will be gained then how and where it will be 

destroyed. Planning should also cover the method of 

displacement once the main body of the enemy force has 

been identified and how that force will be handed off to the 

main body in the main defensive belt. Because of the need 

for flexibility, screen operations will often begin to inherit the 

characteristics of defense or delay missions. To cover the 

displacement of scouts, some elements of the troop may be 

required to execute missions such as delay or defend. 

Screen operations at troop level usually occur in four 

phases. 

• Movement to and occupation of the screen line. 

• Surveillance and counterreconnaissance. 
4-9 

• Gaining and maintaining contact with the enemy main 

body displacement of screen. 

• Rearward passage of lines. 

Higher command guidance should address each phase of 

the operation and cover at least the following: 

• Location/orientation/width of the screen. 

• Duration of the screen. 

• Method of movement to and occupation of the screen 

line. 

• Location and disposition of the friendly force being 

screened. 

• Engagement/destruction criteria. 

• Displacement/disengagement criteria. 

• Follow-on missions. 

• Positioning and orientation guidance for GSRs (if 

attached). 

The following must be considered when developing and 

completing the plan and executing the screen mission: 

Time Screen Must Be Established. The time the screen 

must be set and active will influence the troop’s method of 

deploying to and occupying the screen line. 

Movement to the Screen Line. If the screen mission is the 

result of a previous tactical maneuver such as zone 

reconnaissance, the troop will essentially be postured to 

begin screening from present positions. This situation occurs 

frequently, and may be the result of a FRAGO to halt at a 

specified phase line. 

If the troop is not currently sited on the screen line, 

obviously, deployment to the screen line must occur before 

actually beginning the screen mission. Time determines the 

method of occupying the screen line. Thorough analysis of 

METT-T will determine which deployment technique or 

combination of techniques best meets mission requirements. 
4-10 

Trace and Orientation of Screen Line. The initial screen 

line is depicted as a phase line and often represents the 

forward line of own troops (FLOT). As such, the screen line 

may be a restrictive control measure for movement (limit of 

advance); coordination/permission would be necessary to 

move beyond the line to establish OPs or to perform 

reconnaissance. When occupied, OPs are sited on or behind 

the phase line. OPs should be given specific orientation and 

observation guidance. 

Initial OP Locations. The squadron or troop commander 

may determine tentative initial OP locations to ensure 

effective surveillance of the sector and designated named 

area(s) of interest (NAI). At a minimum, the troop 

commander designates a primary orientation for the scouts 

during the conduct of the screen. Scouts, once set on the 

screen line, will report their location to the troop TOC and 

verify they are in compliance with the commander's 

orientation guidance. The scouts who occupy each OP 

always retain the responsibility to modify the location to 

achieve the commander’s intent and guidance for orientation. 

The OPs are positioned along or behind the screen line. 

OPs are generally categorized based on their expected 

duration of employment as either— 

• Short-duration (less than 12 hours) 

 or 

• Long-duration (more than 12 hours). 

OPs may be either mounted or dismounted. Mounted 

OPs maximize use of vehicular optics, weapon systems, and 

speed of displacement, but are more readily detected by the 

enemy. Dismounted OPs provide maximum stealth at the 

expense of speed of displacement, and vehicle-mounted 

optics and weapons. 

A heavy cavalry troop can occupy up to 12 short-duration 

OPs (one per scout squad, six per scout platoon). For 

extended periods of time, the heavy troop can occupy six 

OPs (one per scout section, three per scout platoon). 
4-11 

A light cavalry troop can occupy up to 16 short-duration 

OPs (one per scout squad, eight per scout platoon). For 

extended periods of time, the light troop can occupy six OPs 

(one per scout section, three per scout platoon). 

Width and Depth of the Screened Sector. The troop sector 

is defined by lateral boundaries extending out to a limit of 

advance (the initial screen line), forward of a rear boundary. 

The troop sector is established by the squadron or unit being 

screened. The troop rear boundary may be a squadron 

phase line and may serve as a battle handover line (BHL) to 

control passing of responsibility for the enemy to the 

protected force. The troop’s ability to gain depth decreases 

as screened frontage increases. 

Locations of Subsequent Screen Lines. The squadron or 

troop commander uses additional phase lines to control the 

operation. These phase lines may serve as subsequent 

screen lines. Displacement to the subsequent screen lines is 

event driven.

Scout Platoon Sectors. Assign clear responsibility of 

identified avenues of approach and designated NAIs. The 

nature of a screen normally requires both scout platoons to 

deploy abreast.

Tank/AT Platoon Sectors. Position the tank (heavy troop) 

or AT (light troop) platoons in the scout platoons' sectors. 

They may occupy hide or battle positions along avenues of 

approach. The tank/AT platoons remain responsive to the 

troop commander. They are the primary direct-fire killing 

asset.

Force to be Screened. The troop must orient on the force it 

is securing. If the main body is moving, the troop must move 

to maintain the screen’s position relative to the main body.
4-12 

Reinforcements. Any unique requirement posed by the 

mission may require assets not organic to the troop. GSR 

and engineers are common attachments at troop level. 

• GSR. During screen operations, GSR is used to 

augment scout OPs and to add depth to the screen. 

GSRs should be attached to scout platoons, and the 

commander should provide the scout platoon leader 

with positioning and orientation guidance. 

• Engineers. If engineers are attached to the troop, the 

troop commander should assign them with priority of 

mission and priority of effort in support of 

commander’s guidance. During screen operations, 

engineers will normally dig survivability positions for 

scouts and tanks. Also engineers may emplace 

obstacles in support of the counterreconnaissance 

battle or assist the troop with displacement of the 

screen once contact has been established with the 

enemy body. 

Special Requirements or Constraints. Specify all 

requirements for observing any NAI identified during the 

intelligence preparation of the battlefield (IPB). Task 

subordinate platoons as required. Specify the following in the 

troop OPORD: 

• Engagement criteria. 

− What size force will scouts engage and destroy (if 

any)? 

− Where will this action occur? 

− What size force will the tank or AT platoons 

engage and destroy? 

− Where will this action occur? 
4-13 

• Disengagement criteria. 

− What event will cause scouts to displace from the 

initial screen line? 

− How will scouts maintain contact with the enemy 

while displacing? 

− What event will cause the tank or AT platoons to 

displace to subsequent or alternate positions?

Indirect Fire Planning. Fire planning integrates artillery and 

mortar fires. Position the troop mortars to fire up to two-thirds 

of their maximum range forward of the initial screen line. A 

wide sector may require the troop commander to position 

them to provide effective coverage of the most likely avenue 

of approach determined by IPB. The troop FSO plans artillery 

fires to adequately cover any gaps in mortar coverage.

Direct Fire Planning. Based on his analysis of the terrain, 

the troop commander determines where to engage the 

enemy (engagement areas). He also determines the location 

of battle positions that provide observation, fields of fire, and 

cover and concealment that support each engagement area. 

Positioning of C2, CS, and CSS Assets. The troop 

commander positions himself to observe the most dangerous 

enemy avenue of approach. The troop TOC positions itself in 

depth to provide continuous control and reporting during 

initial movements. After the screen line has been 

reestablished in depth following displacement from the initial 

screen line, the TOC can reposition. Combat trains position 

behind masking terrain close enough for rapid response. 

They are best sited along routes providing good mobility 

laterally and in depth.

Patrol Requirements. Patrols may be required to cover 

gaps between OPs. The troop commander tasks the scout 

platoon leaders to perform specific patrols.

Coordination. The troop commander coordinates his 

concept with air cavalry troop (ACT) commanders who may 

be operating the same ground, flank troop commanders, 

tank company (heavy cavalry) and AT company (light 
4-14 

cavalry) commanders, and other unit commanders as 

appropriate.

TECHNIQUES 

Graphics 

The following is a list of common graphic control 

measures used to control screen missions: 

• Boundaries. 

• Phase lines. 

• Checkpoints. 

• Contact points. 

• NAIs. 

• OPs. 

• Mortar firing positions. 

• Battle positions. 

• Hide positions. 

• TIRS. 

• Unit symbols.

Movement to the Screen Line

In deploying to the screen line, the troop commander 

must deal with the competing requirements to establish the 

screen quickly to meet mission requirements and to provide 

the necessary level of security for the troop in doing so. The 

troop moves to the screen line using one of three basic 

methods—a tactical road march, zone reconnaissance, or 

movement to contact. 

Tactical Road March. The troop conducts a tactical road 

march to a release point behind the screen line. From the 

release point, platoons deploy to occupy initial positions. This 

method of deploying to the screen line is the fastest, but least 

secure. It is appropriate when enemy contact is not expected 
4-15 

and time is critical, or when an air cavalry troop is conducting 

zone reconnaissance forward of the ground troop. 

Movement to Contact. The troop conducts a movement to 

contact from a line of departure to the initial screen line. This 

method is slower than a tactical road march, but more 

secure. It is appropriate when enemy contact is likely, time is 

limited, or when an air cavalry troop is conducting zone 

reconnaissance forward of the ground troop. 

Zone Reconnaissance. The troop conducts a zone 

reconnaissance from a line of departure to the initial screen 

line. Given adequate time, this method is preferred as the 

troop can clear the zone of any enemy and enables platoons 

to become thoroughly familiar with the terrain. The troop can 

reconnoiter potential subsequent OP locations, battle and 

hide positions, and mortar firing positions, for example, as 

they move to the screen line. A zone reconnaissance is 

appropriate when time is available and information about the 

enemy or terrain is unknown. 

Security Drill 

A security drill is a series of rehearsed actions (battle 

drills) a scout platoon or cavalry troop takes to maintain 

contact with the main body of an advancing enemy force. It is 

used when collapsing the screen line to subsequent OP 

positions or when transitioning from a screen mission to a 

delay or defend mission. 

At platoon level, OPs gain contact with the enemy main 

body, then report and prepare to displace to a subsequent 

position. When the enemy force reaches the OP's break 

point (point where the OP must displace or his 

position/movement will compromise him to the enemy), the 

OP passes off the responsibility to track the enemy to 

another OP in depth. The platoon displaces its OPs to 

subsequent positions in depth while maintaining contact with 

the enemy. 
4-16 

At troop level, the security drill combines the collapse of 

the initial screen line with the actions of organic tank or AT 

platoons. Scout platoons may perform platoon security drills 

initially, consolidating some or all of their combat power at a 

battle position to aid execution of a troop-level engagement. 

At platoon and troop levels, conduct of security drills is 

tempered by the commander's overall concept, intent, and 

scheme of maneuver. Enemy actions (events) drive security 

drill execution (response) (see Figure 4-1). 

STATIONARY SCREEN 

Take a close look at the high-speed avenues of approach 

into the sector. Divide the sector into two platoon sectors. 

Make sure the platoon boundary is on easily identifiable 

terrain. Do not split avenues of approach with a platoon 

boundary or place the boundary on a road. Place NAIs, 

TIRS, or checkpoints beyond the screen line to focus 

surveillance from OPs. If needed, add additional phase lines 

to control withdrawal of the troop at 5- to 8-kilometer 

intervals. Place contact points at the intersection of the 

platoon boundary and all phase lines. Place TIRS on the map 

or overlay as described in Chapter 2.

Deploy the scout platoons abreast and establish a series 

of OPs along or behind the initial screen line, as terrain 

allows, but never forward of it without permission. Make it 

clear to the scout platoon leaders which avenues of 

approach (depicted as NAIs or checkpoints) they are to 

observe. If unobservable areas between OPs need to be 

routinely checked, have the scout platoon leaders prepare 

patrol plans for approval and subsequent execution. 

Position the mortar section to fire 3 to 4 kilometers 

forward of the initial screen line, oriented on the expected 

enemy avenue of approach. Establish subsequent firing 

positions for the mortar section back through the sector. 

Position each tank (heavy) or AT (light) platoon in one of the 

scout platoon sectors, or have the tank/AT platoons 

consolidate. Position the tank/AT platoons in hide positions 

or battle positions in depth behind the scout platoons, 
4-17 

oriented on the expected enemy avenue of approach. 

Establish subsequent positions for the tank/AT platoons back 

through the sector to support the scheme of maneuver. 

Figure 4-1. Scout platoon/cavalry troop security drill. 

t 

X X

X X X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X

X

X

EA

EA

EA EA

EA

EA

AA1A AA1B AA2

AA3

AA3A

AA3B

AA1 AA2 AA3

AA1 AA2 AA3

PL

SABER

PL

SPUR

PL

BOOT

Initial screen

line.

Scout platoon

engagement

area dependent

on commander's

intent.

Subsequent

OPs.

Troop consolidates

fire power of tanks

and scouts to

execute engagement

while maintaining

contact.

Scouts maintain

contact and

execute engagement

with tank platoon.

X X

X X

X X

X X

INDEX:

3

5

2

1 4

1

2

3

4

5
4-18 

Have the XO position the command post on terrain that 

affords good FM radio communications with troop elements 

and squadron headquarters. If possible, the command post 

should be positioned behind the subsequent screen 

positions. This allows the TOC to remain in position during 

the initial collapse of the screen line. Establish tentative 

subsequent command post sites back through the troop 

sector. The XO retains the authority to adjust the actual TOC 

location to maintain effective communications. 

The 1SG first positions the troop trains within 5 to 8 

kilometers of the initial screen line, then he establishes 

subsequent locations for the trains to bound back through 

the troop sector. The troop commander positions himself well 

forward where he can best observe and control the actions of 

the troop (see Figure 4-2). 

Figure 4-2. Troop screen positioning. 

4 5 6

2 9 8

10

3

20

MORT

2 4

A37

A20

A21

PL

PL

PL

PL

PL

PL

B A 1 3 A C

CBT

CDR
4-19 

MOVING FLANK SCREEN 

The troop may conduct a moving flank screen by itself or 

as part of the squadron. It may be tasked to screen the 

exposed flank of the squadron while the squadron conducts 

a movement to contact, a hasty attack, or a zone 

reconnaissance (see Figure 4-3). The troop may also 

participate in a squadron mission to screen or guard another 

combined arms force (see Figure 4-4). 

Figure 4-3. Squadron movement to contact; troop flank 

screen. 

Figure 4-4. Squadron flank screen. 

SCREEN

OBJ

SCREEN

OBJ

XX
4-20 

A moving flank screen uses the same techniques as 

when screening a stationary unit. Position the scout platoons 

to maintain continuous surveillance on the avenues of 

approach, the mortar section to cover likely avenues of 

approach with indirect fire, and the tank/AT platoons in depth 

to destroy or repel enemy reconnaissance units. 

Applying Graphic Control Measures

Because of the inherent dual orientation of a moving flank 

screen (direction of movement versus orientation of the 

screen line), control of the operation poses numerous 

challenges. Control measures must facilitate both 

orientations (see Figure 4-5). 

Figure 4-5. Troop moving flank screen graphics. 

PL SPUR

PL BOOT

PL SADDLE

PL MAC

PL CHRIS

PL MARK

PL PAUL

OBJ

ROCK

SP

RP

19

17

14

10

11

12

13

16

A

B C

D E

F

G H I

HIDE

DOG

20

HIDE

CAT

W3

W2

W1

G2

G1 W5

W4

8

6

5

4 3

2

1

7

RT

LION

G4
4-21 

Follow the procedures below when applying graphic 

control measures to a moving flank screen. 

• Use phase lines to control the scout platoon’s 

movement (placed perpendicular to the screen line). 

Plan to use these phase lines as on-order boundaries 

for subordinate platoons if enemy contact is gained. 

Place phase lines no more than 5 kilometers apart 

(corresponding to the width of a scout platoon's screen 

frontage). Do not divide avenues of approach with 

them. 

• Use additional phase lines rearward of (parallel to) the 

initial screen line to control retrograde movement 

(toward the protected force). Plan to use these phase 

lines as subsequent (on-order) screen lines. 

• Use objectives, checkpoints, or axes of advance to 

control the movement of the tank/AT platoons for 

movement. Position and plan to use these objectives 

or checkpoints as battle positions for the tank/AT 

platoons if the scouts make enemy contact at the 

screen line. Plan subsequent (on-order) battle 

positions between the screen line and the protected 

force. 

• Use mortar firing positions or checkpoints to control 

movement of the mortar section. Position these firing 

positions rearward of the screen line where they allow 

the mortars to fire two-thirds maximum range forward 

or cover likely avenues of approach. Plan subsequent 

(on-order) mortar firing positions between the screen 

line and the protected force. 

While this number of graphic control measures and 

required planning may seem excessive, they provide 

maximum flexibility in terms of mission execution. The troop 

commander can issue simple FRAGOs to adjust the plan to 

the enemy situation. 
4-22 

Repositioning the Screen

The troop must reposition to stay oriented on the force it 

is securing. Movement along the screen line is determined by 

the speed of the protected force. Movement is conducted by 

one of three techniques—continuous marching, bounding by 

platoons (alternately or successively), and bounding by OPs 

(alternately or successively). 

Continuous Marching. This technique is appropriate when 

the protected force is moving quickly and contact is not likely. 

It is the least secure movement technique. 

Deploy both scout platoons abreast with the two tank or 

AT platoons, the mortar section, and the remainder of the 

troop in depth (between the screen line and the protected 

force). The trace of the screen line is essentially the route of 

advance for the two scout platoons in column. Have the 

tank/AT platoons and the remainder of the troop move along 

a designated route or axis of advance (see Figure 4-6). 

Figure 4-6. Troop moves by continuous marching. 

PL

HORSE

PL

SABER

PL

SPUR

PL

BOOT

PL TOM (LOA)

PL MARK

PL MAC

PL DEBBY

PL KEN

PL CHRIS

PL SUE (LD)

OBJ

4

2

3

1

SP

RP
4-23 

Bounding by Platoons. This technique is appropriate when 

the protected force requires greater protection than afforded 

by continuous marching, is not moving quickly, or knows 

enemy contact is possible. Bounding platoons alternately 

may leave temporary gaps in the screen line as they move. 

Bounding platoons successively is more secure but slower 

than bounding platoons alternately. 

Deploy both scout platoons abreast with the two tank/AT 

platoons, the mortar section, and the remainder of the troop 

in depth (between the screen line and the protected force). 

Alternately bound one scout platoon around (to the rear of) 

the other to assume new positions along the screen line (see 

Figure 4-7), or successively bound the scout platoons along 

the screen line (see Figure 4-8). Have the tank/AT platoons 

occupy designated positions sequentially or alternately. 

Figure 4-7. Troop moves by alternately bounding platoons. 

PL

HORSE

PL

SABER

PL

SPUR

PL

BOOT

PL TOM (LOA)

PL MARK

PL MAC

PL DEBBY

PL KEN

PL CHRIS

PL SUE (LD)

OBJ

3

2

2

4

1

1
4-24 

Figure 4-8. Troop moves by successively bounding platoons. 

Bounding by OPs. This technique is appropriate when the 

main body is moving slowly, contact is possible, and 

maximum security is required. Bounding OPs alternately will 

disrupt the integrity of the scout platoons as OPs bound to 

their next position. Bounding OPs successively is easier for 

the scout platoons to control. 

Deploy both scout platoons abreast with the two tank/AT 

platoons, the mortar section, and the remainder of the troop 

in depth (between the screen line and the protected force). 

Alternately bound the rearmost OP around (to the rear of) the 

other OPs (both platoons) to assume a new position along 

the screen line (see Figure 4-9), or successively bound the 

OPs along the screen line (see Figure 4-10). The number of 

OPs on the screen line may be reduced, as two or more may 

PL

HORSE

PL

SABER

PL

SPUR

PL

BOOT

PL TOM (LOA)

PL MARK

PL MAC

PL DEBBY

PL KEN

PL CHRIS

PL SUE (LD)

OBJ

2

4

1

3
4-25 

be bounding at any given time. The rate of advance of the 

protected force will determine this. Have the tank/AT 

platoons occupy designated positions sequentially or 

alternately. 

Figure 4-9. Troop moves by alternately bounding OPs. 

PL

HORSE

PL

SABER

PL

SPUR

PL

BOOT

PL TOM (LOA)

PL MARK

PL MAC

PL DEBBY

PL KEN

PL CHRIS

PL SUE (LD)

OBJ

2

4

4
4-26 

Figure 4-10. Troop moves by successively bounding OPs. 

Example of a Screen Forward of Stationary Main Body 

(Heavy Troop) 

The 1st and 3d platoons deploy abreast along PL BOOT, 

the initial screen line, and establish OPs to maintain 

continuous surveillance of the high-speed avenues of 

approach into the troop sector. Route 220 in the 1st platoon 

sector is the most likely route of enemy approach. Scout 

platoons execute their approved patrol plans between OPs, 

and periodically check the areas that cannot be observed. 

The mortar section lays its guns in a centrally located 

position about 3 kilometers behind the initial screen line and 

orients on Route 220. The 2d platoon occupies a hide 

position behind the 1st platoon. The 4th platoon occupies a 

hide position north of checkpoint F. Both positions provide 

good lateral movement and several maneuver options. The 

troop CP positions south of TIRS A21. The 1SG positions the 

PL

HORSE

PL

SABER

PL

SPUR

PL

BOOT

PL TOM (LOA)

PL MARK

PL MAC

PL DEBBY

PL KEN

PL CHRIS

PL SUE (LD)

OBJ

4

4

2
4-27 

troop trains in the woods just north of contact point 8, which 

is near a good lateral road network. The troop commander 

and FIST collocate well forward with the 1st platoon leader, 

overlooking Route 220 (see Figure 4-11). 

The 1st platoon leader reports two BMPs and one T-64 

bounding across the open terrain, moving southwest astride 

Route 220 about 2,000 meters east of PL BOOT. He 

maintains contact with the patrol as it crosses PL BOOT and 

enters the troop sector. The troop commander orders 2d 

platoon to attack the patrol by fire. The 2d platoon moves into 

hull-down positions and ambushes the patrol. All three 

vehicles are hit and damaged. The 1st platoon leader sends 

his PSG to capture the surviving BMP crew members and to 

search the vehicles for vehicle unit symbols, maps, sketches, 

and any other items of intelligence value. The PSG links up 

with the 1SG, who has moved forward. He hands over the 

prisoners and material, and returns to his position on the 

screen line. The 1SG evacuates the prisoners and captured 

material to the squadron combat trains. The 3d platoon 

reports no contact in its sector. The XO reports the situation 

to the squadron. 

The troop commander tells the troop to be alert for other 

divisional reconnaissance patrols in the sector, and to expect 

regimental reconnaissance within the next hour. The XO 

eavesdrops on the squadron OI net and monitors reports 

from Troop B that indicate it has encountered several 

divisional reconnaissance patrols. The XO passes this 

information to the troop commander. 
4-28 

Figure 4-11. Troop screen. 

13

2

220

8

135

33

1

2

2

08

135

208

148

220

B

15

220

148

5 253

135

19

PL B

O

O

T

PL B

O

O

T

A

C

PL S

P

U

R

PL S

A

D

DLE

PL S

A

D

DLE

PL S

P

U

R

A35

A45

1

3

M

O

R

T

2

B

A

B52

A21

135

F

A

C

B

T

21

4

N
4-29 

Within the next 45 minutes, both scout platoons report 

reconnaissance patrols of two BMPs each in their sectors. 

The troop commander maneuvers a tank platoon into 

position to ambush each patrol. Three of the four BMPs are 

quickly destroyed. One BMP in the 1st platoon's sector is 

damaged, but is able to move into a covered and concealed 

position in the wooded area west of checkpoint A. Artillery 

begins to fall on the dominant terrain east of PL SPUR. The 

XO reports the situation to squadron. 

The troop commander orders the 1st platoon to regain 

contact with the damaged BMP. The 1st platoon leader 

sends Bravo section to locate the damaged BMP. Bravo 

section moves into the wooded area and quickly finds and 

destroys the BMP. 

The troop commander orders the scout platoons to move 

one of their scout sections back in sector in anticipation of 

the arrival of enemy reconnaissance elements. Both scout 

platoons reposition a scout section back towards PL SPUR 

while the troop commander shifts his tank platoons, mortar 

section, and trains. 

The 1st platoon later reports a reinforced MRP moving 

southwest along Route 220. The 1st platoon continues to 

observe the enemy reconnaissance elements and reports 

their progress to the troop. The FSO engages the enemy 

with mortar high explosive (HE) and smoke rounds to disrupt 

their movement and keep them buttoned up. The troop 

commander tells the 4th platoon to move north and be 

prepared to counterattack the enemy by fire. He quickly 

outlines its route using TIRS. The enemy reconnaissance 

elements rapidly move in an attack formation toward the 

terrain previously occupied by the 2d platoon. It appears that 

the enemy elements are attempting to secure the dominant 

terrain in the 1st platoon sector and fix the tank platoon so 

the lead company of the enemy advance guard can 

maneuver around it. 
4-30 

The FSO continues to suppress the enemy with smoke 

and HE while it attempts to maneuver toward its objective. 

The troop commander directs 2d platoon into position to 

establish a base of fire and fix enemy elements while 4th 

platoon counterattacks by fire from the south. The FSO 

coordinates mortar and artillery fires to suppress and isolate 

enemy elements as the tank platoons execute their 

counterattack. 

While the tank platoons complete the destruction of the 

enemy, heavy artillery begins to impact along and east of PL 

SPUR. The 1st platoon scouts report a tank platoon followed 

by six BTR-60s moving west along Route 220. The troop 

commander reports this information directly to the squadron 

commander. He orders the troops to fall back to PL SPUR, 

and to begin coordination for battle handover and passage of 

lines. The troop commander orders the 3d platoon to begin 

to bound back to PL SPUR. He tells the 1st platoon to 

maintain contact with the enemy lead company as it falls 

back to PL SPUR. The troop commander maneuvers the 

tank platoons west of PL SPUR. 

The 1st platoon leader bounds his scout sections back to 

PL SPUR as he maintains contact with the lead company. 

The FSO engages the MRC with mortar and artillery fires to 

slow and disrupt its advance. The XO keeps squadron 

informed of the situation in the troop sector. 

The troop XO moves back to the contact point to begin 

coordination for battle handover and passage of lines. The 

troop continues to maintain contact with the lead MRC as it 

maneuvers back in sector, while the FSO engages the MRC 

with mortar and artillery fires. 
4-31 

Section III. Guard 

Cavalry squadrons conduct guard missions to provide 

another unit early warning of enemy approach, and to 

prevent enemy ground maneuver forces from coming within 

direct-fire range of the protected unit as it performs other 

missions or tasks. A guard is conducted to the front, flanks, 

or rear of a stationary or moving force. Many of the 

considerations for conducting a moving flank screen apply to 

conducting a moving flank guard. 

A cavalry troop mission unique to moving flank guard 

operations is assigned to the lead troop of the squadron. This 

three-fold mission consists of the following tasks: 

• Maintain contact with the protected force. 

• Reconnoiter the zone between the protected force and 

the squadron route of advance. 

• Reconnoiter the squadron route of advance. 

The lead troop accomplishes these tasks by performing 

zone reconnaissance. The speed of the protected force 

determines how thoroughly the reconnaissance is performed. 

Assistance is required if the zone is too wide for the lead 

troop. An air cavalry troop may maintain contact with the 

protected force, or a following troop may perform route 

reconnaissance along the squadron’s route of advance. 

Note. For a detailed description of techniques for performing 

a squadron guard mission, see Chapter 4, FM 17-95. 

The cavalry troop does not conduct guard operations 

independently. It normally performs reconnaissance, screen, 

defend, delay, and attack missions as part of a squadron 

guard operation. Review the appropriate chapter in this 

manual for specific mission details. See Chapter 3, Sections 

III and IV, Route and Zone Reconnaissance; Chapter 5, 

Section III, Hasty Attack; and Chapter 6, Sections II, III, and 

IV, Defend From a Troop Battle Position and Defend/Delay in 

Troop Sector. 
4-32 

Section IV. Cover 

A covering force operates apart from the main body to 

develop the situation early and deceives, disorganizes, and 

destroys enemy forces. It accomplishes all the tasks of 

screening and guard forces. Unlike screening or guard 

forces, a covering force is a tactically self-contained force 

(that is, it is organized with sufficient combat support and 

combat service support assets to operate independently of 

the main body). Covering force operations can be either 

offensive or defensive in nature and can be conducted to the 

front, flanks, or rear of a stationary or moving force. 

Cover operations are performed by the regiment (ACR or 

LACR) for the corps commander to provide the time and 

space he needs to make decisions and to achieve his 

operational objective. 

Defensive cover operations, whether forward, flank, or 

rear, prevent the enemy from attacking the corps main body 

at the time and place and with the combat strength he 

chooses. Defensive cover operations are generally intended 

to destroy the enemy's initiative and set him up for defeat. 

Both heavy and light cavalry troops participate in defensive 

cover operations as part of their parent squadrons. 

Depending on the squadron commander's scheme of 

maneuver, they either screen, defend, delay, or attack. 

Offensive cover operations are conducted by the regiment 

to seize and retain the initiative for the corps commander, 

and to allow him to attack decisively with the main body of 

the corps at the time and place he chooses. In offensive 

cover operations, the troop usually conducts movement to 

contact or zone reconnaissance missions. See the 

appropriate chapters in this manual for mission details. 
4-33 

Section V. Route Security 

Cavalry squadrons and regiments conduct route security 

missions to prevent enemy ground maneuver forces from 

coming within direct-fire range of the protected route. A route 

security force operates on and to the flanks of a designated 

route. Route security operations are defensive in nature and, 

unlike guard operations, are terrain oriented. A route security 

force conducts reconnaissance, screens, attacks, defends, 

and occupies key locations along the route to prevent an 

enemy force from impeding, harassing, containing, seizing, 

or destroying traffic along the route. 

Route security operations are not conducted 

independently by a cavalry troop. Both the heavy and light 

cavalry troops participate in route security operations as part 

of their parent squadrons and may conduct reconnaissance, 

screen, defend, delay, attack, or convoy security missions 

throughout the area of operations. 

Section VI. Area Security 

An area security force neutralizes or defeats enemy 

operations in a specified area. It operates in an area 

delineated by the headquarters assigning the area security 

mission. It screens, reconnoiters, attacks, defends, and 

delays as necessary to accomplish its mission. Area security 

operations may be offensive or defensive in nature and focus 

on the enemy, the force being protected, or a combination of 

the two. 

Area security operations are conducted to deny the 

enemy the ability to influence friendly actions in a specific 

area or to deny the enemy use of an area for his own 

purposes. This may entail occupying and securing an area 

before the enemy can, or taking actions to destroy enemy 

forces already present. 
4-34 

The area to be secured may range from specific points 

(bridges, defiles) to areas such as terrain features 

(ridgelines, hills) to large population centers and adjacent 

areas. The factors of METT-T and unit capability will 

determine specific unit missions. 

Area security missions are conducted by cavalry troops, 

squadrons, and regiments who employ the techniques of 

screen, guard, offense, and defense, depending on the 

nature and purpose of the mission. 

Section VII. Convoy Security 

Convoy security operations are performed as a minimum 

by a cavalry troop or a company team. Both heavy and light 

cavalry troops are suited to the requirements of protecting a 

convoy due to their organic reconnaissance capability and 

combat power. Both the cavalry troop and company team 

should be reinforced with engineers. METT-T considerations, 

such as restrictive terrain and limited time, may dictate a 

coordinated effort with air cavalry assets. 

Convoy security operations are conducted when 

insufficient friendly forces are available to continuously 

secure lines of communication in an area of operations. They 

may also be conducted in conjunction with route security 

operations. A convoy security force operates to the front, 

flanks, and rear of a convoy element moving along a 

designated route. Convoy security operations are offensive in 

nature and orient on the force being protected. 

A convoy security mission has certain critical tasks that 

guide planning and execution. To protect a convoy, the 

security force must accomplish the following critical tasks: 

• Reconnoiter the route the convoy will travel. 

• Clear the route of obstacles or positions from which 

the enemy could influence movement along the route. 
4-35 

• Provide early warning and prevent the enemy from 

impeding, harassing, containing, seizing, or destroying 

the convoy. 

The convoy security force is organized into three or four 

elements to accomplish the following (see Figure 4-12): 

• Reconnaissance element. The reconnaissance 

element performs tasks associated with zone and 

route reconnaissance forward of the convoy. 

• Screen element. The screen element provides early 

warning and security to the convoy's flanks and rear. 

• Escort element. The escort element provides close-in 

protection to the convoy. May also provide a reaction 

force to assist in repelling or destroying enemy 

contact. 

• Reaction force. Provides firepower and support to the 

elements above in order to assist in developing the 

situation or conducting a hasty attack. May also 

perform duties of the escort element. 

Figure 4-12. Cavalry troop conducts convoy security.

ZONE REC

O

CON N

VOY CONVOY
4-36 

TECHNIQUES

The troop commander organizes and coordinates the 

efforts of his unit to fulfill the critical tasks associated with the 

convoy security mission. 

Tasks of the reconnaissance element can usually be 

fulfilled by a single scout platoon. The troop commander 

ensures the reconnaissance element focuses on trafficability 

of the route and enemy forces that may influence movement 

along the route. METT-T may dictate the use of engineers to 

assist in reconnoitering and clearing the route. Convoy speed 

is determined by the pace of reconnaissance (METT-T). As a 

guide, the reconnaissance element should operate a 

minimum of 3 to 5 kilometers ahead of the main body of the 

convoy. 

Tasks of the screen element can usually be fulfilled by a 

single scout platoon also. The troop commander ensures the 

screen element establishes OPs to provide early warning on 

critical portions of the route or key avenues of approach to 

the route. OPs have a limited ability to destroy enemy forces; 

therefore, their primary purpose is to acquire the enemy and 

direct reaction forces or indirect fire to destroy it.

Tasks of the escort element are best performed by tank 

platoons in a heavy troop. A light troop should consider a 

scramble of platoons (MK-19/M2/TOW—see Chapter 2, 

Figure 2-13) to gain the suppressive firepower necessary to 

protect the convoy. The troop commander ensures the escort 

element is positioned to provide security throughout the 

length of the convoy. This requires elements of the two tank 

(heavy troop)/mixed (light troop) platoons be dispersed 

throughout the convoy order of march. If there is no reaction 

force available or designated, a task of the escort element 

may be to provide reaction forces that respond to enemy 

forces identified by the reconnaissance or screening 

elements. Depending on the length of the convoy and 

METT-T considerations, the troop commander may keep one 

tank/mixed platoon consolidated or specifically designated as 

the reaction force. 
5-1 

Chapter 5 

Offense 

Offense is the decisive form of war. Brigades, 

battalion/task forces, and company teams are the principal 

offensive force for the corps or division. Cavalry units 

normally perform reconnaissance and security missions in 

support of corps and division offensive operations. Cavalry 

troops may perform certain offensive missions as part of a 

squadron, regiment, or other combined arms force. These 

offensive missions are normally performed during 

reconnaissance or security operations. 

If required, cavalry troops may perform offensive 

operations within an economy-of-force role for a higher 

headquarters. 

CONTENTS

 Page

 Section I. Purpose and Fundamentals ............5-1 

 Section II. Movement to Contact ......................5-2 

 Section III. Hasty Attack ....................................5-11 

 Section IV. Deliberate Attack .............................5-22 

 Section V. Raid .................................................5-24 

Section I. Purpose and Fundamentals 

PURPOSE 

The main purpose of the offense is to defeat, destroy, or 

neutralize the enemy force. Offensive operations are also 

undertaken to secure decisive terrain, to deprive the enemy 

of resources, to gain information, to deceive and divert the 

enemy, to hold the enemy in position, to disrupt his attack, 

and to set up conditions for future successful operations. 
5-2 

FUNDAMENTALS 

Successful offensive operations have four fundamentals 

in common. 

• Surprise. Strike the enemy at the time and place or in 

a manner that he least expects. 

• Concentration. Mass available forces, strive for 

overwhelming superiority in men, weapons, and 

firepower. With concentration, however, vulnerability 

becomes a factor. A force that is dispersed is much 

more survivable. The commander must maintain a 

high sense of situational awareness to anticipate the 

conditions of battle that will allow him to mass at the 

critical point, kill the enemy, and quickly disperse to 

survive. 

• Tempo. Tempo is the rate of speed of military action. 

Controlling or altering the rate is essential for 

maintaining the initiative. Tempo can be fast or slow 

dependent on the capabilities of the troop relative to 

that of the enemy. Commanders must adjust tempo to 

ensure synchronization. 

• Audacity. Boldness in the plan's execution is key to 

success in offensive operations. Commanders should 

understand when and where they are taking risks, but 

must not become tentative when executing their plan. 

Section II. Movement to Contact 

A movement to contact is a mission undertaken to gain or 

regain contact with the enemy. Unlike a zone 

reconnaissance, which is focused on reporting detailed 

information on the terrain and enemy within a given zone, 

movement to contact is focused on finding the enemy. The 

critical tasks are geared for achieving fast movement and 

rapid location of enemy forces. 
5-3 

The cavalry troop normally conducts a movement-tocontact mission as the lead element of a squadron or 

combined arms force hasty attack. The troop may also 

conduct the mission as part of a squadron movement to 

contact when the squadron is leading the advance of another 

combined arms force, such as a brigade or division. 

A movement to contact is characterized by rapid 

aggressive action. The troop commander must rapidly 

develop the situation and may be permitted to bypass enemy 

forces to maintain momentum. 

CRITICAL TASKS 

During a movement to contact, certain critical tasks will 

be accomplished. Unless the squadron commander gives 

guidance otherwise, the troop will— 

• Reconnoiter and determine the trafficability of all highspeed routes within the zone. 

• Inspect and classify all bridges, culverts, overpasses, 

and underpasses along high-speed routes. Identify all 

bypasses and fords that cannot support rapid heavyarmor movement. 

• Clear all high-speed routes of mines, obstacles, and 

barriers within its capability, or locate a bypass. 

• Find and report all enemy forces within the zone and 

determine their size, composition, and activity. 

TECHNIQUES 

The cavalry troop can perform movement to contact in a 

zone up to 10 kilometers wide. The size of the zone depends 

on the terrain and enemy situation. Scout squads, and in 

some cases sections, must be mutually supporting during 

movement based on the enemy situation. Mutual support 

between squads and sections is gained by reducing the size 

of the zone based on the terrain. The more restrictive the 

terrain the less mutual support becomes available. 
5-4 

When considering techniques for conducting a movement 

to contact, remember the basics. 

• Always retain the ability to maneuver. 

• Make contact with the smallest force possible. 

• Employ forces in depth; stay flexible. 

• Develop the situation rapidly once contact is made 

with the enemy force. Operate at a tempo that forces 

him to react to you, not you to him. 

When the troop receives a movement-to-contact mission, 

the zone of action is normally identified by lateral boundaries. 

A line of departure and an objective or limit of advance are 

specified to orient the troop's movement. The objective is 

usually a terrain feature placed deep enough to ensure 

contact with the enemy. Divide the troop zone into two 

platoon zones. Think about where to draw the boundary. 

Make sure it does not split enemy avenues of approach and 

that it is on easily identifiable terrain. Do not use a road for a 

boundary. To control progress through the zone, add phase 

lines every 5 to 8 kilometers on easily identifiable terrain. 

Place contact points near the intersection of the platoon 

boundary and all phase lines. If specific areas need to be 

checked, identify them using checkpoints for reference. 

Place TIRS on the map. 

Use a troop vee or split vee formation when conducting a 

movement to contact. Deploy scout platoons abreast and 

have them accomplish all the related reconnaissance tasks. 

Move them out first across the line of departure. The mission 

of the scouts is to find the enemy, develop the situation, and 

recommend to the troop commander the best course of 

action for the employment of the tank/AT platoons. 

The mortar section, under control of the troop fire support 

officer or mortar section sergeant, follows about 2 kilometers 

behind the scouts, centered in the zone, to provide 

continuous coverage forward of the scouts. The troop 

command post, under control of the XO, displaces in the 
5-5 

zone, positioning on terrain that affords effective and 

continuous communication with troop elements and the 

squadron. The troop trains, under control of the 1SG, follow 

about 2 kilometers behind the tank/AT platoons, and bound 

from one covered and concealed position to another. The 

troop commander positions himself well forward to observe 

one scout platoon or the other. His position is usually located 

where he expects initial enemy contact or difficult situations. 

Heavy Troop 

Due to the survivability and firepower of scout platforms 

(M3) in the heavy troop, the tank platoons may be kept in 

considerable depth (1,000 to 3,000 meters) behind the 

scouts until enemy contact is made. Once contact is made 

and the scouts have developed the situation/recommended a 

course of action, the troop commander may then employ his 

tanks, using firepower and maneuverability to fix the enemy 

or destroy it by hasty attack. 

Light Troop 

In the light cavalry troop, the AT platoon(s) should be kept 

close (500 to 1,500 meters) to the scout platoons. Upon 

contact, the HMMWV scouts will require more time to 

develop the situation than Bradley-mounted scouts. The AT 

platoon(s) can assist the scouts in developing the situation by 

overwatching the scouts. Also the TOW takes time to 

employ, so reaction time is slower than with the tank. During 

movement to contact, the light troop commander must be 

able to execute his actions on contact very quickly to 

maintain the momentum of the operation. A technique the 

light troop might use is outlined below. 

• Scouts make contact with an enemy force. 

• The troop commander immediately moves one AT 

platoon forward to overwatch the scouts as they 

develop the situation. 
5-6 

• If the situation dictates, the AT platoon suppresses 

with direct fires to allow the scouts to maneuver. 

• Once the situation is developed, the troop positions to 

either fix the enemy for the follow-on force or destroy it 

by a hasty attack. 

EXAMPLE OF MOVEMENT TO CONTACT (HEAVY 

TROOP) 

The troop is ordered to reestablish contact with elements 

of a withdrawing enemy mechanized infantry platoon. As the 

troop deploys in a split-vee formation, the 1st and 3d 

platoons cross the line of departure abreast, north and south 

respectively, and begin to reconnoiter in troop zone up to PL 

BOOT. The scout platoons determine the trafficability of 

high-speed routes within their zones, and search for the 

enemy in areas that dominate the routes. The bridge across 

the creek at checkpoint B will support only 20 tons, so the 1st 

platoon finds a solid-based fording site 100 meters south of 

the bridge. Thus far, the high-speed routes are not damaged 

or blocked. The 3d platoon reports finding tracks of what 

appears to be three BMPs heading northwest from Hill 244. 

The 1st platoon reports tracks of an enemy company-size 

force heading west along Route 220. Track patterns indicate 

BMPs and T-64s/T-72s. The mortar section eavesdrops on 

the troop command net, and moves with the scout platoons, 

staying back about 1.5 kilometers, centered in the troop 

zone. The 2d and 4th platoons are paired with their sister 

scout platoons and key their movement on the scout 

platoon's progress, staying back about 1 kilometer and using 

terrain that affords good cover and concealment. The troop 

CP and trains hold in place (see Figure 5-1). 
 5-7 

Figure 5-1. Movement to contact. 

37

23 18

920

42

1357

220

21

8

220

12

25

1357

253

PL BOOT PL SPUR (LD)

PL SADDLE PL BOOT PL SPUR (LD)

R

D

1536

MORMAN

VALLEY

MORMAN

VALLEY

PAULEY CREEK

B

A

1

3

A

C

9

D

X 886

F

X 244

15

A

B

MORT

PL SADDLE

N B

C

A

B

C

A
5-8 

As the 1st platoon approaches PL BOOT, it reports two 

BRDM-2s withdrawing west at high speed on Route 220. The 

3d platoon reports no contact in zone and moves forward to 

PL BOOT. Routes 1536, 1357, and 253 are reported 

trafficable. The 1st platoon reconnoiters the ridgeline in the 

vicinity of checkpoint D. As a scout squad crosses the 

southwestern side of the ridge, it receives heavy machine 

gun and cannon fire from an enemy position at the base of 

Hill 886. The 1st platoon immediately executes actions on 

contact. The troop commander quickly moves to a covered 

position from which he can observe the enemy position. 

While en route, he orders the 3d platoon to continue 

reconnaissance forward about 2 kilometers and establish a 

screen line. He also orders the 2d and 4th platoons to 

prepare for a hasty attack. The mortar section moves into a 

firing position and lays on the enemy (see Figure 5-2). 

The 1st platoon maneuvers to the flanks of the enemy 

position. Dismounted scouts report a reinforced MRP in 

prepared positions oriented on Route 220. Enemy infantry is 

dug in around the buildings, and dug-in BMPs are in defilade 

behind them. The enemy's left flank appears to be ignored 

and weakly defended. Based on this information, the 1st 

platoon identifies a good covered and concealed armor 

approach that swings north around Hill 886 into the 

vulnerable flank. The 3d platoon reports no enemy contact in 

the south. The troop commander decides to conduct a hasty 

attack with both tank platoons to eliminate this enemy force. 

The hasty attack succeeds (see Figure 5-3). 

The troop commander quickly orders the 1st platoon to 

continue its reconnaissance, and sends the 4th platoon back 

to the 3d platoon zone. The 1st and 3d platoons continue 

their reconnaissance. As scout elements of both platoons 

approach PL SADDLE, they observe what appears to be 

minefield belts and AT ditches astride Routes 220 and 1357 

in the Morman Valley. Dismounted reconnaissance 

determines the extent of the obstacles, and reveals heavy 

concentrations of enemy forces in several company 

strongpoints along the dominating ridgeline by Highway 920. 
 5-9 

Figure 5-2. Actions on contact. 

37

23 18

920

42

1357

220

21

8

220

12

25

1357

253

PL SADDLE PL BOOT PL SPUR (LD

R

D

1536

MORMAN

VALLEY

MORMAN

VALLEY

PAULEY CREEK

B

A

13

A

C

9

D

MORT

X 886

F

X 244

A

15

PL SADDLE PL BOOT PL SPUR (LD)

B

 
 5-10 

Figure 5-3. Hasty attack. 

37

23 18

920

42

1357

220

21

8

220

12

15

25

1357

253

PL SADDLE PL BOOT PL SPUR (LD)

R

D

1536

MORMAN

VALLEY

MORMAN

VALLEY

PAULEY CREEK

B

A

1

3

A

C

9

D

MORT

X 886

F

X 244

PL SADDLE PL BOOT PL SPUR (LD)

B

A

CBT
5-11 

The troop commander takes a look. En route, he orders 

both scout platoons to determine if any gaps or boundaries 

exist between the enemy positions. After seeing the situation, 

the troop commander calls his squadron commander and 

recommends the troop establish a hasty defense and 

prepare to assist in battle handover and forward passage of 

following attack forces (see Figure 5-4). 

Section III. Hasty Attack 

A hasty attack is conducted with a minimum of 

preparation to defeat an enemy force that is not prepared or 

deployed to fight. It is a course of action routinely employed 

in cavalry operations to seize or retain the initiative, or to 

sustain the tempo of operations. A hasty attack can be 

executed while the troop is engaged with a zone 

reconnaissance mission or movement to contact. (See 

Chapter 3, Section II, and Section II of this chapter for other 

examples of hasty attack.) 

CRITICAL TASKS 

To execute a hasty attack, the following critical tasks 

must be accomplished: 

• Reconnoiter and determine the size, composition, and 

orientation of the enemy force. 

• Determine if the objective enemy force is supported by 

other units nearby. 

• Find a high-speed covered and concealed approach 

into the enemy's flank(s). 

• Establish a maneuver element (usually one or both 

tank platoons) to move to a position of advantage over 

the enemy and attack him by fire. 
 5-12 

Figure 5-4. Hasty defense. 

37

23

920

42

1357

21

8

220

12

25

253

PL SADDLE PL BOOT PL SPUR (LD)

R

D

1536

X 886

MORMAN

VALLEY

MORMAN

VALLEY

PAULEY CREEK

B

A

13

A

C

9

R

A

15

F

X 244

1357

B

MORT 18

PL SADDLE PL BOOT PL SPUR (LD)

220 SCREEN

SCREEN

N
5-13 

• Establish a base-of-fire element (usually one or both 

scout platoons) to defeat or suppress all observed 

enemy AT weapons with long-range direct and indirect 

fires before the maneuver force deploys into its attack. 

• Isolate the objective enemy force from other mutually 

supporting units with indirect fires (usually with smoke 

and HE ammunition). 

• Attack the enemy by fire or by fire and movement, and 

defeat him. 

• Once the attack is completed, immediately establish 

hasty defensive positions and OPs on high-speed 

avenues of approach into the troop position. 

TECHNIQUES 

Each critical task has a time at which it will be 

accomplished in relation to all other critical tasks. A good 

hasty attack depends on the commander's sense of timing 

and on his ability to employ his forces to accomplish the 

tasks in the proper sequence. The commander has to 

synchronize—to concentrate and apply different forms of 

combat power against the enemy at the right times and 

places. The decision to conduct a hasty attack is usually 

made after an enemy force's reconnaissance and 

dispositions show that winning requires a quick strike, with 

little preparation. Tactics for conducting a hasty attack have 

three common features. 

• Known or suspected enemy AT weapons are 

suppressed and destroyed with direct and/or indirect 

fires before the maneuver force is committed. 

• The enemy is forced to fight in two directions. 

• The enemy is suppressed and unable to react. 
5-14 

SETTING UP THE TROOP FOR A HASTY ATTACK 

While conducting other missions, scouts will often make 

contact with an enemy force. In developing the situation, a 

scout platoon may recommend hasty attack as a course of 

action to the troop commander, who decides to execute the 

recommended course of action. The troop commander 

issues FRAGOs that will position forces to execute an attack 

simply and effectively. 

The scout platoon in contact continues to reconnoiter the 

enemy's position and to accomplish its reconnaissance 

tasks. One section of the scout platoon remains in contact 

with the enemy. The other scout platoon continues its 

reconnaissance up to a limit of advance established by the 

troop commander. Both scout platoons continue to develop 

the situation further by looking for the presence of other 

enemy units, to the flanks or rear, supporting the enemy 

contact. 

The FIST moves to a good position to see the battlefield 

and to control the indirect fires. The FSO places the mortar 

section on terrain where it establishes a firing position and 

prepares to suppress the enemy position. 

The size and strength of the enemy may require the use 

of one or both tank/AT platoons. The commander may 

choose to do one of the following options: 

• Move one tank/AT platoon into an overwatch position 

and attack by fire with one. 

• Keep one in reserve behind the scout platoon not in 

contact and attack by fire with one. 

• Attack by fire with both platoons. 

The scouts determine a good attack position and attackby-fire position for the tank/AT platoon(s). A scout squad 

from the scout platoon in contact moves to a link-up point 
5-15 

with one or both tank/AT platoon(s) to guide them into the 

attack position. 

The troop commander moves to collocate with the scout 

platoon in overwatch. The 1SG moves medics and recovery 

vehicles close to the battlefield. The XO assists the 

commander in control of the troop and keeps the higher 

commander informed. 

INDIRECT FIRES IN SUPPORT OF A HASTY ATTACK 

Indirect fires should complement the troop's scheme of 

maneuver. In the light troop, dependent on availability of 

supporting indirect-fire systems, indirect fires may prove to 

be the best weapon of destruction. The troop can acquire 

and engage the enemy with indirect fire from positions 

offering good protection from enemy direct/indirect fire. 

Because the light troop is in covered and concealed 

positions, the survivability of the troop is enhanced. Indirect 

fires must also be controlled to prevent fratricide. The troop 

commander must determine the following: 

• Who will control the indirect fires during the hasty 

attack? 

• Who will initiate indirect fires onto the objective? 

• Who will lift and shift the indirect fires to subsequent 

targets? 

• What will the signal be for lifting and shifting indirect 

fires? 

• Are there any restrictive fire measures or restrictive 

fire areas? 

There are many different answers to these questions. 

METT-T will determine which answer works best. Under 

most conditions the commander or the FSO will be in the 

best position to control the engagement of indirect-fire 

systems. 
5-16 

The troop commander should use available indirect fires 

from mortars and supporting artillery to— 

• Suppress the enemy while scouts are maneuvering to 

develop the situation. 

• Screen enemy observation of scouts or assault 

element during the conduct of the hasty attack. 

• Isolate the enemy contact by firing HE and smoke 

between the enemy force and any possible supporting 

positions. 

• Shift indirect fires off the objective to block enemy 

withdrawal routes. 

DIRECT FIRES DURING HASTY ATTACK 

When executing the hasty attack the troop must combine 

indirect fires with direct fires. The direct-fire systems 

available to the heavy troop commander are highly 

destructive. The high rate of fire from the M3 and M1 allows 

the commander to quickly place effective fires into the 

objective area while stationary or moving. 

The systems available to the light troop commander can 

be just as destructive when used in combinations and 

against a comparably equipped enemy. The light troop 

commander should strive to engage the enemy with 

combinations of weapons. Using the bounding technique and 

move-set drills by platoons, the troop commander can place 

effective suppressive and destructive fires into the objective 

area. (The high rates of fire from the M2 caliber .50 and MK19 should be used to suppress the enemy and cover the 

TOW systems as they engage.) See Figure 5-5. 
5-17 

Figure 5-5. Light cavalry troop using fire and maneuver. 

PL MOUSE

3

9

7

6 3

7

C

2

4 B

PL CAT

PL DOG

A D

1 5

3

MORT

1 3

1

5

3

2
5-18 

Like indirect fires, direct fires must be controlled. The 

commander must determine the following before executing a 

hasty attack: 

• Who will initiate direct fires into the objective area and 

from where will they be initiated? 

• What is the aim point for the support element? When 

do they shift fires and where do they shift fires to? 

• What is the limit of advance for the assault force? 

To determine the answers to these questions the 

commander must look at the enemy he is facing, the terrain 

he is operating in, and the forces he has to bring to bear 

against the enemy. 

THE OBJECTIVE 

Once the troop has initiated its attack and enemy 

resistance in the objective area has ceased, the troop may 

begin consolidating in preparation of continuing its mission. 

Have one or both scout platoons dismount scouts to sweep 

the area quickly for prisoners and other items of tactical 

value. Immediately establish a hasty defense with tank/AT 

platoons oriented on high-speed approaches into the troop 

position, and with scout platoons oriented on expected highspeed enemy approaches at OPs out from the defensive 

position. Position the mortar section and have the guns lay 

on the most likely enemy avenue of approach. Redistribute 

ammunition and balance crews as time allows. Replace key 

leaders quickly. If time is available and enemy counterattack 

unlikely, begin resupply operations. 
5-19 

EXAMPLE OF A HASTY ATTACK 

A troop is conducting a zone reconnaissance moving 

toward its limit of advance (LOA). As the 3d platoon crosses 

the ridge (PL SABER) in its zone, Charlie scout section is hit 

by enemy tank cannon and heavy machine-gun fire from 

concealed positions near checkpoint 2. The platoon 

immediately takes cover and reports contact to the troop 

commander. The troop commander acknowledges and 

immediately moves to link up with the platoon leader. The 

platoon sergeant calls for indirect fire to suppress the enemy 

force. Under this protection, the platoon leader orders 

dismounted reconnaissance through the woods on the 

enemy's right to find his flank. He then sends his Bravo scout 

section forward on the enemy's left to find his other flank and 

to determine if the enemy is mutually supported by other 

enemy forces near checkpoint 2. The platoon leader and two 

scouts dismount, move in closer, and determine the enemy 

force consists of a reinforced MRP, two tanks, and three 

BMPs, in a hasty defensive position. Scouts report what 

appear to be minefields forward and to the flanks of the 

enemy position. The Alpha section identifies the right flank of 

the enemy position and discovers the flank is not protected 

by obstacles and not covered by direct-fire weapons (see 

Figure 5-6). 

En route to the 3d platoon's zone, the troop commander 

tells the 1st platoon to continue reconnaissance forward to 

the LOA and find out if other enemy forces are providing 

mutual support to the enemy platoon in the 3d platoon's 

zone. He also tells the platoon leader to establish a screen 

along the LOA in his platoon zone. He then tells the 4th 

platoon to join the 2d platoon near checkpoint 12, using the 

ridgeline to cover its move, and prepare to conduct a hasty 

attack. Using TIRS, he outlines a route that runs from 

checkpoint 12 around the western edge of the village to 

checkpoint 7, then to a position from which it can engage the 

enemy on his most vulnerable flank (see Figure 5-7). 
5-20 

Figure 5-6. Develop the situation. 

8 H

F

PL S

P

U

R

PL S

P

U

R

PL S

A

BER

PL S

A

BER

LO

A

LO

P

A

L S

A

D

DLE

PL S

A

D

DLE

3

1

3

1

B16

B23

A19

B24

M

O

R

T

21

19

43

7 62

M

R

P (+)

2 12
5-21 

Figure 5-7. Set for hasty attack. 

8 H

F

PL S

P

U

R

PL S

P

U

R

PL S

A

BER

PL S

A

BER

LO

A

LO

P

A

L S

A

D

DLE

PL S

A

D

DLE

3

1

3

1

B16

B23

A19

B24

M

O

R

T

19

43

7 62

M

R

P (+)

2 21

12
5-22 

After a first-hand look at the situation in the 3d platoon's 

zone, the troop commander decides to attack. He tells the 

FSO to continue suppressing the enemy. Next, he tells the 

3d platoon leader to establish a base of fire from covered 

positions near checkpoint 21. The 3d platoon is tasked to 

destroy or suppress all AT weapons observed. While heavy 

suppressive fires are raining on the enemy force, the 

commander joins the tank platoons at checkpoint 12 and 

leads them into the attack. After passing checkpoint 7, the 

tank platoons begin maneuvering. The troop commander 

tells the FSO to shift his fires on routes of withdrawal behind 

the enemy position. The tank platoons go around the 

woodline, deploy abreast, and attack by fire (see Figure 5-8). 

Two tanks in the 4th platoon are hit and damaged; one 

soldier is killed and three are injured. The tank platoons 

consolidate in covered and concealed positions near 

checkpoint 7. Scouts from the 3d platoon move in quickly, 

capture several wounded prisoners, and search the vehicles 

and dead for anything of intelligence value. The 3d platoon 

leader orders one scout squad to stay and secure the 

prisoners, and then takes the rest of the platoon forward to 

finish zone reconnaissance up to the LOA. 

The 1SG leads the medics and M88 to the 4th platoon's 

casualties and picks up the prisoners the 3d platoon 

secured. The XO coordinates with the S4 for immediate 

resupply, then collects and transmits final reconnaissance 

reports to the squadron. 

Section IV. Deliberate Attack 

A deliberate attack is an offensive mission conducted to 

defeat enemy forces in dug-in and prepared defensive 

positions or strongpoints. It is preceded by intensive 

intelligence gathering using sources such as patrols, aerial 

photographs, reconnaissance by fire, radio intercepts, radar 

surveillance, satellite reconnaissance, and prisoner 

interrogation. Large volumes of indirect preparatory fires are 

normally used. Detailed tactical planning and rehearsal of the 

attack are crucial to success. 
5-23 

Figure 5-8. Tank platoons move into position for the hasty 

attack. 

8 H

F

PL SPU

R

PL SPU

R

PL S

A

BER

PL S

A

BER

LO

A

LO

P

A

L S

A

D

DLE

PL S

A

D

DLE

3

1

3

1

B16

B23

A19

B24

M

O

R

T

19

43

62

M

RP (+)

2 12

21

7
5-24 

The cavalry troop alone cannot conduct a deliberate 

attack against prepared defensive positions. It usually 

participates with its parent squadron or other combined arms 

force as one of the three major elements in a breaching and 

assault operation. The troop can serve as the 

overwatch/support element, the breaching element (if 

reinforced with engineers), or the assault element. Doctrine 

for attacking a complex obstacle or a strongpoint is found in 

FM 71-1 and FM 17-95-10. 

Section V. Raid 

A raid is an attack into enemy territory for a specific 

purpose, with no intent to gain or hold terrain. The troop 

returns to friendly lines after the attack. 

The cavalry troop normally conducts a raid against clear, 

well-defined targets whose destruction will have an adverse 

effect on an enemy force. Good targets for a troop raid are 

enemy artillery, rear service units, or command and control 

headquarters. 

CRITICAL TASKS 

During a raid, the following critical tasks must be 

accomplished: 

• Coordinate and establish a restricted fire area around 

the raid area. 

• Reconnoiter the troop's direction of attack from the 

point of departure to the objective. 

• Establish visual contact with the enemy. Reconnoiter 

and determine the best place to initiate the attack. 

• Establish a base of fire element to suppress the 

enemy force. 
5-25 

• Establish a maneuver element (usually one or both 

tank platoons) to move to a position of advantage over 

the enemy and attack them by fire. 

• Suppress the enemy force with long-range direct fires 

while the maneuver element moves up to begin its 

attack. 

• Establish surveillance on enemy avenues of approach 

to the objective, where follow-on enemy maneuver 

units would most likely appear. 

• Attack the enemy by fire or by fire and movement to 

defeat them. Finish quickly. 

• Establish security to protect the withdrawal of the 

remainder of the troop. 

• Return rapidly to friendly lines and enter at the 

designated passage point. 

TECHNIQUES 

A raid achieves its purpose through speed, violent 

execution, and surprise. The troop's maneuver should 

produce that effect. There will probably not be a chance to 

reconnoiter before the attack; speed and surprise generate 

the security needed. Consequently, the troop might not 

always take the mortar section, combat trains, or command 

post. Vehicles disabled on a raid may be left behind in the 

interests of speed and security for the entire troop. When the 

troop receives a FRAGO to conduct a raid, the commander 

should receive the following graphic control measures from 

the S3 or squadron commander: a point of departure along 

the line of departure or line of contact, a direction of attack, 

an objective, a route of withdrawal, and a passage point to 

enter friendly lines. Analyze the terrain and the enemy 

situation, then issue the troop FRAGO. 

The FSO should coordinate with the squadron FSO to 

establish a restricted fire area around the raid area. The 1SG 

should coordinate for immediate resupply of Class III and 

Class V when the troop returns. Have one scout platoon take 

the lead and reconnoiter the troop direction of attack from the 
5-26 

point of departure on the line of departure to the objective. 

The lead platoon should establish visual contact with the raid 

objective to confirm the troop's scheme of maneuver and 

establish surveillance of the objective. The other scout 

platoon may act as the base-of-fire element, and follow about 

1 kilometer behind the lead platoon. Have the lead platoon 

guide it into an overwatch position to deliver long-range 

suppressive fires on the enemy. Consolidate the tank 

platoons, move forward to join them, then follow about 1 

kilometer behind the second scout platoon. 

Once the base-of-fire element is set, have the platoon 

suppress the enemy with direct and indirect fires. Guide the 

maneuver element into a position to attack by fire. Finish 

quickly and move out. 

Tell the scout platoon performing reconnaissance and 

surveillance tasks to screen and protect the withdrawal of the 

remainder of the troop back to friendly lines. Have the other 

scout platoon lead the way back on the designated route of 

withdrawal, and have the tank platoons follow. Stay back and 

supervise the conduct of the rear screen until all troop 

elements have entered friendly lines. Consolidate and 

resupply the troop with fuel and ammunition as soon as 

possible. Get ready to fight again. 

EXAMPLE OF A RAID (HEAVY TROOP) 

The squadron is defending in sector astride a likely Threat 

regimental zone of attack. The three armored cavalry troops 

are deployed abreast with the tank company in reserve. The 

squadron frontage is about 10 kilometers wide. Threat forces 

attack from the march. Squadron elements in the northern 

half of the sector are softened with long-range preparatory 

fires delivered by rocket and artillery forces. As artillery fires 

increase in intensity, the fire support element and the 

advance guard battalion of the regiment deploy from the 

march into prebattle formation and then attack. The advance 

guard battalion is quickly defeated by the concentrated fires 

of the northern cavalry troop and a surprise counterattack by 

the tank company. The squadron rapidly repositions to meet 
5-27 

the assault of the regimental main body. Within one hour, the 

regimental main body approaches the line of contact with two 

MRBs abreast. Their axis of advance indicates most of their 

combat power will be concentrated in the northern half of the 

squadron's sector. Artillery suppressive fires increase as the 

Threat battalions deploy into attack formation. Aeroscouts 

report two 122-mm artillery battalions of the regimental 

artillery group moving into firing positions about 4 kilometers 

behind the attacking combat maneuver units. In this 

situation, with good defensible terrain, the squadron 

commander decides to concentrate the combat power of the 

troops, the tank company, and his available artillery in the 

north to defeat the advancing maneuver forces. He orders 

the southern cavalry troop to conduct a raid behind enemy 

lines to destroy the regimental artillery group simultaneously. 

The troop commander quickly analyzes the terrain, and 

then issues a FRAGO to the troop. He tells the 1st platoon, 

which is currently on the screen line, to take the lead and 

reconnoiter the troop's direction of attack from the point of 

departure on the LD to the objective area. The platoon is 

tasked to establish visual contact with the Threat artillery 

units and to locate the best covered and concealed approach 

into their flanks or rear. The troop commander tells the 3d 

platoon to follow about 1 kilometer behind the 1st platoon 

and establish a base of fire to suppress and fix the artillery 

units. He orders the 2d and 4th platoons to consolidate 

rapidly near the point of departure. He tells the mortar 

section to remain in the troop sector. Priority of fires goes to 

the 1st platoon. As the 1st platoon approaches the point of 

departure, the troop FSO coordinates with the squadron FSO 

to establish a restricted fire area around the raid area. Once 

it is established and confirmed by the FSO, the troop 

commander orders the 1st platoon forward (see Figure 5-9). 
5-28 

Figure 5-9. Heavy troop raid (part one). 

PL M

OUSE PL D

O

G

PL C

AT PL D

O

G

7

9

1

2

RFA

201A

C

R

050530

050600

2

3

4

M

O

RT

1

PD

PL M

OUSE

PL C

AT

5

8
5-29 

The 1st platoon makes visual contact in about 10 

minutes, and continues to reconnoiter for a good axis of 

attack. The 3d platoon moves into an overwatch position 

about 1,800 meters away and lays down a curtain of 

suppressive fire with chain guns, TOW missiles, and mortar 

fire. While suppressive fires are delivered, the tank platoons 

maneuver into the left rear of the artillery units, then deploy 

abreast and attack the Threat artillery battalions by fire (see 

Figure 5-10). 

After silencing the battalions, the troop commander 

immediately orders the 3d platoon to lead the troop back to 

friendly lines along the designated route of withdrawal. The 

2d and 4th platoons follow while the 1st platoon screens the 

withdrawal of the troop. The troop commander joins the 1st 

platoon and supervises the conduct of the rear screen until 

all troop elements have reentered friendly lines (see Figure 

5-11). The troop returns to defensive positions, and the 1SG 

begins resupply actions. 

EXAMPLE OF A RAID (LIGHT TROOP) 

The light troop should consider the raid target when 

planning its operation. A combination of weapon systems 

may best suit the destruction of the raid objective rather than 

operating in pure platoons. A mix of weapon systems may 

also assist in security of the objective during the raid. The 

troop scramble should be considered as a possible task 

organization when planning a raid. 
5-30 

Figure 5-10. Heavy troop raid (part two). 

PL M

OUSE PL D

O

G

PL C

AT PL D

O

G

7

9

1

2

RFA

201A

C

R

050530

050600

M

O

RT

PD

PL M

OUSE

PL C

AT

5

8 1

2

3

4

SC

REEN
5-31 

Figure 5-11. Heavy troop raid (part three). 

PL M

OUSE PL D

O

G

PL C

AT

PL D

O

G

7

9

1

2

RFA

201A

C

R

050530

050600

M

O

RT

PD

PL M

OUSE

PL C

AT

5

8 1

3 2

4

` 
5-32 

Example steps of a light troop conducting a raid are as 

follows: 

• Troop moves in column, platoons in a vee. Troop is a 

scramble organization with platoons integrating the AT 

vehicles into the scout sections. Each scout platoon is 

running two sections of three vehicles plus the platoon 

leader. See Figure 5-12. 

• Lead platoon (1st platoon) conducts reconnaissance 

forward of the troop. 

• 1st platoon establishes contact with the objective, then 

secures the flanks and conducts surveillance of the 

objective. 

• 2d platoon, second in the order of movement, moves 

through 1st platoon, establishes security on the far 

side of the objective, orienting on the mounted 

avenues of approach into the objective area. 

• 3d platoon establishes an attack position vicinity of 

BP1. 4th platoon establishes an attack position vicinity 

of BP2. 

• Troop commander initiates the attack with indirect 

fires. 3d and 4th platoons move and attack by fire from 

BP1 and BP2. 

• Troop engages enemy position using TOWs to destroy 

hard targets and fires from caliber .50 and MK-19s for 

soft targets and suppression of enemy defenses. 

• Troop uses indirect fires to cover their withdrawal. 

• 1st platoon covers the troop withdrawal. 

• 4th platoon displaces first, followed by 3d platoon, then 

2d, then 1st. 

• Troop moves in column, platoons in vee with 1st 

platoon providing rear security. 4th platoon conducts a 

rapid zone reconnaissance forward of the troop as it 

moves toward friendly lines. See Figure 5-13. 
5-33 

Figure 5-12. Light cavalry troop conducts a raid using a troop 

scramble. 

WOODS

ENEMY

POSITION

A

C

1

1

1

A 2 4

PL

PINTO

PL

COLT

2

3

4

3

B 2

B

BP2

BP1
5-34 

Figure 5-13. Light cavalry troop completes the raid and 

returns to friendly lines. 

4

B 2

A 2

A 1 B 1

1 B 1

2

3

4

B 4 C 4 A 4

PL

PINTO

PL

COLT

3

A
6-1 

Chapter 6 

Defense 

Defense is not the decisive form of war. While defense 

can deny success to the enemy, it seldom assures victory. 

The defense is, however, the stronger form of war due to the 

inherent advantages of the defender. Army operations 

recognize the strength of the defense, but emphasize the 

necessity to transition to the offense quickly. 

Brigades, battalion task forces, and company teams are 

the principal defensive forces for the corps or division. 

Cavalry units normally perform security missions for the 

defense or reconnaissance missions to support attacks. 

Cavalry units frequently perform defensive operations as a 

part of security missions, or when required to defend in an 

economy-of-force role for a higher headquarters. 

Contents 

 Page

Section I. Purpose, Fundamentals and 

 Schemes of Maneuver................................6-2 

Section II. Defend From a Troop Battle Position..........6-6 

Section III. Defend in Troop Sector...............................6-10 

Section IV. Delay in Troop Sector .................................6-22 
6-2 

Section I. Purpose, Fundamentals, and 

Schemes of Maneuver 

PURPOSE 

The immediate purpose of defensive operations is to 

defeat an enemy attack and create opportunities to go on the 

offense. For both the heavy and light cavalry troops, 

defensive operations may also achieve one or more of the 

following: 

• Gain time. 

• Concentrate forces elsewhere. 

• Attrit enemy forces as a prelude to offensive 

operations. 

• Control key or decisive terrain. 

• Retain tactical, strategic, or political objectives. 

In some cases, the troop may be required to defend 

because it cannot muster enough combat power to attack. 

FUNDAMENTALS 

Eight fundamentals are common to cavalry troop 

defensive operations. 

Depth. Position platoons in depth, and place obstacles in 

depth. Depth allows the troop to— 

• Gain enemy contact early. 

• Perform counterreconnaissance tasks. 

• Ascertain enemy direction of attack/intentions. 

• Develop the situation, providing reaction time and 

maneuver space to concentrate combat power when 

and where it is needed. 

Dispersion. Deploy subordinate elements as far apart as 

possible without losing their ability to concentrate (mass) 

firepower against the enemy. The more dispersed the troop, 
6-3 

the harder it is for the enemy to mass fires against it as a 

whole. However, do not allow the enemy to concentrate its 

forces or fires against isolated elements. 

Security. The troop may employ passive or active 

measures, or a combination of techniques. All must be 

considered in the defensive plan. Examples of passive and 

active security measures follow: 

Passive Active

 Disperse vehicles and Screen/Establish OPs. 

 platoons. 

 Perform mounted/ 

 Use camouflage/ dismounted patrols. 

 cover and concealment. 

 Establish GSR posts. 

 Impose radio listening 

 silence. Establish M8 chemical 

 alarm net. 

 Use hide positions. 

 Enforce noise and light 

 discipline. 

 Minimize movement. 

 Do not position in 

 likely target areas. 

Maximize Terrain Advantages. Study the terrain. 

Reconnoiter it from both the troop commander's and the 

enemy's view, if possible, to determine— 

• Avenues of approach. 

• Reconnaissance avenues of approach. 

• Restricted/severely restricted areas. 

• Defiles (canalizing terrain). 
6-4 

• Engagement areas. 

• Battle positions. 

• Subsequent and alternate battle positions. 

• Hide positions to support battle positions. 

• OP positions forward of defensive positions. 

• Subsequent and alternate OP positions. 

• Positions where obstacles can be tied in with natural 

obstacles to turn, disrupt, or block the enemy. 

• Positions that facilitate counterattacking by fire or by 

fire and maneuver into the flanks and throughout the 

depth of the enemy. 

• Routes to and from each position. 

Stop Enemy Rate of Advance. Offense is based on two 

principles—speed and mass. Develop a defensive plan that 

blunts the momentum of the enemy attack through the use of 

obstacles and fires (direct and indirect). If most of his combat 

power is killed, the enemy will be forced to dig in and 

establish a hasty defense or withdraw from combat. 

Mass Combat Power at the Right Place and Time. In order 

to defeat a massed attack, the troop must mass fires against 

the enemy where and when he is least able to escape its 

effects. The ability of the troop to mass combat power when 

and where it is needed is a function of— 

• Early warning/reaction time. 

• Responsive/rapid maneuver by subordinate elements. 

Force the Enemy to Fight in Two Directions. When 

engaging the attacking force, maneuver platoons into 

positions that force the enemy to turn and fight in two or 

more directions. This will force him to split his fires, 

preventing him from concentrating fires, and to expose his 

vulnerable flanks. 
6-5 

Counterattack. Draw the enemy into structured 

engagement areas and attack him en masse with 

overwhelming firepower to destroy him quickly and 

decisively. Wrest the initiative from him. Maneuver forces to 

exploit the situation. Attack by fire and by fire and maneuver 

into his vulnerable flanks and throughout the depth of his 

formation. 

DEFENSIVE SCHEMES OF MANEUVER 

There are three basic schemes of maneuver the 

commander can use in designating a course of action for a 

defensive mission. These schemes of maneuver center on 

the use of battle positions and sectors for subordinate 

platoons, or a combination of the two. 

Defend from a Troop Battle Position. Both heavy and light 

cavalry troops may defend from a battle position. This 

method is be used when the enemy situation is clear, when 

there is only one avenue of approach, or when the troop 

commander must coordinate subordinate unit fires. In this 

scheme of maneuver the troop commander retains most of 

the authority for fighting the battle. The troop commander 

must understand his squadron commander's intent and 

concept to prevent holding the troop in place and risking its 

destruction.

Defend in Troop Sector. Both the heavy and light cavalry 

troops may defend in troop sector. This method may be used 

when the enemy situation is vague, when there is more than 

one avenue of approach, or when subordinate platoons 

require more freedom or action. In this scheme of maneuver, 

the troop commander delegates much of the responsibility 

for fighting the battle to his subordinate platoon leaders. He 

maintains control through the use of effective control 

measures and a clearly understood intent and concept.

Defend by Combination of Battle Positions and Sectors.

Both heavy and light cavalry troops may defend using a 

combination of battle positions and sectors. This is the most 
6-6 

common method of defense for a cavalry troop as it provides 

the troop commander maximum flexibility to maneuver and 

mass fires throughout the depth of the sector when changes 

in METT-T dictate.

Section II. Defend From a Troop Battle 

Position 

Either the heavy or light cavalry troop may defend from a 

troop battle position. This mission is normally assigned when 

the squadron commander elects to concentrate the direct 

fires of the troop or squadron within an engagement area. 

The troop cannot maneuver outside the position without the 

squadron commander's permission. Within the battle 

position, the troop commander positions his platoons to 

concentrate all direct fires where the squadron has specified. 

The troop fights to retain the position unless ordered by the 

squadron commander to counterattack or withdraw. The 

troop may still retain the task to screen/maintain contact with 

the enemy forward of the battle position, depending on the 

squadron commander’s intent. If so, the tank/AT platoons will 

initially be positioned within the troop battle position, and the 

scout platoons may assume adjacent positions within the 

battle position following execution of a security drill (see 

Security Drill paragraph in Chapter 4, page 4-15). 

CRITICAL TASKS 

To defend a troop battle position, the following critical 

tasks must be accomplished: 

• Decide where the enemy will be killed and designate 

the engagement area. 

• Establish OPs oriented forward and to the flanks of the 

BP to gain contact with the enemy force and provide 

early warning. 

• Establish primary and alternate platoon BPs to 

concentrate direct fires within the engagement area as 

directed by the squadron commander. 
6-7 

• Designate supplementary platoon BPs to cover other 

routes of enemy approach. 

• Establish sectors of fire for each platoon. 

• Reconnoiter and establish platoon routes from hide 

positions to platoon BP, and for withdrawal to 

subsequent platoon/troop BPs. 

TECHNIQUES 

The squadron commander assigns troop battle positions 

when he can mass the fires of two or more troops in a 

squadron engagement area. The size of a troop battle 

position can vary, but it should provide enough depth and 

maneuver space for platoons to maneuver into 

alternate/supplementary positions and execute local 

counterattacks. 

The troop commander conducts a thorough terrain study 

before the troop occupies the position, keeping in mind 

where the squadron commander wants the troop to 

concentrate its fires. 

• Designate primary and alternate positions for each 

platoon. 

• Position platoons to achieve flanking fires along the 

avenue of approach. Consider the effective range of 

each platoon's weapon systems. 

• Position platoons to mass direct fires within the 

engagement area and to provide mutual support. 

• Position platoons to cover any dead space in the 

engagement area. If not possible, plan indirect fires to 

cover the dead space. 

• Use TRPs to control fires and orient weapon systems 

for each platoon. 

• Occupy the BPs from the rear. Establish OPs to 

support the squadron plan. Allow platoon leaders time 

to reconnoiter and position vehicles to place effective 

direct fires within their sectors of fire. If better 
6-8 

defensive terrain lies outside the BP, call the S3 or 

commander for approval to adjust the boundaries. 

• Once platoons are set, inspect them to make sure 

each platoon is properly oriented and has good fields 

of fire. When satisfied, have the platoons reconnoiter 

routes to subsequent positions and select firing 

positions for each vehicle. If time and engineer 

support are available, dig prepared positions for 

vehicles. Have the platoon leaders prepare platoon fire 

plans for approval. 

• After preparing the BP, have all elements except OPs 

move to hide positions to reduce the risk of enemy 

observation and to decrease their vulnerability to 

enemy fires. 

• Maintain security. Position the command post where it 

has FM communications with subordinate elements 

and the squadron. Position the troop trains behind 

good cover that is out of direct-fire range and allows 

quick access to each platoon position. The troop 

commander is positioned where he can observe the 

engagement area and control the troop. The FSO 

should be nearby to ensure coordinated fire support. 

• Identify trigger points/lines. 

− Upon the enemy reaching what terrain feature does 

the troop initiate indirect fires? Direct fires? 

− Upon the enemy reaching what terrain feature does 

the troop displace to prevent decisive 

engagement? 

• If the troop has to disengage and displace under fire to 

a subsequent position, bound the troop back by 

platoon(s), consistent with the squadron scheme of 

maneuver. If the troop disengagement and 

displacement are covered by another element, the 

troop may move as a whole to a subsequent position. 

See Figure 6-1 for an illustration of the techniques 

described above. 
6-9 

Figure 6-1. Troop engagement area. 

12

526

PL

RED

PL

GREEN

PL

BLUE

T11

T12

T14

2

1

4

AZ4226

B-DORF

3

T13

STEINWALD
6-10 

Section III. Defend in Troop Sector 

Both heavy and light cavalry troops may defend in sector. 

METT-T considerations determine optimal troop sector width; 

however, the troop is normally allocated a sector oriented on 

a single battalion-size avenue of approach. 

Either troop may defend in sector when— 

• The squadron cannot concentrate its fires due to— 

− extended frontages. 

− defending along a cross compartment. 

− multiple avenues of approach. 

• Retention of specific terrain features is not necessary. 

• The troop may use the depth of the sector to dissipate 

the enemy’s attack. 

• Maximum flexibility to maneuver is desired. 

CRITICAL TASKS 

• Maintain continuous surveillance of high-speed routes 

or avenues of approach into the troop sector (screen). 

• Destroy or repel all enemy reconnaissance elements 

forward of the troop's initial defensive positions 

(counterreconnaissance). 

• Structure engagement areas. 

• Position platoon battle positions to support 

engagement areas. 

• Engage the enemy from more than one direction. 

• Determine criteria for initiating fires, counterattack, 

and disengagement. 

• Prevent the enemy from penetrating the troop rear 

boundary or designated NPL (no penetration line). 
6-11 

TECHNIQUES 

When given the order to defend in sector, the squadron 

will usually provide the following graphic control measures: 

troop boundaries, an initial screen line, a rear boundary, 

phase lines, contact points between troops, TIRS, and TRPs 

that support any squadron engagement areas. 

Study the terrain in sector. Identify the terrain near the 

initial screen line from which OPs can maintain continuous 

long-range surveillance of enemy avenues of approach. 

Determine where platoons can be positioned astride or on 

the enemy avenues of approach. Look for positions that 

provide good observation and fields of fire into the avenue of 

approach, and good cover and concealment for hide and 

defilade positions. Take a look at proposed platoon battle 

positions, and determine where troop fires can be massed on 

the avenue of approach. Use this portion of the avenue of 

approach to structure a troop engagement area(s). 

The engagement area is where the troop will destroy an 

advancing enemy force. Establish a series of TRPs and use 

them to assign sectors of fire to each platoon. This allows the 

commander to control the fires of the troop and to achieve 

overlapping platoon fires. 

With the assistance of supporting engineers, plan 

obstacles within the sector to support the defensive plan. 

Reinforce existing obstacles within engagement areas, and 

plan more obstacles to slow, canalize, or turn the enemy. 

Obstacles can buy the troop time to engage the enemy, and 

increase the effectiveness of indirect fires in the engagement 

area by compressing threat formations, slowing them down, 

and detaining them in the engagement area. Obstacles can 

give the commander time to maneuver platoons to 

counterattack or to move to subsequent positions. Plan 

obstacles in depth so the enemy gets bottled up in the 

engagement area and is confronted with a series of 

breaching operations. Make sure the troop can observe and 
6-12 

place fires on all obstacles in the sector. Place the obstacles 

to achieve different effects. Obstacles emplaced on the 

reverse side of a hill or depression will cause the enemy to 

pile into them before he sees them. Strategically emplaced 

obstacles will cause the enemy to turn when he sees them, 

exposing his flanks to direct fires. 

Give the FSO planning guidance so he can develop the 

troop indirect-fire support plan for the mission. Plan fires to 

support the scouts on the screen line forward of the troop. 

The scouts need indirect-fire support to engage enemy 

reconnaissance forces, to disrupt enemy lead echelon 

formations, and to attack follow-on forces. Plan indirect fires 

to engage enemy forces in the engagement area, when they 

are slowed by obstacles. These fires suppress, disrupt, and 

confuse the enemy and allow platoons to set up the directfire engagement. Plan indirect fires behind the engagement 

area to isolate the enemy. In addition, plan fires forward of 

the troop’s positions to help disengage from the enemy in 

case the troop cannot stop him from initial positions. Identify 

rally points in sector behind the battle positions. Crews or 

troop elements that become separated or disorganized 

during battle move to these identified rally points to 

reassemble or reorganize. 

Position platoons to maximize their weapons' 

effectiveness and crew/vehicle survivability based on the 

given terrain and the capabilities of the enemy. Platoons 

positioned at the base and along one or both flanks of the 

engagement area will force the enemy to fight in two or more 

directions. 

Determine how to employ the scout platoons. Although 

the primary role of scout platoons is to conduct 

reconnaissance and screening in support of the troop, the 

troop commander may need to use their firepower to support 

troop defensive missions. Depending on sector width and 

number of avenues of approach, one scout platoon may be 

employed in a screen mission forward of the troop during a 

mission to defend in sector. It may fall back to a battle 
6-13 

position after identifying the attacking enemy force (security 

drill), or it may stay forward of the troop, continuing to screen 

to identify follow-on forces. The other scout platoon may fight 

the attacking force from a battle position. The placement of 

the scout platoon's BP depends on the role the commander 

wants the platoon to play in the troop fight. 

After making final adjustments to initial battle positions 

with the platoon leaders, plan alternate positions and 

subsequent positions in depth. Give platoon leaders time to 

reconnoiter covered and concealed withdrawal routes to their 

alternate subsequent positions. 

Position the troop mortars where they can support the 

scouts on the screen line. Ensure they can engage targets 

from 3 to 3.5 kilometers beyond the screen line, or as far as 

the scouts can observe. Plan other mortar positions so that 

they can support the troop fight as the threat enters the 

engagement area. Also, plan positions through the sector. 

The first sergeant positions the troop trains behind the 

initial troop battle positions, where they are responsive to 

troop needs but not vulnerable to direct fires. The XO 

positions the command post behind the initial platoon BPs on 

terrain that affords good FM radio communications with the 

troop elements and squadron headquarters. If possible, the 

XO positions the command post behind the subsequent 

troop positions; this reduces its vulnerability to fires, and 

allows it to remain stationary and maintain good FM 

communications while the troop displaces to other positions. 

The XO and first sergeant plan subsequent positions through 

the sector. 

Position the FIST where it can maintain good digital FM 

communications with the supporting artillery unit. If possible, 

keep the FIST where it can use the laser designator to 

designate high-priority targets in the engagement area for 

Copperhead or other laser-guided munitions. 
6-14 

The troop commander must be in position to see the 

battlefield. To control the troop fires, he must understand 

which areas can and cannot be engaged by platoon battle 

positions. 

The first critical task for a defend mission is to destroy or 

repel the threat reconnaissance. The scout platoon(s) on the 

screen line is responsible for identifying enemy 

reconnaissance forces, engaging them with indirect fire, and 

defeating them if possible. The other platoons may need to 

assist the scout platoon(s) in defeating the reconnaissance 

forces after the scouts identify them. 

After destroying or repelling enemy reconnaissance 

forces, the troop is prepared to take on the lead echelon of 

the enemy force. Remember the scheme of maneuver. Let 

the enemy enter the engagement area and then mass the 

direct fires of the troop to strike a decisive blow. Depending 

on how the obstacles are set up, the troop commander may 

want to strike the enemy just before he reaches the 

obstacles; then, as the enemy deploys in reaction to troop 

fires, he hits the minefields and tank ditches. The 

commander may wish to wait until the enemy gets into the 

obstacles, and strike when he is confused and his formations 

are compressed. 

Continue the fight by maneuvering platoons into alternate 

or supplementary positions while counterattacking by fire to 

complete the destruction of the lead echelon forces. If the 

troop is unable to defeat the enemy in the initial engagement 

area, it must be prepared to displace to subsequent 

positions. Do not allow the troop to become decisively 

engaged. Use the disengagement criteria from the scheme 

of maneuver to ensure adequate time to bound the troop 

back to subsequent positions by platoon(s). Keep one or two 

platoons in contact with the enemy, engaging him with direct 

and/or indirect fires. The other platoons move back in sector 

to subsequent positions. Once they are set, they engage the 

enemy with indirect fires or long-range TOW missile shots or 

tank main gun fire so the remainder of the troop can break 

contact and move to its subsequent positions. 
6-15 

Once the platoons are in their subsequent positions, 

make any needed adjustments to their positions or 

orientations based on what the enemy is attempting to do. 

Finish off the enemy from these positions, and then move 

forward and reoccupy initial or alternate positions, if possible. 

EXAMPLE - DEFEND IN TROOP SECTOR (HEAVY 

TROOP) 

The troop is given a mission to defend in sector and hold 

the threat forward of PL SABER. The troop commander 

completes his plan and issues the order. The 1st platoon 

moves forward and establishes a screen along PL SPUR. 

The 3d platoon prepares BP 20 at the base of the initial 

engagement area and occupies a hide position to the rear. 

BP 20 is about 2,500 meters away from the base of EA 

BEAR. The platoon's fires are concentrated in the direction of 

TRP 25. The 2d and 4th platoons occupy BP 30 and BP 40, 

respectively, along the eastern flank of EA BEAR. The 2d 

platoon orients on TRP 21, and the 4th platoon orients on 

TRP 27. The western flank is protected by a steep ridgeline. 

The troop command post is on high ground about 2 to 3 

kilometers behind the initial defensive positions. The troop 

trains are just south of BP 30. The troop commander 

positions between BP 20 and BP 30, where he has a good 

view of all platoon positions and the engagement areas (see 

Figure 6-2). 

A threat reconnaissance patrol of two BMPs approaches 

the screen line moving along the flanks of the high-speed 

route into the troop sector. As the patrol crosses PL SPUR, a 

1st platoon scout element unmasks and quickly ambushes 

the patrol with cannon fire. One scout squad immediately 

searches the threat vehicles for intelligence information and 

captures two wounded prisoners. The troop commander tells 

the 1st platoon leader to expect a CRP within an hour. The 

rest of the troop stays in hide positions away from terrain 

most likely targeted by threat artillery units (see Figure 6-3). 
6-16 

Figure 6-2. Defend in sector (part one). 

PL

SPUR PL

SPUR

PL

SABER

A32

AB0025

C

E

H

40

30

4

2

3

EA

BEAR

1

SCREEN

20

AB0021

AB0023

AB0022

MORT

A51

C11

PL

SABER

K

AB0027
6-17 

Figure 6-3. Defend in sector (part two). 

PL

SPUR PL

SPUR

PL

SABER

A32

AB0025

C

E

H

4

2

3

AB0021

AB0023

AB0022

MORT

A51

C11

PL

SABER

K

AB0027
6-18 

About 45 minutes later, heavy concentrations of artillery 

and rocket fire begin falling along areas of high ground that 

dominate the avenue of approach near EA BEAR. Troop 

elements button up. When the suppression lifts, they 

immediately test for chemical agents. No chemicals are 

detected. The TCs unbutton. The 1st platoon reports two 

MRCs advancing abreast in prebattle formation about 2 

kilometers forward of the screen line. The platoon sergeant 

contacts the FSO. Using the technique of fire "AT MY 

COMMAND," the platoon sergeant times the impact of 

artillery to coincide with the arrival of Threat formations at 

preplanned TRPs. Threat formations are disrupted, several 

vehicles sustain suspension damage, and the advance slows 

down. Threat leaders scramble to restore order, company 

formations are reformed, and the advance continues. The 

1st platoon does not engage the advancing force, but 

maintains contact and reports the Threat's location and 

activity to the troop commander. The 1st platoon maintains 

its positions along PL SPUR to identify follow-on forces. It 

reports seeing a third MRC about 1,500 meters behind the 

lead companies. The troop commander now has a fairly clear 

picture of the Threat situation. 

The platoon leaders and troop commander move into 

hide positions to observe the threat approach. The FSO 

continues to smoke and to suppress the threat lead 

companies with mortar fire, which keeps them buttoned up 

and slows their rate of advance. The troop commander 

orders the 3d platoon to move into firing positions and 

prepare to fire at his command. The 3d platoon moves into 

hull-down positions. The 2d and 4th platoons remain in hide 

positions. Their platoon leaders stay up and continue to 

observe. The lead threat MRCs appear about 2,800 meters 

away, with tanks leading platoon columns. The troop 

commander orders the 3d platoon to engage. The 3d platoon 

sends six TOW missiles down range, targeting mine-roller 

tanks and the threat platoon leader's BMPs (see Figure 6-4). 

The threat force detects the antitank guided missile (ATGM) 

fire and moves toward the 3d platoon, which quickly backs 

into defilade. 
6-19 

Figure 6-4. Defend in sector (part three). 

PL

SPUR PL

SPUR

PL

SABER

A32

AB0025

C

E

H

AB0021

AB0023

MORT

A51

C11

PL

SABER

K

AB0027

AB0022
6-20 

The threat continues to advance through EA BEAR, piling 

into a minefield and tank ditch hidden on the reverse slope of 

a long, shallow draw. Several threat vehicles are caught in 

the obstacle. As the FSO observes this development, he 

concentrates all available fires on group targets that cover 

the obstacle. With the advance disrupted and stalled at the 

obstacle, the troop commander orders the 2d and 4th 

platoons to attack by fire into the flanks of the threat's lead 

echelon (see Figure 6-5). The concentrated cannon fire of 

both tank platoons quickly destroys most of the two lead 

companies. 

The threat's third company comes into view in attack 

formation. The troop commander orders the 3d platoon to 

engage this force with long-range TOW missile fires. 

Survivors of this battalion begin to withdraw from the 

battlefield. The troop commander quickly orders the 2d and 

4th platoons to counterattack and destroy the remnants of 

the battalion. The 3d platoon provides overwatch. Moving to 

alternate positions, the tank platoons counterattack by fire to 

finish off the remaining battalion vehicles. The troop 

commander then orders all platoons to reoccupy their initial 

hide positions and redistribute ammunition. He anticipates 

the second echelon will arrive within 30 minutes. The 1st 

platoon maintains its positions on the screen line. The first 

sergeant moves to each of the platoons to resupply. He 

collects the PWs from the 1st platoon. The XO collects all 

routine logistics reports and forwards them to squadron 

headquarters. The troop commander checks the status of 

leaders within the troop and designates replacements and 

cross-levels within the troop as necessary. 
6-21 

Figure 6-5. Defend in sector (part four). 

PL

SPUR PL

SPUR

PL

SABER

A32

AB0025

C

E

H

AB0021

AB0023

MORT

A51

C11

PL

SABER

K

AB0027

AB0022 AB0022
6-22 

Section IV. Delay in Troop Sector 

Delay is a continuous series of defensive actions over 

successive positions in depth that trades the enemy space 

for time while retaining freedom of action. It is an economyof-force operation that buys time to permit something else to 

happen at a more critical place on the battlefield. 

CRITICAL TASKS 

The critical tasks for delay include all the tasks associated 

with defend in sector as well as— 

• Preserve freedom to maneuver. 

• Cause the enemy to deploy from march or prebattle 

formation into attack formation as the troop moves to 

the rear. 

TECHNIQUES 

Planning and tactics for delay are identical to those for 

defend in sector, and vary only in their purpose. The flow of a 

delay resembles a "hit hard, then move" technique. The troop 

commander and subordinate platoon leaders must be very 

aware of disengagement criteria. The troop must mass the 

effects of fires to temporarily stop the enemy advance, then 

disengage and move to subsequent positions in depth. The 

troop cannot become decisively engaged. It must maintain a 

mobility advantage over the enemy. This means taking 

advantage of terrain, being familiar with high-speed routes of 

withdrawal, and rehearsing engagements and movements. 

The commander will probably have to use one or two 

platoons to assist disengagement of the others. 
7-1 

Chapter 7 

Other Tactical Operations 

Several combat operations are routinely associated with 

successfully accomplishing the missions described in 

Chapters 3 through 6. These operations require special 

planning and training considerations and techniques 

because of their complexity. At troop level, these operations 

are based on standing operating procedures (SOP) to 

ensure they can be conducted quickly and efficiently. 

CONTENTS

 Page

Section I. Tactical Road Marches..............................7-1 

Section II. Assembly Areas.........................................7-9 

Section III. Relief in Place............................................7-15 

Section IV. Battle Handover/Passage of Lines ............7-21 

Section V. Hasty Water Crossing................................7-31 

Section VI. In-Stride Breach.........................................7-35 

Section VII. NBC Defensive Operations........................7-42 

Section I. Tactical Road Marches 

Troops not in contact with the enemy often travel long 

distances to position themselves for future operations. A 

successful tactical road march depends on unit discipline 

and the ability to execute the plan strictly in accordance with 

the SOP. 
7-2 

CRITICAL TASKS 

Accomplish the following critical tasks when planning, 

executing, and supervising a tactical road march: 

• Establish the readiness condition (REDCON). 

• Issue a warning order. 

• Reconnoiter the route to the start point. 

• Conduct quartering party operations. 

• Issue a movement order. 

• Execute a tactical road march in accordance with 

movement order and SOP. 

− Cross and report the start point, checkpoints, and 

release point on time. 

− Conduct actions at halts. 

− Conduct actions on contact. 

• Maintain security throughout movement and during 

halts. 

• Operate a trail party. 

• Clear the release point. 

TECHNIQUES 

The march discipline necessary to execute a road march 

with routine precision is attained only by strict adherence to 

SOP. Ensure the tactical road march portion of the troop 

SOP addresses, as a minimum, the following: 

• Order of march. 

• March speed. 
7-3 

• Distance between vehicles. 

• Actions on contact (air, ground, and indirect fire). 

• Actions at halts. 

• Security. 

• Contingency plans for vehicle breakdowns, breaks in 

column, and lost vehicles. 

• Quartering party. 

• Trail party. 

The basic considerations in planning any road march are 

listed below. 

• Time available. 

• Distance of the move. 

• Current situation. 

• Availability and condition of routes. 

• Size of the unit. 

• Types, numbers, and characteristics of vehicles that 

must move. 

The troop will most often move as part of a squadron 

operation, and the move will be based on the squadron 

order. The troop commander must, however, be familiar with 

planning considerations so he can plan and execute an 

independent troop move, if required. 
7-4 

March Planning Sequence. If time permits, follow this 

sequence when preparing for a road march: 

• Prepare and issue a warning order, giving the troop's 

movement and any follow-on missions. Give them 

time to prepare for the operation. 

• Analyze the situation to determine if any of the 

movement factors (order of march, rate of march, or 

interval) specified in the troop SOP must be altered to 

meet mission requirements. If the troop must 

reconnoiter two assembly areas, the two scout 

platoons might have to be first in the order of march. 

• Conduct a map reconnaissance of the route (if 

assigned) or determine the best available route. 

• Organize and dispatch reconnaissance and quartering 

parties (if occupying an assembly area). 

• Prepare detailed movement plans based on mission 

requirements and reconnaissance information. 

• Prepare and issue the march order to the orders 

group. 

Route Reconnaissance. Reconnaissance is essential to 

movement planning. It reveals accurate, up-to-date 

information about the route. A route reconnaissance 

determines travel times, and identifies capacities of 

underpasses and bridges, locations of fords and bypasses, 

and critical points and obstacles. This lets the commander 

plan his movement and avoid areas or situations that could 

disrupt it. 

Conduct the route reconnaissance with one of the scout 

platoons. Before the reconnaissance, let members know 

what information is needed and when and where they should 

submit it. Get them out as early as possible; troop plans are 

based on what they see and report. 
7-5 

If no other traffic control assets are available or if the 

troop is moving independent of the squadron, use the scouts 

from the platoon conducting the reconnaissance as traffic 

control teams at critical points along the route. Determine 

through map reconnaissance any built-up areas or key 

intersections that could disrupt the troop’s movement, and 

position traffic control teams there. Based on their 

reconnaissance, the scouts may need to refine these 

positions. 

If the movement is being conducted as part of the 

squadron, one troop will usually reconnoiter the route. The 

troop must, however, reconnoiter the route from its present 

location to the start point to determine if the route is suitable 

and how long it will take to reach the start point. 

Quartering Party. A quartering party is used to reconnoiter 

and prepare a position before the troop main body arrives. 

The troop quartering party will often move as part of the 

squadron quartering party. Organize it with a scout platoon 

leader or the first sergeant as the party leader, with guides 

from each platoon, and with any additional personnel 

needed to clear the area. 

Before the quartering party leaves, it must know the 

troop’s route, order of march, estimated time of arrival, and 

any specifics on establishing the assembly area. Before the 

main body arrives, the quartering party reconnoiters the 

area, marks routes, and prepares to guide the main body as 

it enters the new area. 

Trail Party. The troop trail party is made up of personnel 

and equipment (normally the troop trains) to handle 

emergency vehicle repair and recovery, medical aid and 

evacuation, and emergency refueling. The trail party moves 

just forward of the last maneuver platoon in the main body. 

The troop motor sergeant or first sergeant is in charge. 

Main Body. The troop normally moves as a single march 

unit in column formation when conducting a tactical road 
7-6 

march. The organization of the troop and any attached 

elements should be standardized during movement. Alter 

this organization to meet specific mission requirements as 

needed. 

The troop commander has no prescribed place in the 

column. He positions himself where he can best control the 

movement of the troop. He will usually be well forward in the 

column, behind the lead platoon, to respond to contingencies 

while on the move. As a security measure, the troop 

command post should be positioned farther back in the 

column to disperse troop command and control. 

The troop’s column organization must provide adequate 

security against air and ground threats, while on the move 

and during halts. See Figure 7-1 for one way to organize a 

troop march column. 

Figure 7-1. Troop column organization. 

RECON AND QUARTERING PARTY 30 TO 60 MINUTES

AHEAD OF MAIN BODY

MORT CMD

GP

CDR

FIST

MAIN BODY

DIRECTION OF MARCH
7-7 

The 3d platoon, the first sergeant, and the quartering 

party move ahead of the troop. The troop order of march is 

1st platoon, command group, 2d platoon, command post, 

mortars, trains, and 4th platoon. This order of march 

provides 360-degree security, disperses the command and 

control assets of the troop, and provides reconnaissance 

forward of the main body. Also, vehicle commanders assign 

sectors of observation to their crews, who search for air and 

ground threats (see Figure 7-2). 

The troop performs the march in open or close column, 

depending on the situation. Use close column during limited 

visibility conditions. Vehicles are spaced 25 to 50 meters 

apart. This method takes advantage of the traffic capacity of 

the route, but provides little dispersion. Vehicle density is 15 

to 30 vehicles per kilometer along the route of march. Use 

open column to provide greater dispersion and, thus, greater 

security. The distance between vehicles varies from 50 to 

100 meters. Open column is normally used in daylight 

conditions. Base the troop’s march speed on the slowest 

vehicle in the column. The troop trains will usually limit the 

rate of march. 

Halts. Halts are used to rest personnel, provide personal 

comfort and relief, facilitate mess operations, refuel vehicles, 

maintain and inspect equipment, adjust the schedule, and 

allow other traffic to pass. The squadron march plan or troop 

SOP will specify the frequency and duration of halts, and will 

prioritize work to be done. For long movements, plan halts 

into the troop march table and ensure subordinate platoon 

leaders understand what actions must occur at the halt. 

When unscheduled halts occur, find the reason for the halt 

and let subordinates know how long it will last. Provide for 

security during halts, and establish OPs to provide early 

warning of enemy forces during long halts. 
7-8 

Figure 7-2. Maintain 360-degree security. 

Vehicle commanders assign sectors of observation to

their personnel so there is 360-degree observation.

Each vehicle commander designates an air guard to

provide air security, or specific vehicles may be designated air guard vehicles. In that case, the crews

concentrate on only vehicle air observation rather

than air and ground observation.

GUNNER

DRIVER

TC

SCOUTS

DRIVER

LO

A

DER

GUNNER

TC

Vehicle commander and scout

observer also watch for enemy

aircraft, including helicopters.

Vehicle commander and loader

also watch for enemy aircraft,

including helicopters.
7-9 

Vehicles that become disabled during movement must 

not obstruct traffic. The crew of the disabled vehicle must 

move the vehicle off the route, post guides to direct traffic, 

and find the problem. If the vehicle can be fixed, it rejoins the 

rear of the column. It does not return to its original position 

until the column has halted. If the vehicle cannot be readily 

repaired, the trail party recovers it. 

Section II. Assembly Areas 

An assembly area serves as a place where the troop 

gathers to prepare for future operations. In the assembly 

area, the troop prepares and issues orders, repairs and 

maintains vehicles, conducts resupply operations, and rests. 

As a minimum, assembly areas are positioned out of range 

of enemy light artillery. 

TASKS 

The following tasks are associated with assembly area 

operations: 

• Plan the occupation of an assembly area. 

• Conduct quartering party operations. 

• Occupy an assembly area. 

• Maintain security. 

• Establish communications. 

• Prepare for future combat operations. 

• Depart an assembly area. 
7-10 

TECHNIQUES 

The troop will normally be assigned a specific assembly 

area location. Within the area available to the troop, conduct 

a map reconnaissance, and if time is available, a ground 

reconnaissance. Look for an area that provides overhead 

concealment. This is extremely important if the troop will 

remain in the area for any length of time. Select an area that 

also provides— 

• Cover from direct fire. 

• Good drainage and a surface that will support troop 

vehicles. 

• Good entrances and exits and an adequate internal 

road or trail network. 

• Space for dispersion of vehicles, personnel, and 

equipment. 

Quartering Party. The troop will often occupy an assembly 

area at the end of a road march. Before the quartering party 

leaves the troop’s present location, tell them how to organize 

the assembly area. They must know any special 

requirements, such as a site for a logistics package 

(LOGPAC), so they can prepare the position. The quartering 

party must be organized to provide their own security during 

this operation. When the quartering party arrives at the 

forward assembly area, they must— 

• Reconnoiter the area. If the area is not suitable, the 

leader of the quartering party must report immediately 

and provide a recommendation for another area. 

• Organize the area. The leader of the quartering party 

selects locations for the platoons, mortars, command 

post, trains, and any attached elements, based on the 

commander's instructions. He may need to deviate 

from the commander’s guidance to position an 

element in a suitable location. 

• Improve and mark entrances, exits, and internal 

routes. 
7-11 

• Mark vehicle locations. Platoon representatives in the 

quartering party select general locations for vehicles 

in their platoon. Vehicle commanders and the chain of 

command refine these positions when they arrive. 

• Perform guide duties. A platoon representative guides 

his platoon into position after the platoon clears the 

release point. 

Occupation. Each platoon is guided from the release point 

into the assembly area by its quartering party member. 

Color-coded lights can be used to link up guides and lead 

vehicles (see FKSM 17-97-3). When the troop arrives at the 

assembly area, all elements move off the route without 

halting or slowing to keep the route of march clear. Keep this 

in mind when selecting routes, organizing the order of march 

for the road march, and allocating space in the assembly 

area. Once platoons have cleared the route and moved into 

their areas, they can adjust their positions without slowing 

the remainder of the troop. 

Positioning troop elements in the assembly area is based 

on the size of the area, the terrain and avenues of approach, 

the length of time the troop will occupy the area, and any 

special requirements, such as resupply. Some 

considerations in allocating space for the troop are shown in 

Figure 7-3 and in the following list: 

• If possible, space vehicles at least 100 meters apart to 

decrease exposure to enemy observation and fire. 

• Keep vehicles in hide positions and establish OPs on 

terrain that provides good observation of approaches 

into the assembly areas for early warning of enemy 

movement. The vehicles can be moved up to a 

fighting position if necessary. 

• Position platoons based on available terrain in the 

assembly area. Tank platoons may need more space 

to move vehicles in and out of position; scout platoons 

may occupy terrain that is more restrictive. 
7-12 

• Position the troop command post in the center of the 

assembly area. This makes establishing wire 

communications and issuing orders easier. 

• Position troop trains where they have a good road 

network and space to conduct their maintenance and 

resupply operations. They may be used to secure the 

perimeter of the assembly area, but this will reduce 

their support ability. 

• Emplace the mortars in a position from which they can 

support the troop with indirect fires. Overhead cover 

will reduce or eliminate their ability to fire. 

Figure 7-3. Troop assembly area. 

MORT

9

7

11

5

3

3

2

2 1

3

4

4 1
7-13 

Security. Although the assembly area is not a defensive 

position, the troop must be able to see and defeat enemy 

ground attacks. The best defense against air attacks is to 

remain hidden. Post guards at all entrances and exits to stop 

traffic that tries to enter the area. Establish OPs to observe 

key terrain features and likely avenues of approach for early 

warning of enemy approach. Each platoon must provide 

overlapping observation and fires within its platoon and with 

the platoons on its flanks. Establish a dismounted patrol plan 

so platoons make physical contact with their adjacent 

platoons. Ensure the platoons provide 360-degree coverage 

of the assembly area. Camouflage vehicles and equipment 

to prevent enemy detection from the ground and air. Place 

PEWS (platoon early warning system) in heavily vegetated 

areas or dead space to provide early warning of enemy 

movement in and around the position. Emplace NBC alarms 

upwind and about 150 meters from the troop’s positions to 

provide early warning of an NBC attack. Assign the mortars 

an azimuth of fire on the most dangerous approach into the 

assembly area. Give the fire support officer guidance in 

preparing an indirect-fire plan. 

Communications. Messenger and wire are the primary 

means of communications from the command post to each 

platoon and to each OP. If practicable, lay wire from the 

squadron to the troop. Plan on providing a messenger to the 

squadron command post. Use radio when no other means of 

communication can be used. 

Preparation for Future Operations. Several tasks are 

routinely accomplished in an assembly area. These tasks 

are listed in the troop SOP (FKSM 17-97-3) under priority of 

tasks upon arrival in an assembly area, and include— 

• Position vehicles. 

• Establish local security. 

• Establish OPs. 

• Prepare fire plan. 
7-14 

• Establish wire communications. 

• Maintain radio watch and man turret weapons. 

• Camouflage positions. 

• Prepare obstacles/mine plan. 

• Select alternate and supplementary positions. 

• Reconnoiter routes of withdrawal. 

• Perform PMCS. 

• Emplace NBC alarms and PEWS. 

• Continue to improve positions. 

• Conduct logistics resupply (Classes I, III, and V). 

• Rest in accordance with REDCON status. 

Modify this task listing to accomplish specific tasks (such 

as conduct rehearsals, test-fire weapons, and conduct 

inspections) in preparation for future operations. Ensure 

subordinates know how long the troop will remain in the 

assembly area and are told of any special requirements. 

Occupation of the assembly area will often be conducted 

and supervised by troop NCOs, while the commander and 

platoon leaders plan for upcoming operations. 

Departure. Maintain the appropriate REDCON. Each 

REDCON level indicates critical tasks and time available to 

prepare for future operations. 

• REDCON 1—be prepared to move immediately. 

− All personnel alert and ready for action. 

− Vehicles loaded and secured, and weapons 

manned. 

− Vehicle engines running and OPs not manned. 
7-15 

• REDCON 2—be prepared to move in 15 minutes. 

− All personnel alert. 

− OPs and wire pulled in. 

• REDCON 3—be prepared to move in half an hour. 

− Fifty percent of each crew/squad stand down for 

rest, feeding, and maintenance. 

− Remaining 50 percent man vehicles, OPs, 

weapons, and monitor radios/phones. 

• REDCON 4—be prepared to move in one hour. 

− Two men per platoon make dismounted checks of 

platoon area. 

− One man per vehicle monitors radios/phones and 

mans turret weapon. 

All personnel remain at 100-percent alert until the 

prioritized work is complete after entering the assembly area. 

Initiate the appropriate REDCON when the work is finished. 

As the time for execution of a mission nears, increase the 

REDCON in accordance with guidance from squadron, 

assigning REDCON 1 just before the troop must move. 

Section III. Relief in Place 

A relief in place is an operation in which a unit in combat 

is replaced by another unit. Responsibilities for the combat 

mission and the assigned sector, battle position, or zone of 

the relieved unit are assumed by the relieving unit. A relief in 

place may be accomplished during offensive and defensive 

operations and may be conducted during any weather and 

light conditions. 

The primary purpose of a relief in place is to maintain the 

combat effectiveness of committed units. A relief in place is 
7-16 

conducted to replace a committed unit to give it the 

opportunity to reconstitute, rest, decontaminate, or perform a 

change in mission. 

TASKS 

The following tasks are associated with the relief in place: 

• Plan and coordinate a relief in place. 

• Establish communications. 

• Establish liaison. 

• Conduct reconnaissance. 

• Initiate movement. 

• Occupy positions. 

• Maintain operations security. 

TECHNIQUES 

A troop will often perform a relief in place mission as part 

of a squadron operation to relieve or be relieved by a 

brigade. The troop will usually conduct a relief in place in 

conjunction with a battalion. The troop may relieve a 

battalion and operate in an economy-of-force role or be 

relieved by a battalion to conduct a change in mission. 

To reduce confusion and maintain security, the following 

factors must be considered when planning a relief in place: 

• The time that responsibility for the sector, battle 

position, or zone is to pass. 

• Operations security. 

• Deception plans. 
7-17 

• Time, method, and sequence of relief. 

• Routes and critical control measures. 

• Concept of subsequent missions. 

• Plans for additional positions. 

• Contingency plans. 

• Location of obstacles and transfer of responsibility. 

• Transfer of ammunition; wire lines; petroleum, oils, 

and lubricants (POL); and materiel to the relieving 

unit. 

Communications. At a specified time or upon receipt of 

an order, the relieving unit minimizes radio traffic or begins 

to operate at radio-listening silence. The relieving unit 

command post monitors the command net of the unit to be 

relieved while continuing to operate on its internal command 

net. 

Reconnaissance and Liaison. The orders group of the 

relieving unit moves to the command post of the unit being 

relieved for face-to-face coordination. 

In preparation for the relief in place, the relieving unit 

moves to a forward assembly area under the command of 

the XO, if necessary. 

If the situation permits, the relieving unit conducts a 

reconnaissance of the area when it completes coordination. 

The units establish a contact point behind the positions into 

which they will move; a guide from the relieved unit will meet 

them there to make any final coordination and guide them 

into position. 

The commanders complete their plans and issue orders 

to their respective units after the reconnaissance and liaison 

are complete. 
7-18 

Methods. The relief in place can be conducted in several 

ways. Use the method appropriate to the troop's situation. 

• One unit at a time. This is the slowest method, but the 

most secure. 

• All units simultaneously. This is the quickest method, 

but the least secure. 

• Center units first, followed by flank units. 

• Flank units first, followed by relief of the center unit. 

• Occupy adjacent or in-depth positions that cover the 

area of responsibility. 

Passage of Command. The troop command post and 

battalion TOC collocate to facilitate command and control of 

the operation. The relieving unit departs its location in the 

prescribed sequence and lines up at the contact points with 

the guides from the relieved unit. The relieving unit moves 

into hide positions behind the relieved unit. The relieving unit 

moves into position after all pertinent information has been 

exchanged and the relieved unit moves out of position. The 

relieved unit moves to a rally point or assembly area to link 

up with the rest of the unit. When each element has 

completed the relief, the relieving unit assumes responsibility 

for the area and reports by messenger, wire, or radio to the 

command post. The relieved unit moves along its designated 

route to the new location. See Figures 7-4 and 7-5 for 

illustration of the relief in place. 

The higher headquarters will often specify a time the 

relieving unit assumes responsibility for the sector, battle 

position, or zone. The commanders conducting the relief 

coordinate to ensure the relief is conducted on time. The 

relieving unit normally assumes responsibility when the 

relieved unit departs its positions. The commanders of the 

two units are usually collocated and responsibility passed 

face to face. 
7-19 

Figure 7-4. Troop prepares to conduct relief in place with 

task force. 

RP

SP

4

Troop CDR,

Plt Ldrs, and FSO

conduct recon

with relieved TF.

Troop XO moves

troop to forward

assembly area.

3

1 2
7-20 

Figure 7-5. Troop completes relief in place. 

MORT 1 3

After the relieved unit departs, the troop

CDR adjusts his PLT positions if necessary.

Platoons meet guides at contact points

and move into position.

RP Troop CDR collocates with TF TOC.

1

RP

2

RP

3

4

SP

SP SP SP

RP
7-21 

Fire Support Assets. The troop fire support officer 

coordinates with the squadron fire support officer to ensure 

there is fire support throughout the operation. The fire 

support assets of the relieved unit remain in position 

throughout the relief of the maneuver forces, and are 

prepared to support both units. Fire support assets of the 

relieving unit position themselves as quickly as possible to 

provide additional support. 

Enemy Contact. If either unit gains direct-fire contact with 

an enemy force, it immediately notifies the other unit and the 

higher headquarters directing the relief. If responsibility has 

not passed, the relieving unit becomes OPCON to the 

relieved unit. The relieving unit's mortars fire missions as 

directed by the relieved commander through his fire support 

officer. If responsibility has passed, the relieved unit 

becomes OPCON to the relieving unit. The collocation of the 

commanders and command posts facilitates rapid 

coordination and action in this situation. 

Section IV. Battle Handover and Passage of 

Lines 

Battle handover is an operation that transfers 

responsibility for fighting an enemy force from one unit to 

another in the close-in battle. Conducted by stationary and 

passing units, battle handover is designed to sustain 

continuity of the combined arms fight, and to prevent the 

enemy from getting a "free ride" anywhere on the battlefield 

as one force picks up the fight from another. It is also 

designed to preserve the fighting capabilities of both forces 

as they execute the operation. Battle handover is associated 

with almost all Army combat operations. 

Passage of lines is a tactical event associated with battle 

handover. It is the controlled movement of one unit through 

the positions of another stationary unit that does not interfere 

with either unit's scheme of maneuver. A passage of lines is 

often used because the combat situation does not permit 
7-22 

one unit to bypass another unit's positions. The passing unit 

must move through the positions of the stationary unit. 

Passage of lines is often an integral part of the following 

operations: 

• Deliberate attacks or counterattacks across the FLOT. 

• Exploitation and pursuit. 

• Route, zone, or area reconnaissance. 

• Raids. 

• Movement to contact. 

• Defend, delay, or withdrawal. 

• Defensive or offensive cover. 

• Screen or guard. 

Although a cavalry troop does not normally perform all of 

these operations, it may conduct them as part of a larger 

force. 

CRITICAL TASKS 

The three players in battle handover and passage of lines 

are: the stationary unit, the passing unit, and the common 

commander of both units. Each has critical tasks to perform 

to achieve smooth and efficient execution of the operation. 

Critical Tasks of the Common Commander. The 

commander exercising command authority over both the 

stationary unit and the passing unit must accomplish three 

critical tasks. 

• Establish where battle handover will occur by 

designating a phase line forward of the FEBA as the 

battle handover line (BHL). The line should be where 

combat maneuver forces of the stationary unit along 

the FEBA can effectively overwatch and protect the 

passing unit as it withdraws behind the FEBA or 

advances forward of the FEBA or FLOT. The distance 

forward of the FEBA or FLOT is limited to available 
7-23 

fields of fire and the effective range of weapons of the 

stationary unit. 

• Designate contact points just forward of the battle 

handover line at which stationary and passing units 

are required to conduct physical coordination (only in 

defensive operations). 

• Ensure the passing unit is provided indirect-fire 

support while its artillery is displacing during battle 

handover and passage of lines. 

The stationary unit normally recommends battle handover 

line and contact point locations to the common commander. 

It remains the responsibility of the common commander to 

establish the line and contact points. These control 

measures must be reflected graphically on an overlay and 

identified in the appropriate operation plan (OPLAN), 

OPORD, or FRAGO issued to subordinate units. The battle 

handover line, in effect, establishes a boundary between the 

ground owned and controlled by the stationary unit 

commander and the ground controlled by the passing unit 

commander. The stationary unit commander controls the 

ground forward of the FEBA up to the battle handover line. 

He can place security forces, obstacles, and direct and 

indirect fires into this area to support his scheme of 

maneuver. 

While the battle handover line defines the point at which 

the battle handover should ideally occur, events normally 

preclude this from happening. The moving and stationary 

force commanders and their common commander should 

understand that the actual handover may occur in a “zone” 

centered on the battle handover line. Both the moving and 

stationary force must remain active and responsive enough 

to perform the battle handover anywhere in this zone, and 

should not dogmatically “stick to the plan.” 

Battle handover begins on the order of the common 

commander. To sustain unity of command in the passing 

operation, the passing unit is usually placed OPCON to the 
7-24 

stationary unit to execute battle handover and passage of 

lines. OPCON by the stationary unit is limited to those 

actions necessary to get the passing unit through the 

stationary unit's area as quickly as possible. In defensive 

operations, battle handover from the passing unit to the 

stationary unit is not complete until the combat maneuver 

forces of the stationary unit along the FEBA have visual 

contact with the enemy, and the stationary unit commander 

indicates readiness to assume responsibility for the battle. In 

offensive operations, battle handover from the stationary unit 

to the passing unit is not complete until the combat 

maneuver elements of the passing unit have crossed the 

FEBA or FLOT, deployed for combat, and maneuvered 

across the battle handover line. 

Passing Unit Critical Tasks. The passing unit must 

accomplish the following critical tasks to perform battle 

handover and passage of lines: 

• Immediately establish communications with the 

stationary unit. Enter the command, operations and 

intelligence (OI), and fire support nets. 

• Collocate a command post with the TAC CP or TOC 

of the stationary unit as soon as possible to enhance 

communications and unity of effort. 

• Continuously report to the stationary unit the location, 

size, and composition of all enemy forces. Report the 

enemy's current activity. If the enemy is attacking, 

report his direction of movement, movement 

formation, and estimated rate of advance. If he is 

defending, report his locations, orientation, 

composition, fire sacks, reserves (if known), obstacle 

system, or flanks. 

• Continuously report to the stationary unit the location, 

size, and activity of all subordinate elements to 

include combat support, combat service support, and 

command and control facilities. 

• Given the current disposition of subordinate units, 

coordinate with the stationary unit to determine 
7-25 

contact points at which each subordinate companysize unit will physically coordinate handover and 

passage of lines with representatives of the stationary 

unit. Once contact points are determined, send a 

FRAGO to each subordinate unit specifying where 

they will physically coordinate passage with the 

stationary unit. Confirm recognition signals that must 

be displayed during passage (defensive operations). 

• Once each subordinate unit acknowledges where it 

must physically coordinate passage, each unit will 

dispatch representatives to assigned contact points 

and coordinate passage for its unit. At the contact 

point, confirm recognition signals and exchange 

required information (defensive operations). 

• Maintain visual contact with all enemy units and delay 

back to the battle handover line, avoiding decisive 

engagement (defensive operations). 

• Display correct recognition signals and use correct 

challenge and password as specified in the CEOI 

during passage. 

• Maintain proper weapons orientation. 

Stationary Unit Critical Tasks. The stationary unit must 

accomplish the following critical tasks when ordered to 

conduct battle handover and passage of lines: 

• Establish communications with the passing unit. 

Coordinate and direct the passing unit to contact 

points based on current dispositions of the 

subordinate units (defensive operations). 

• Ensure contact points are manned and subordinate 

commanders have personal communications with 

their representatives (defensive operations). 

• Ensure representatives at the contact points assign 

each passing unit a passage point into the area of 

operations and a route that extends from the passage 

points to the rear boundary or to an assembly area 

(defensive operations). 
7-26 

• Ensure representatives at the contact points 

exchange required information with the passing unit 

as outlined in FKSM 17-97-3. 

• If security forces are employed, position them along 

the battle handover line to observe enemy avenues of 

approach. Adjust as needed for low visibility 

conditions (defensive operations). 

• If obstacles are emplaced between the FEBA and the 

battle handover line, ensure routes through the 

obstacle system are clearly marked and physically 

controlled by guides, or provide an escort to the 

passing unit. Ensure that reserve targets on obligated 

routes are manned by soldiers in direct 

communication with their commanders. 

• Ensure that all routes of withdrawal obligated to the 

passing unit are unobstructed and facilitate rapid 

movement to the release point (defensive operations). 

• Ensure obligated routes of advance, attack positions, 

and routes to the battle handover line are 

unobstructed and permit rapid movement (offensive 

operations). 

GRAPHIC CONTROL MEASURES 

Figure 7-6 shows the graphic control measures that 

support battle handover and rearward passage of lines. 

• Battle handover line. This line is established by the 

common commander in consultation with both 

commanders. The stationary commander has the 

major determination in locating the BHL, as his force 

must be able to overwatch the BHL with direct fires. 

• Contact points. These are established on identifiable 

terrain and normally in the vicinity of the passage 

lanes. For rearward passage of lines, the contact 

points are established forward at the BHL. For forward 

passage of lines, the contact points are established in 

the stationary unit’s rear area rearward of the passage 

lanes. 
7-27 

• Passage points. The passage point is that point on the 

passage lane where the moving unit moves through, 

and responsibility for the battle is passed to the 

stationary unit. It is usually placed where the passage 

lane begins. 

• Passage lanes. The stationary unit establishes 

passage lanes to move the passing unit quickly 

through defending unit positions. This could include 

passing through gaps in friendly obstacles and moving 

near or through friendly engagement areas and battle 

positions. Lanes are restrictive; however, they should 

ideally be wide enough to allow the passing unit to 

move in a tactical formation. The passage lane begins 

at the passage point and ends at the rear of the 

stationary unit BPs. The passage is considered 

complete when the moving unit exits the lane. 

• Routes. Routes are used to move the passing unit 

through the stationary unit rear area. The number of 

routes designated will vary based on METT-T, but as 

a general rule, multiple lanes/routes should be 

planned to facilitate rapid passage of moving units 

and to avoid unnecessary massing of units. The 

stationary unit may escort or guide the passing unit 

along the lane/route. 

• Assembly area. An assembly area in the rear area of 

the stationary unit allows the passing unit to conduct 

hasty reorganization and emergency CSS actions. 

This assembly area is temporary in nature. 

• Infiltration points. Units should plan infiltration points 

and lanes for personnel unable to complete the 

passage with the unit. Passing unit liaison officers 

may remain located with stationary unit CPs to serve 

as a point of contact for infiltrating 

personnel/equipment. Personnel who infiltrate must 

have some way of contacting the stationary unit 

before crossing into friendly territory. 
7-28 

20

31

X

X X

X

AA

COLT

 AA

PINTO

BHL BHL

FEBA

FEBA

LANE DOG

LANE CAT

12

SP SP

Figure 7-6. Rearward passage of lines. 
7-29 

TECHNIQUES 

At troop level, the passage of lines will usually be 

performed as part of a squadron operation. The passage 

may be forward, such as to pass through a defending unit to 

conduct a counterattack, or rearward, such as when a 

covering force unit withdraws through units in the main battle 

area. 

The troop is particularly vulnerable during a passage of 

lines. The unit may be concentrated and the fires of the 

stationary unit may be temporarily masked. Thorough 

reconnaissance and detailed coordination are critical to 

ensuring the operation is successful. 

A troop will often perform a battle handover and passage 

of lines through a single battalion while the squadron 

conducts the operation through a brigade. Ideally, the 

boundaries will correspond to the battalion boundaries so 

that coordination for the battle handover is conducted 

through a single headquarters. 

The troop commander has numerous considerations to 

ensure a successful passage of lines. During 

reconnaissance, he must confirm— 

• The disposition of the stationary force through which 

the troop will pass. 

• The location of contact points where both units are 

required to make physical contact at a predetermined 

time. 

• The location of passage points on the battle handover 

line through which friendly forces will pass. 

• The location of passage lanes that provide a clear 

route through a friendly position, and also facilitate a 

smooth and continuous passage. Areas selected for 

passage should be unoccupied or on the flanks of 

units in position. If possible, use multiple routes to 

reduce vulnerability during the operation. 
7-30 

• The location of an attack position (for forward 

passage) or assembly area. This position should 

provide cover and concealment and be located where 

the passing unit will not interfere with the stationary 

unit. 

• The initial location for combat support and combat 

service support elements. 

Based on the reconnaissance, the troop commander 

coordinates and plans for— 

• Supporting fires. The stationary force supports the 

passing unit with direct and indirect fires up to the 

battle handover line. In forward passage, the 

stationary force supports the passing unit's move 

through the passage and until it crosses the battle 

handover line. In a rearward passage, the stationary 

unit supports the passing unit's move back across the 

battle handover line and through the passage of lines. 

• Time of transfer of responsibility for control of the 

sector and handover of the enemy. 

• Troop density. The passing troop commander should 

plan for multiple routes of passage to ensure rapid 

movement and to avoid congestion. 

• Traffic control. Guides from the stationary unit pick up 

passing elements at each contact point and guide 

them through the position. The passing unit 

commander tells the stationary unit the type, number, 

and order of vehicles passing through each contact 

point. 

• Communications. The leaders exchange CEOI 

information and mutually agreed upon recognition 

signals. 

• CSS. The troop commander must coordinate the 

evacuation of casualties, PWs, vehicles, and resupply 
7-31 

of fuel and ammunition. The stationary unit usually 

provides emergency service only. The passing unit 

supports itself. 

• Liaison officers. The troop commander should 

designate a representative to perform the critical 

duties of a liaison officer. Commanders normally 

coordinate a forward passage of lines and the XO 

coordinates a rearward passage. Liaisons are 

normally located at critical points during the passage. 

If the commander or XO is not available, a scout 

platoon leader should perform liaison duties. Ensure 

he is thoroughly briefed on the situation and follows 

the checklist in the troop SOP. 

Section V. Hasty Water Crossing 

A hasty water crossing is the movement across an inland 

waterway using a crossing means at hand or readily 

available without significant delay once the waterway is 

reached. It is preplanned and conducted as a continuation of 

the operation underway. Although the crossing is termed 

hasty, detailed planning assures that fire support and 

crossing means are available on arrival at the water 

obstacle. 

CRITICAL TASKS 

The following critical tasks are associated with the 

successful conduct of a hasty water crossing: 

• Plan the water crossing. 

• Conduct reconnaissance. 

• Establish security. 

• Cross the obstacle. 

• Provide continuous fire support. 

• Continue the mission. 
7-32 

TECHNIQUES 

Plan. A troop may perform a hasty water crossing 

independently or as part of a squadron. A hasty water 

crossing is performed as an extension of the ongoing 

operation. It gives the troop the ability to sustain the 

momentum of an operation, and is often associated with a 

movement to contact and a zone reconnaissance. The hasty 

water crossing is characterized by speed, surprise, minimum 

loss of momentum, and minimum concentration of forces. 

The crossing should be preplanned to ensure fire support 

and crossing means are at the crossing site. The need for a 

water crossing should be determined in the mission analysis 

and added to the commander's concept of the operation. 

This ensures the troop’s critical assets are positioned to 

support the water crossing. Seizing bridges intact before the 

enemy can destroy them is the quickest and most 

economical means of crossing, and is used when possible. 

Reconnaissance. Scout platoons will be the first to 

encounter a water obstacle. When this occurs, they report it 

and reconnoiter it to obtain the following information, which 

is forwarded to the troop command post: 

• Width and depth of the waterway. 

• Water velocity. 

• Possible entry and exit points and their conditions. 

• Enemy situation on the far bank. 

Scouts reconnoiter multiple crossing sites to prevent the 

enemy from discovering the true site and to reduce the 

concentration of vehicles at the site. If follow-on forces will 

cross at the same sites, scouts mark the entrances and exits 

for their use. 

The troop commander, with the fire support officer, 

positions himself forward during the reconnaissance of the 

water obstacle so he can personally supervise the operation. 

The fire support officer will support the scouts with indirect 

and direct fires, if needed. 
7-33 

Security. A crossing can be performed with or without 

opposition. To avoid enemy fire while crossing, prevent him 

from knowing where the crossing will be. 

Before the main body crosses, the scouts must secure 

the far bank by fording or swimming across the water 

obstacle and establishing positions. They should cross on 

both sides of the site and secure positions on the dominant 

terrain of the far side to provide early warning of threat 

activity. After securing the far side of the water obstacle, the 

scouts establish positions to the flanks of the crossing site to 

provide local security (see Figure 7-7). 

Figure 7-7. Secure the far bank. 

The scouts encounter a water obstacle, find fording

sites, and secure the far side. Position the tank

platoons and mortars to support with direct and indirect fires.

MORT

WATER

FORDING SITE OBSTACLE
7-34 

The rest of the troop should not bunch up at the crossing 

site. Position them a terrain feature short of the water 

obstacle, so they have quick access to the crossing sites but 

are not exposed to enemy observation and fires. 

Cross the Obstacle. Once the scouts have established 

positions on the far bank, the troop main body is ready to 

cross the obstacle. Time the movement to the crossing site 

so that no vehicles have to pause on the near side, but all 

can move directly through the crossing site and to their 

positions on the far side to continue the operation. Once the 

troop starts the crossing, complete it as quickly as possible 

(see Figure 7-8). 

Figure 7-8. Cross the obstacle. 

After the far side is secure, rapidly move platoons

across the obstacle and continue the mission.

MORT

WATER

FORDING SITE OBSTACLE

(-) (-)
7-35 

Fire Support. Fire support is used during the hasty water 

crossing to suppress known and suspected enemy positions 

at the crossing site. Smoke is employed to the front or flanks 

to screen the reconnaissance and the crossing. The fire 

support officer must time the movement of the mortars so 

they are in position to support the water crossing operation 

with continuous fire support. 

Section VI. In-Stride Breach 

When obstacles are encountered, an in-stride breach will 

maintain the tempo of offensive operations. Treat obstacles 

with caution and expect them to be covered by enemy 

observation and fires. The troop’s ability to breach obstacles 

using available assets is important to ensure mission 

accomplishment. The size of the enemy force covering an 

obstacle with direct fire will, however, affect the troop's ability 

to conduct a hasty breach. 

TASKS 

The following combat tasks are associated with an instride breach: 

• Detect the obstacle, reconnoiter it, and search for a 

bypass. 

• Suppress all enemy positions with direct and indirect 

fires. 

• Obscure enemy observation with smoke. 

• Secure the near side of the obstacle. 

• Breach or neutralize the obstacle. 

• Move forces across the obstacle. 

• Continue the mission. 
7-36 

TECHNIQUES 

The enemy will reinforce natural obstacles with manmade ones to slow, disorganize, and canalize the troop. 

These obstacles may consist of— 

• Minefields. 

• Log obstacles, such as abatis, log cribs, stumps, and 

posts. 

• Antitank ditches. 

• Wire entanglements. 

When scouts encounter an obstacle, they must follow the 

procedures for actions on enemy contact described in 

Chapter 3. 

• Deploy and report. 

• Develop the situation. 

• Choose a course of action. 

• Recommend a course of action. 

As they develop the situation, the scouts should rapidly 

reconnoiter the obstacle to determine if bypass routes exist 

and whether or not they are covered by enemy fires, if 

breaches through the obstacle already exist, if the obstacle 

is part of an occupied defensive position, what the enemy 

strength is, and where he is located. 

To conserve time and manpower, the troop should 

attempt to bypass all obstacles. Bypassing will not always be 

possible because available routes around the obstacle may 

lead into a fire sack. Forcing through an obstacle is the least 

desirable method of breaching because of the resulting loss 

of personnel and equipment. A hasty breach may be the only 

viable course of action. 

Before deciding on a course of action, the troop 

commander should position himself to observe the situation 

and control the operation, if possible. Once the commander 

decides that a hasty breach is the only course of action, he 
7-37 

must organize the troop into a breaching element and an 

overwatch element. When executing the hasty breach, the 

commander should avoid concentrating the troop in any one 

area, making it vulnerable to enemy fires. 

During zone reconnaissance or movement to contact, the 

troop operates over a 6- to 10-kilometer-wide zone. During 

the hasty breach, the commander may not be able to use all 

the platoons in the troop. In this situation, until the breach 

operation is complete, give the scout platoon not involved in 

the breach operation a limit of advance so it does not move 

too far ahead of the rest of the troop. It can provide the troop 

with an early warning of enemy activity. 

The Breaching Element. The breaching element is 

composed of scouts and engineers attached or in support of 

the troop. Their mission is to create lanes through the enemy 

obstacle system to allow the troop to pass. 

The Overwatch Element. The overwatch element is the 

tank/AT platoons, scouts not in the breaching force, and any 

additional engineers. Its mission is to provide close, 

continuous overwatching fires in support of the breaching 

element. After the breaching element has cleared lanes 

through the obstacle, part of the overwatch element will 

assault through the lane to defeat any enemy in the area of 

the breach. The fire support officer coordinates the fires of 

the mortars and any supporting artillery to suppress enemy 

fires with HE and to obscure his observation with smoke. 

Sequence of Events in a Hasty Breach. After encountering 

an obstacle and the commander chooses a hasty breach as 

the course of action, the sequence of events is as follows: 

• Scouts. 

− Reconnoiter the near side of the obstacle to 

determine its front edge and lateral limits, enemy 

dispositions, if the obstacle is part of a defensive 

position, and if a partial or complete breach exists. 

− Secure flanks in support of the breaching 

operation. 
7-38 

• Overwatch element. 

− Occupy overwatch positions and provide direct and 

indirect suppressive fires on the enemy for 

elements moving to and through the obstacle. 

− Use smoke to obscure enemy observation of the 

obstacle (see Figure 7-9). 

Figure 7-9. Obscure enemy observation. 

AVLB

OVERWATCH

ELEMENT

SMOKE

FSO

CO

WOODS

Suppression of enemy weapons.

Obscure enemy observation.

ARTY FIRE

CEV

BREACHING

ELEMENT
7-39 

• Breaching element. 

− Occupy covered and concealed positions to 

coordinate activities and prepare equipment, 

demolitions, and routes to the obstacles. 

− After enemy fire has been suppressed, breach the 

obstacle. 

− Secure fighting positions on the near and far sides 

of the obstacle (see Figure 7-10). 
7-40 

• Overwatch element. 

− As the breaching element breaches the obstacle, a 

tank platoon from the overwatch element prepares 

to attack through the obstacle. 

− Once the breaching element secures positions on 

the far side of the obstacle, the tank/AT or scout 

platoon attacks through the obstacle and destroys 

enemy elements that can fire directly on it. This 

assault element either continues to advance as the 

troop lead element or establishes hasty defensive 

positions while the remainder of the troop passes 

through the obstacle (see Figure 7-11). 

• Troop. Continue the mission. 
7-41 

Neutralizing and Breaching Minefields. Minefields will differ 

in layout and composition, depending on the availability of 

mines and the nature of the avenue of approach. When 

possible, mines should be detonated in place. The objective 

in breaching the obstacle is to make a safe route to the far 

side. Multiple routes across the obstacle reduce vulnerability 

to enemy fires, but may be very time consuming and beyond 

the capabilities of the troop. 

Use the following methods to neutralize and breach 

minefields: 

• Foot Lanes. Establish foot lanes through the obstacle 

when a mounted assault breach is not at first 

practicable. This lane is normally two meters wide, 

and can later be widened into vehicle lanes. Foot 

lanes allow the troop to move forces through the 

obstacle to secure the far side. 

• The Bangalore Torpedo. This device will clear foot 

lanes through mines and wire obstacles. It will clear a 

path three to four meters wide through wire 

entanglements and a narrow footpath through a 

minefield. 

• Vehicle Lanes. After the first breach is made, foot 

lanes may be widened to one-way vehicle lanes at 

least eight meters wide. Vehicle lanes may also be 

breached separately from foot lanes. Use existing 

roads when possible. Vehicle-pushed rollers, if 

available, should be used to proof the lane cleared by 

line charges. 

• The M173 Rocket-Projected Line Charge. This is an AT 

minefield clearing device. When the line charge 

explodes, it clears a vehicle lane about six meters 

wide. 
7-42 

Section VII. NBC Defensive Operations 

OPERATIONS 

NBC defense operations reduce casualties and damage 

to equipment and materiel, and minimize confusion and 

interruption of the troop’s mission in the event of enemy NBC 

attacks. These operations are performed concurrently with 

all combat operations to preserve the fighting strength of the 

troop. 

TASKS 

The following combat tasks are associated with the 

conduct of troop NBC defense operations: 

• Prepare for a nuclear attack. 

• Respond to the initial effects of a nuclear attack. 

• Respond to the residual effects of a nuclear attack. 

• Cross a radiologically contaminated area. 

• Conduct radiological reconnaissance. 

• Perform radiological decontamination. 

• Prepare for a chemical agent attack. 

• Respond to a chemical agent attack. 

• Cross a chemically contaminated area. 

• Conduct a chemical reconnaissance. 

• Perform hasty decontamination. 

• Coordinate for deliberate decontamination of 

equipment. 

• Exchange protective clothing. 
7-43 

ORGANIZATION 

The troop’s NBC defense system is composed of a 

trained NBC officer (usually the XO), an NBC NCO, and an 

enlisted alternate from troop headquarters. Troop soldiers 

are also designated and trained to operate all assigned NBC 

equipment and to assist decontamination teams. 

The NBC officer supervises troop NBC defense activities 

and assists the commander in training NBC equipment 

operators and decontamination teams. The NBC NCO and 

his alternate directly supervise radiological monitoring, 

chemical detection, and decontamination operations. During 

combat operations, the NBC NCO is located in the command 

post where he— 

• Receives, prepares, evaluates, and disseminates 

information and reports enemy and friendly NBC 

attacks. 

• Supervises employment of detection, monitoring and 

survey, and decontamination teams. 

• Maintains unit radiation exposure status records. 

• Assists the troop commander in analyzing guidance 

from squadron, mission, threat, and weather as they 

affect NBC operations. Recommends appropriate 

MOPP level based on this information. 

To facilitate operations in an NBC environment, 

designate the NBC teams from all platoons and sections by 

vehicle crews so vehicle commanders have responsibility for 

their crews and the execution of the NBC defense team 

mission. Each section in the troop has a chemical agent 

detection team and each platoon has a radiological 

monitoring and survey team. 
7-44 

Chemical Agent Detection Team. Each troop has twelve 

chemical agent detection teams. There are three in each 

scout platoon and one in each tank/AT platoon, one in the 

mortar section, one in the command post, and one in each 

combat trains and field trains. Each team has an M256 

detector kit, a chemical agent alarm, detector paper, 400 

meters of WD-1/TT for remoting the alarm, and enough 

batteries and supplies for seven days of continuous 

operations. 

Radiological Monitoring and Survey Team. Each troop has 

seven teams, each equipped with an IM 174/PD dose rate 

instrument and an IM 93/147 dosimeter. One detection team 

from each platoon serves as a radiological monitoring and 

survey team. Also, the mortar section, maintenance section, 

and troop headquarters each have a radiological monitoring 

and survey team. 

Deliberate Decontamination Team. Deliberate 

decontamination teams are organized by the vehicle crew. 

One crew from each scout and tank/AT platoon is 

designated as a decontamination team. This team is used to 

support the deliberate decontamination of the troop. One 

crew from each platoon should receive special training from 

the squadron chemical section to execute this task. 

TECHNIQUES 

Proficiency in NBC defense operations is attained only by 

strict adherence to standardized procedures as outlined in 

the troop SOP. The troop must be proficient in the following 

three fundamentals of NBC defense to survive and remain 

an effective fighting unit: 

• Contamination avoidance (before, during, and after an 

attack). 

• Protection (before, during, and after an attack). 

• Decontamination (after an attack). 
7-45 

Actions Before the Attack. The best defense against a 

chemical or nuclear attack is to avoid being detected and 

targeted. To avoid becoming a lucrative target, implement 

and strictly enforce the following passive avoidance 

measures during all operations: 

• Dispersion. Maintain dispersion between vehicles 

whether stationary or moving; vehicles bunched 

together are much easier to find. This is especially 

important when occupying assembly areas, 

conducting resupply operations, or when crossing 

obstacles and waterways. 

• Concealment. Concealed positions prevent the enemy 

from observing vehicles and personnel from the 

ground or air. 

• Camouflage. When concealment is not available or 

adequate, use camouflage to hide vehicles and 

positions. 

• Communications security (COMSEC)/signals security 

(SIGSEC). The enemy can easily locate positions with 

direction-finding equipment if the troop does not 

adhere to proper communications procedures. Ensure 

all troop elements properly encode messages sent 

over unsecured nets. 

• OPSEC. Take all possible actions to deceive the 

enemy about troop movement, positioning, intentions, 

and size. Mask movement by using folds in the 

terrain. Use hide positions when not moving or 

engaging the enemy. Enforce noise and light 

discipline. To deceive the enemy about the number of 

troop vehicles, start all vehicles simultaneously, and 

cover all track marks that lead into positions. 

Nuclear/Chemical Vulnerability Analysis. Based on the 

NBC threat and the troop mission, determine the troop's 

vulnerability and incorporate those factors into the 

commander's planning. 
7-46 

Take the following actions to reduce the effects of a 

chemical or nuclear attack: 

• Improve positions. Use available natural and manmade cover, such as folds in the earth, buildings, and 

dug-in positions, to protect personnel, equipment, 

materials, and supplies. 

• Alert personnel. Inform soldiers to assume the 

appropriate MOPP level (see Table 7-1), based on the 

possibility of enemy attack and the MOPP analysis. 

Inspect unit and individual NBC equipment and 

prepare for operations. 

Table 7-1. Mission-oriented protection posture levels. 

MOPP 

LEVEL OVERGARMENT BOOTIES MASK/HOOD** GLOVES 

0 Stored 

Nearby* 

Stored 

Nearby* 

Carried Stored 

Nearby* 

MASK 

ONLY 

Carried Carried Worn Carried 

1 Worn, open 

or closed based 

on temperature 

Carried Carried Carried 

2 Same as 

MOPP 1 

Worn Carried Carried 

3 Same as 

MOPP 1 

Worn Worn, hood 

open or closed 

based on 

temperature 

Carried 

4 Worn, closed Worn Worn Worn 

*On combat vehicle or in fighting position. 

**Includes M258A1 kit and detector paper. 
7-47 

• Protect equipment and supplies. Protect against 

chemical contamination inside a vehicle since it is 

very hard to decontaminate. Keep all hatches closed, 

if possible, and turn on vehicle overpressure system. 

Cover equipment and supplies stored outdoors or in 

tank bustles. Nonporous plastic sheets make good 

covers. Use tarpaulins if plastic is not available. 

• Position alarms. Activate and emplace automatic 

alarms to provide the earliest possible warning of an 

attack. Position the alarms upwind and at least 150 

meters away from stationary positions. Keep adjacent 

alarms about 300 meters apart. 

• Alert NBC personnel and teams. Ensure NBC 

personnel and teams are available and prepared to 

perform their assigned missions. 

Actions in Response to an Attack. Every soldier must be 

proficient at individual NBC basic skills. Masking is 

conducted immediately in response to these conditions: 

• Chemical alarm sounds. 

• Positive reading on detector paper. 

• Individuals exhibiting symptoms of chemical or 

biological agent poisoning. 

All soldiers mask automatically when an attack is 

possible, after the initiation of chemical/biological warfare, in 

response to artillery shells exploding in the area, and when 

aircraft drop bomblets or spray a mist or fog. In response to 

these conditions, all soldiers assume MOPP 4 and remain at 

maximum protection until the absence of contamination is 

confirmed or the commander has completed the analysis 

and determined a lower level of MOPP is appropriate. 

Actions in response to a chemical or nuclear attack are 

standardized and included in the troop SOP. 

• Initiate immediate masking and sound alarm (visual, 

audible, or voice). 

• Continue mission. 
7-48 

• Assume MOPP 4 as rapidly as possible. 

• Treat casualties. 

• Send NBC-1 report and update it as more information 

becomes available. 

• Identify the agent. 

• Initiate decontamination operations. 

These procedures must be rehearsed, and all individuals 

must adhere to them. 

Actions After an Attack. Warn all subordinate elements 

immediately so they can take appropriate actions. In 

addition, alert squadron and all adjacent units, giving priority 

to the unit downwind from the attack. The troop and 

squadron are extremely vulnerable at the beginning of a 

chemical attack. Continue the troop mission while preparing 

for the enemy; he will take advantage of the chemical attack 

by conducting tactical operations. 

In accordance with the troop SOP, prepare and send an 

NBC-1 report immediately. The personnel observing the 

attack send the report to the troop XO and NBC NCO in the 

command post. The XO forwards the report to the squadron 

TOC. Send the report immediately, and update it as more 

information is available. Treat any casualties of the attack 

using self-aid and buddy-aid, and report their status through 

the troop command post to the squadron S1. Operating in 

MOPP 4 will, over time, reduce the troop’s effectiveness in 

combat operations. Soldiers become fatigued and lose 

mental and physical dexterity. Maintaining command and 

control becomes very difficult during extended MOPP 4 

operations. 

The troop must determine the type of agent used in the 

attack and the extent of contamination. Initiate tests with the 

M256 detector kit to identify the type of agent. The M256 kit 

detects and identifies field concentrations of nerve, blister, or 

blood agents. This test will help determine when unmasking 

may be safe after a chemical attack. Update the NBC-1 
7-49 

report with any information provided by the test. 

Decontaminate if required, and unmask as soon as possible. 

When the troop is contaminated with persistent or 

semipersistent chemical agents, decontamination is 

necessary before reducing the MOPP level. Implement the 

following decontamination techniques: 

• Start the skin decontamination within one minute of 

contamination. 

• Apply decontaminating agents to equipment and 

vehicles to limit the spread of contamination and 

shorten the duration of the hazard. Use the M258A1 

kit for personnel wipe down, and the M11 or M13 

decontamination apparatus for vehicle/equipment 

spray down. 

Decontaminate as far forward as possible. After leaving 

the contaminated area, perform hasty decontamination as 

soon as the situation permits. Hasty decontamination 

consists of exchanging MOPP gear and washing vehicles 

with hot, soapy water or high-pressure water to remove 

gross contamination. This operation is conducted at platoon 

or troop level, assisted by the decontamination team and 

other assets provided by the squadron. Select a site that is 

uncontaminated, near a water source, and concealed. Hasty 

decontamination may allow temporary relief from MOPP 4 

for eating, drinking, and personal hygiene. Deliberate 

decontamination is required later when time and additional 

decontamination assets are available. 

Initiate unmasking procedures as soon as possible after a 

chemical attack, to reduce the performance degradation that 

occurs while soldiers are in MOPP 4. Unmasking procedures 

differ based on the availability of detection equipment. When 

nonpersistent agents are used in the attack and an M256 

detector kit is available, use the kit to determine when the 

agent is no longer present. Instruct two or three individuals 

to unmask for 5 minutes, remask, and sit in a shady area for 

10 minutes. Check the individuals for chemical agent 

symptoms. If no symptoms appear, it is safe to unmask. 
7-50 

When no detector kit is available, direct two or three 

soldiers to perform the following procedures. Have them 

keep their eyes open, take a deep breath, hold it, and break 

the seal on their mask for 15 seconds. Reseal and clear the 

mask, and wait 10 minutes in a shady area. Check them for 

chemical agent symptoms. Have them break the seal and 

take three or four breaths and reseal the mask. Wait 10 

minutes and check them for symptoms. Have them unmask 

for 5 minutes and remask for 10. Check for symptoms. If no 

symptoms appear, assume it is safe for all to unmask. 

Following a persistent or semipersistent attack, begin 

unmasking procedures after hasty decontamination is 

complete and the M256 kit indicates no agent is present. 

OPERATIONS IN A NUCLEAR ENVIRONMENT 

Radiological Monitoring. This is the detection of radiation 

and the measurement of dose rate with radiac instruments. 

Monitoring finds a hazard that would otherwise go 

unmeasured or undetected. It is conducted by the troop 

radiological monitoring and survey team, which monitors— 

• Total dose using the IM 93/147. 

• Dose rate using the IM 174/PD. 

• Food, water, and personnel contamination using the 

AN/PDR-27. 

Conduct periodic monitoring when directed, or after 

nuclear war breaks out. Monitor a specific point in the area 

at least once an hour. Start continuous monitoring after 

receiving a fallout warning; when conducting a movement; 

when a nuclear burst is reported, seen, or heard; after 

detecting radiation above 1 cGy/hr during periodic 

monitoring; or when the squadron commander orders. Stop 

continuous monitoring when the squadron commander 

orders or, except while on the move, when the dose rate falls 

below 1 cGy/hr. 
7-51 

Based on NBC-4 monitoring reports, the troop may 

conduct a radiological survey to determine the degree and 

extent of contamination. This information is forwarded to 

squadron in an NBC-4 report and on DA Form 1971-R. 

Exposure Control. While operating in a nuclear 

environment, the troop must control exposure to nuclear 

radiation. An operational exposure guide is a method of 

determining the maximum radiation dosage to which 

platoons can be exposed and still accomplish a mission. 

Determine radiation exposure by the cumulative dose or the 

platoon's radiation history. 

Platoons record and report their total dose radiation daily, 

per SOP, to the troop command post where the NBC NCO 

compiles the data. The dose is determined by averaging the 

readings from both platoon dosimeters and rounding to the 

nearest 10. The NBC NCO totals each platoon's average 

dosage, and coverts it to a radiation status (see Table 7-2). 

He maintains a record of the radiation exposure status of 

each platoon and submits a daily radiation exposure status 

report to the squadron (see Table 7-3). 

Table 7-2. Radiation dose categories. 

RADIATION DOSE CATEGORIES 

THE TABLE INDICATES THAT THE NUMERICAL VALUE OF cGys 

RECEIVED BY EACH PLATOON IS CONVERTED TO A RADIATION 

EXPOSURE STATUS (RES) FOR EACH PLATOON. THE 

CONVERSION FACTORS ARE SHOWN BELOW. 

 RADIATION STATUS 

 CATEGORY 

TOTAL CUMULATIVE 

DOSE (cGy) 

 RES-0 0 (NO EXPOSURE) 

 RES-1 GREATER THAN 0 BUT LESS 

THAN OR EQUAL TO 70 

 RES-2 GREATER THAN 70 BUT LESS 

THAN OR EQUAL TO 150 

 RES-3 GREATER THAN 150 
7-52 

The regimental and squadron commanders may move 

units on the battlefield, or relieve a particular unit that has 

been exposed to a high level of radiation. The squadron 

commander specifies the degree of exposure that units will 

not exceed for each operation. There are three degrees of 
7-53 

radiation exposure risk—negligible, moderate, and 

emergency. Each level of risk is correlated to unit radiation 

status (see Table 7-4). 

Table 7-4. Unit radiation status. 

RADIATION 

STATUS (RS) 

CATEGORY 

TOTAL PAST 

CUMULATIVE 

EXPOSURE CRITERIA 

FOR A SINGLE 

OPERATION (cGy) 

RS-0 UNITS NO EXPOSURE NEG RISK: 50 

MOD RISK: 70 

EMERG RISK: 150 

RS-1 UNITS GREATER THAN 

0 BUT NOT 

MORE THAN 70 

NEG RISK: 50-PAST DOSE 

MOD RISK: 70-PAST DOSE 

EMERG RISK: 150-PAST DOSE 

RS-2 UNITS GREATER THAN 

70, NOT MORE 

THAN 150 

ANY FURTHER EXPOSURE IS 

CONSIDERED EMERG RISK 

RS-3 UNITS GREATER THAN 

150 

ALL FURTHER EXPOSURE WILL

EXCEED EMERG RISK 

1. RADIATION EXPOSURE STATUS CATEGORIES ARE BASED 

ON PREVIOUS EXPOSURE TO RADIATION. 

2. RECLASSIFICATION OF UNITS FROM ONE RADIATION 

EXPOSURE STATUS CATEGORY TO A LESS SERIOUS ONE IS 

MADE BY THE COMMANDER UPON ADVICE OF THE MEDICAL 

PLATOON LEADER AFTER AMPLE OBSERVATION OF ACTUAL 

STATE OF HEALTH OF THE EXPOSED PERSONNEL. 

3. ALL EXPOSURES TO RADIATION ARE CONSIDERED TOTAL 

BODY AND SIMPLY ADDITIVE. NO ALLOWANCE IS MADE FOR 

BODY RECOVERY FROM RADIATION INJURY. 

4. NEGLIGIBLE RISK WILL CAUSE NO CASUALTIES AND A LESS 

THAN 2.5 PERCENT INCIDENCE OF VOMITING. MODERATE RISK 

WILL RESULT IN A LESS THAN 5 PERCENT INCIDENCE OF 

VOMITING AND HEADACHES, BUT WILL CAUSE NO 

CASUALTIES. EMERGENCY RISK WILL RESULT IN LESS THAN 5 

PERCENT CASUALTIES AND A HIGHER PERCENTAGE OF 

NAUSEA, VOMITING, AND HEADACHES. 
7-54 

Minimize the Effects of Friendly Nuclear and Chemical 

Attacks. A NUCWARN/CHEMWARN message is normally 

not sent below squadron level. Squadron alerts the troops 

using a code word prescribed in the OPORD. Squadron will 

also issue a FRAGO containing relocation instructions, the 

level of protection required, and the time of the friendly 

strike. To assure maximum reaction time, each soldier in the 

troop must be informed. Each crew immediately prepares its 

vehicles, equipment, and position for the attack as is 

appropriate to its location within the attack area. Crews 

prepare their vehicles by taking the following actions: 

• Move if necessary. 

• Position vehicle behind best available cover with front 

of vehicle toward the blast. 

• Point gun away from blast. 

• Lock brakes. 

• Secure loose equipment in vehicle. 

• Secure inside the vehicle all exterior components that 

could be damaged by the blast. 

• Close and lock all hatches, to include ballistic shields. 

• Wear helmets and protect eyes. 

• Turn off and disconnect all radios but one, which is 

needed to retain communications with squadron. 

Complete these tasks within five minutes of receiving 

notification. After the friendly strike, continue radiological 

monitoring and report if necessary. Quickly prepare to 

continue operations. 

If the troop is contaminated with fallout, the level of 

contamination is monitored by the monitor and survey 

teams. Decontamination is accomplished by brushing or 

wiping the dust off the equipment. Brush off or shake out 

MOPP gear and wash down the equipment and vehicles to 

reduce radiological contamination. Use the AN/PDR-27 to 

determine decontamination requirements and to determine if 

supplies of food and water must be destroyed. 
8-1 

Chapter 8 

Combat Support 

The effective integration of combat support (CS) will spell 

the difference between success and failure on the battlefield. 

The commander must know the capabilities and limitations of 

CS assets, and how to employ them properly. 

CONTENTS

 Page

Section I. The Fire Support Team .............................8-1 

Section II. Mortar Support...........................................8-9 

Section III. Artillery Support .........................................8-12 

Section IV. Engineer Support.......................................8-14 

Section V. Ground Surveillance Radar Support..........8-20 

Section VI. Air Defense................................................8-23 

Section VII. Army Aviation Support ...............................8-26 

Section VIII. Close Air Support.......................................8-28 

Section I. The Fire Support Team 

CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS 

The FIST is organized, equipped, and trained to 

provide— 

• A fire support advisor/coordinator—the FSO. 

• An observation/laser designation capability. 

• A communications link to all available fire support. 
8-2 

The FIST has secure FM communications on four radios, 

and digital communications on two nets through the use of 

digital message devices (AN/PSG-5 and AN/PSG-2). These 

capabilities enable the FIST to maintain communications on 

the following nets (see Figure 8-1): 

• Troop command net. 

• Troop fire support net. 

• Supporting artillery fire net (digital). 

• Squadron fire support net. 

Figure 8-1. Fire support team communication nets. 

The FIST is also equipped with a target laser locator 

designator set to designate targets for terminally guided 

munitions and to determine target locations accurately at 

ranges up to 10 kilometers (limited by line of sight). The 

target designator set is equipped with a thermal sight to use 

under limited visibility conditions. 

TROOP

CMD

FIRE NET

(DIGITAL) SQDN

FIRE

SPT

TROOP

FIRE

SPT

SQDN

FSO

FIST

MORT

TROOP

FIRE

SPT

TROOP

FIRE

SPT
8-3 

The digital message devices allow the FIST to transmit 

and receive high-speed digital messages from the howitzer 

battery computer system, the direct support artillery battalion 

TACFIRE, OH-58D aircraft, and the squadron FSO's variable 

format message entry devices, among other digital message 

devices. Digital message devices can quickly transmit 

standard fire requests, fire adjustments, and plain text 

messages. The FIST can store nine fire requests on the 

digital message devices for rapid transmission in support of 

troop operations. 

The FIST's abilities may be constrained by its 

communications with the supporting field artillery (FA). To 

coordinate any fire support for the troop, the FIST must be 

positioned where it can maintain at least a voice 

communications link to the supporting artillery. The FIST 

may not be able to see the battlefield and use the laser 

designator capability in all situations. When the troop is 

operating in a large sector, the FIST will be able to see only a 

small portion of the area. The scouts, therefore, must be 

proficient in requesting indirect-fire support. The scouts' calls 

for fire will be relayed through the FIST to the appropriate fire 

support unit. 

EMPLOYMENT TECHNIQUES 

Planning and Coordination. Fire support planning and 

coordination begin on receipt of a mission, and continue 

throughout its planning and execution. The troop FSO should 

always accompany the commander to mission briefings at 

squadron, so that he is fully aware of the squadron scheme 

of maneuver and the availability of fire support assets. He 

and the squadron FSO can also begin coordinating any 

specific requirements for fire support, such as preparations, 

groups, and series. 
8-4 

The troop commander's guidance should include the 

following to allow the troop FSO to plan the operation: 

• What is the purpose of FA and mortar fires? 

• How will FA fires support the troop's maneuver? 

• What are the attack criteria? Will the commander use 

FA for immediate suppression, screening, or 

destruction? 

• Are the attack and engagement criteria for mortars 

different from FA? 

• On what and where does the commander want to 

mass FA and mortar fires? 

Plan indirect fires on known or suspected enemy 

positions; at choke points; on the troop's objective or flanks; 

or on any other areas that would support the scheme of 

maneuver. These targets can be fired at a specific time, on 

call, or when a particular event takes place. 

The FSO incorporates his approved fire plan into a target 

list and forwards it to the squadron FSO. The squadron FSO 

compiles the lists from all the troop FSOs, eliminates any 

duplicate targets, forwards the list to the supporting artillery, 

and informs the troop FSOs of any changes to their target 

lists. 

Once he has completed his plan, the FSO will brief the 

commander on planned targets, scheduled fires, and fire 

support coordination measures that will be in effect. The 

commander will make the final decision on the fire support 

plan. Ensure it complements the scheme of maneuver and 

maximizes the available firepower for the troop. Once 
8-5 

approved, the fire plan is continuously modified and updated 

to meet changing situations. 

Silence is Consent. Once the FSO has briefed the 

commander and the commander approves the troop fire 

support plan, calls for fire are executed during the conduct of 

the operation by the silence is consent method. This method 

allows subordinate leaders within the troop to request indirect 

fires in support of their maneuver within the framework of the 

commander’s guidance and the troop fire support plan. All 

initial requests for fires will go over the troop command net 

and the commander will simply acknowledge the request with 

“ROGER—OUT.” The troop FSO will process the call for fire 

through the appropriate indirect-fire system based on the 

commander’s guidance. All adjustments and corrections for 

the fires will be communicated on the troop fire direction net 

directly between the observer and the troop FSO. If the 

request for fire that is submitted by the subordinate leader is 

not within the commander’s fire support guidance, the troop 

commander will deny fires or modify his guidance based on 

the situation. 

Execution of the Fire Support Plan. During the operation, 

the FSO is responsible for— 

• Keeping the commander advised of all fire support 

matters. 

• Resolving any fire support conflicts that may arise 

during the planning and execution of the operation. 

• Attacking targets with the most suitable fire support 

means available to support the scheme of maneuver. 

Also, the commander may make the FSO responsible for 

positioning the troop mortars to best support the operation. 
8-6 

The FSO operates on the four radio nets mentioned 

previously. The scouts in the troop normally serve as the 

observers calling for indirect-fire support. The FIST monitors 

all spot reports on the troop command net and, as 

necessary, prepares calls for fire. The FSO will allocate fires 

from mortars and artillery, based on the commander's 

guidance. The commander may give the FSO additional 

guidance concerning a fire mission as it is requested (see 

Silence is Consent paragraph). Further information about the 

fire mission and all other calls for fire are passed on the troop 

fire support net. Keep the troop command net free for other 

traffic. 

Both the FIST and the mortars monitor the troop fire 

support net. When scouts forward adjustments or corrections 

for indirect-fires, they use the troop fire support net. If the 

FSO forwards the mission to supporting artillery, he sends 

the message "LIGHTNING UP" on the troop fire support net. 

This tells the scouts calling for fire and the mortars that the 

mission is being fired by supporting artillery and that all 

adjustments and the "end of mission" report must be relayed 

through the FSO. If the mortars will fire the mission, the FSO 

sends the message "THUNDER DOWN" on the troop fire 

support net. This tells the mortar squad to fire the mission, 

and tells the scouts to send all adjustments and the "end of 

mission" report to the mortar squad (see Figures 8-2 and 

8-3). 
8-7 

Figure 8-2. Fire request channels (artillery). 

2

3

4

5

6

1

MORT

FIST

3

5

6

2

1

4

SCOUTS SEND SPOT

REPORT TO PLATOON

LEADER (PLATOON NET).

PLATOON LEADER FORWARDS THE SPOT

REPORT TO THE CP

(TROOP COMMAND NET)

WITH REQUEST FOR FIRE.

FIST MONITORS SPOT

REPORT, RECEIVES PERMISSION TO FIRE THE MISSION, AND DETERMINES

WHAT ARTILLERY TO USE.

FIST SENDS MESSAGE

"LIGHTNING UP" ON

TROOP COMMAND NET.

SCOUTS AND MORTARS

MONITOR.

FIST SENDS DIGITAL

CALL FOR FIRE TO DS ARTILLERY. FIST SENDS SHOT

ON TROOP COMMAND NET.

SCOUTS RELAY ALL ADJUSTMENTS TO FIST ON

TROOP FSN.
8-8 

Figure 8-3. Fire request channels (mortar). 

2

3

4

5

1 SCOUTS SEND SPOT

REPORT TO PLATOON

LEADER (PLATOON NET).

PLATOON LEADER FORWARDS THE SPOT

REPORT TO THE CP

(TROOP COMMAND NET)

WITH REQUEST FOR FIRE.

FIST MONITORS SPOT

REPORT AND RECEIVES PERMISSION FROM THE

TROOP CDR TO SUPPORT

WITH INDIRECT FIRES.

FIST SENDS MESSAGE

"THUNDER DOWN" ON

TROOP COMMAND NET.

SCOUTS AND MORTARS

MONITOR. FIST SENDS

SHOT ON TROOP

COMMAND NET.

SCOUTS CALL THE MORTARS ON TROOP FSN TO

REQUEST INDIRECT FIRES.

MORT

FIST

3

5

2

1

4
8-9 

Section II. Mortar Support 

CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS 

The mortar section provides a heavy volume of accurate, 

sustained indirect fires in response to the needs of the troop. 

They are ideal weapons for attacking targets on reverse 

slopes, in narrow ravines, built-up areas and in other areas 

that are difficult to strike with low-angle fires. Mortars are 

most effective for— 

• Suppression. Suppression forces the enemy to button 

up or move to less advantageous positions. High 

explosive (HE) ammunition with a variable-time fuze or 

quick fuze does this best. 

• Screening. Obscuration smoke is placed directly on or 

just in front of enemy positions to obscure vision. 

Screening smoke is placed between troop positions 

and the enemy to conceal the troop's movements. 

Smoke will degrade the effectiveness of laser range 

finders, so the tank platoons must adjust their gunnery 

techniques when engaging the enemy. 

• Illumination. The use of illumination permits daytime 

engagements during some limited visibility conditions 

by improving the effectiveness of image intensification 

devices. Illumination rounds are used to mark targets 

for close air support and attack helicopters, and to 

allow observers to adjust artillery onto a target. 

Illumination rounds are usually adjusted so they 

illuminate above or behind the enemy location to 

silhouette him. 

The height of the illumination should be adjusted to burn 

out about 200 meters above the ground. This gives 

maximum illumination time, about 90 seconds for one round, 

and will not degrade the effectiveness of image 

intensification devices. Because illumination rounds light the 

battlefield for both sides, it should be used when night-vision 
8-10 

devices are not available in sufficient quantities or when 

ambient light levels are very low. 

EMPLOYMENT TECHNIQUES 

The troop mortar section is employed as a separate 

element during operations. It moves independently of the 

platoons, and provides its own security. The troop 

commander normally designates positions for the section 

sergeant and provides guidance for support forward of the 

scouts. The commander may find that having the FIST 

position the mortars is easiest and most effective. This 

technique allows the mortar section sergeant the ability to 

concentrate on providing fires and computing fire data and 

the commander to focus on maneuvering the troop, not one 

section. 

The mortars can operate on two nets. If the FIST is 

responsible for moving the section, both nets may be on the 

troop fire support net. The FSO will keep them updated on 

the situation. However, since many spot reports over the 

troop net become fire missions, the mortars can eavesdrop 

and provide more responsive fires if they stay abreast of the 

situation themselves. If the commander gives the mortar 

section sergeant authority to select positions and to move the 

section, he must operate on the troop command net to stay 

abreast of the situation and on the troop fire support net. 

Offense. During offensive operations the movement of the 

mortars will be based on the progress of the scout platoons. 

While the section is on the move, it must be prepared to 

provide immediate fires using direct lay, direct alignment, or 

hip shoot. Plan the moves of the section so it is in position to 

support the troop at critical times, such as during river 

crossings and counterattacks, and when clearing defiles. 
8-11 

Defense. Considerations for using mortars in the defense 

are similar to those for using them in the offense. Plan on 

prestocking ammunition at subsequent positions to reduce 

resupply problems during a defensive operation. 

Reconnaissance and Security. During reconnaissance and 

security missions, the troop will often be operating over a 

large frontage that cannot be completely covered by the 

section. The commander must decide whether to position the 

mortars to cover the most dangerous area, or to move them 

to a position where they can cover a part of different areas 

and adjust as necessary. Knowing what other artillery assets 

are available will help in making that decision. 

Commander's Guidance. A list of considerations the 

commander can use to help plan mortar section employment 

follows: 

• Ammunition constraints by type and quantity. 

• Priority of fire to a designated platoon. 

• Anticipated changes in mortar employment. 

• Communications constraints. 

• General designation of positions. 

• Movement guidance. 

• Coordination requirements. 

• Resupply. 
8-12 

Section III. Artillery Support 

ORGANIZATION AND SUPPORT RELATIONSHIP 

The howitzer battery organic to the regimental cavalry 

squadron consists of eight 155-mm self-propelled howitzers. 

The squadron will often be supported by an artillery battalion. 

The artillery battalion usually has three batteries of 155-mm 

self-propelled howitzers, and provides direct support to the 

squadron. 

CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS 

Field artillery provides the troop its main fire support. It 

gives accurate fires with a wide variety of munitions. Field 

artillery adds a powerful dimension to troop direct-fire and 

maneuver capabilities. 

• Artillery can— 

− Provide fire support under all weather conditions 

and terrain types. 

− Shift and mass fires rapidly without the requirement 

to displace. 

− Support the battle in depth with long-range fires. 

− Provide a variety of conventional shell/fuze 

combinations. 

− Provide continuous fire support by careful 

displacement. 

− Be as mobile as the supported unit. 
8-13 

• Artillery has— 

− Limited capability against moving targets. 

− Limited self-defense capability against air and 

ground attack. 

− Limited capability to destroy point targets without 

considerable ammunition expenditure. 

(Copperhead is the exception. It can be used to 

engage point targets.) 

− Vulnerability to detection by enemy target 

acquisition systems because of firing signatures. 

Field artillery has a wide variety of munitions tailored for 

the engagement of different types of targets. The ammunition 

types include— 

 AMMUNITION TARGET

 High explosive Personnel, field 

 fortifications, 

 vehicles 

 HC smoke Obscuration and 

 screening 

 White phosphorus Obscuration 

 Illumination 

 Cannon-launched Armored vehicles or 

 guided projectiles high-payoff targets 

 (Copperhead) requiring precision 

 target engagement 
8-14 

In addition, the troop must become acquainted with the 

characteristics of improved conventional munitions (ICM) and 

scatterable mines. ICMs include antipersonnel (APERS) and 

dual-purpose ICM. The commander must consider the 

danger to friendly troops in areas in which APERS is fired. 

Also, the high ICM dud rate makes maneuver hazardous in 

the area of an ICM field. Scatterable mines are area denial 

munitions for use against personnel and remote antiarmor 

mines for use against armored vehicles. 

EMPLOYMENT TECHNIQUES 

Artillery units normally provide direct support to the 

squadron, and are positioned by the artillery commander in 

close coordination with the squadron S3 and FSO. The troop 

FSO is the troop's link to the supporting artillery (see Section 

I, The Fire Support Team, and Chapters 1 and 2). 

Section IV. Engineer Support 

ORGANIZATION AND SUPPORT RELATIONSHIP 

A combat engineer company is organic to the heavy and 

light armored cavalry regiment. Additional engineer assets 

are often provided from divisional and corps engineer units to 

support the regiment. Up to a platoon of engineers is 

frequently attached to or placed in direct support of a cavalry 

troop for combat operations. A combat engineer platoon from 

the heavy regimental engineer company is organized for 

combat as shown in Figure 8-4. 

HEAVY ENGINEER CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS 

A combat engineer platoon is uniquely equipped and 

trained to conduct mobility, countermobility, and survivability 

operations in support of troop operations. The platoon 

headquarters has two M9 armored combat earthmovers, 

which are highly mobile, armored, and amphibious (see 

Figure 8-5). 
8-15 

Figure 8-4. Regimental engineer company (heavy) 

organization. 

Figure 8-5. Armored combat earthmover, M9. 

PLT HQ

1 OFFICER

7 ENLISTED

ENGR PLT

1 OFFICER

31 ENLISTED

ENGR SQD

8 ENLISTED

M113 - 1

HMMWV - 1

ACE - 2

5-TON TRUCK - 1 M113 - 1
8-16 

In mobility operations, the engineer platoon can provide— 

• Obstacle reduction. The engineers can reduce or 

negate the effects of obstacles to improve the troop's 

ability to maneuver. 

• Route construction. The engineers can construct, 

improve, and maintain roads, bridges, and fords. 

In a countermobility role, the engineers can assist with 

obstacle construction. The engineers can reinforce terrain by 

constructing obstacles to delay, canalize, disrupt, and 

destroy the enemy force to support the scheme of maneuver. 

In survivability operations, the engineers can improve 

positions by constructing berms, dug-in positions, and 

overhead protection to reduce the effectiveness of enemy 

weapons. 

A cavalry troop is frequently supported by additional 

engineer assets, such as an armored vehicle launched 

bridge (AVLB) and combat engineer vehicles (CEV) from the 

engineer company. The AVLB section of headquarters and 

headquarters troop of the armored cavalry squadron consists 

of three AVLBs that could be available during combat 

operations. 

An AVLB is a tank chassis modified to transport, launch, 

and retrieve a 60-foot class-60 bridge. The bridge is capable 

of carrying military load class-60 track vehicles across a 17-

meter gap and military load class-70 track loads across a 15-

meter gap (see Figure 8-6). 
8-17 

Figure 8-6. Armored vehicle launched bridge. 

The CEV is an M60A1 tank mounted with a hydraulically 

operated dozer blade, a 165-mm turret-mounted demolition 

gun, a retractable boom, and a winch (see Figure 8-7). 

Figure 8-7. Combat engineer vehicle. 
8-18 

The small emplacement excavator (SEE) is a small highly 

mobile truck with a front-end loader and a backhoe (see 

Figure 8-8). 

Figure 8-8. Small emplacement excavator. 

LIGHT ENGINEER CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS 

The engineer platoon from the light regimental engineer 

company is equipped with five HMMWVs. The platoon can 

accomplish most of the same tasks that a heavy platoon can, 

but the time to complete most jobs is greater. The platoon 

can provide the troop with the following: 

• In mobility operations. 

− Obstacle reduction. Engineers can reduce or 

negate the effects of obstacles to improve the 

troop's maneuver ability. To improve the platoon's 

ability, they may be reinforced with an M9 ACE, 

SEE, MICLIC, and Bangalor torpedo. The engineer 

company from the light regiment does not provide 

the regiment (troop) with any bridging capability. 

− Route reconnaissance. Engineers can conduct 

route reconnaissance. 
8-19 

• In a countermobility role, the engineers are usually left 

under squadron control to complete priorities of work 

in accordance with the squadron obstacle plan. The 

engineers can reinforce terrain by constructing 

obstacles to delay, canalize, disrupt, and destroy the 

enemy force to support the scheme of maneuver. 

• In survivability operations, the engineers can improve 

positions by constructing berms, dug-in positions, and 

overhead protection to reduce the effectiveness of 

enemy weapons (see Figure 8-9). 

Figure 8-9. Regimental engineer company (light) 

organization. 

REGT

ENGR A&O

HMMWV-1 HMMWV-2

SEE-6

ACE-6

5T TRK-3

VOLCANO-3

3/4 TRL-2

MICLIC-3

HEMTT-2

ARMORED CAVALRY REGIMENT

LIGHT

ENGINEER COMPANY

MED

HQ

HMMWV-2

RETRANS-1

5T TRK-1

WTR TRL-1

3/4T TRL-2

MAINT

HMMWV-1

HEMTT WRKR-1

HEMTT (POL)-2

5T TRK-2

3/4T TRL-1

HMMWV-5

3/4T TRL-3
8-20 

EMPLOYMENT TECHNIQUES 

The troop has several options in the task organization and 

employment of engineer assets to support its operation. 

Normally, the troop will keep the entire platoon under troop 

control and assign missions just as with a maneuver platoon. 

The commander can also task organize the engineer 

platoon, and assign squads to scout platoons to support the 

operation. Whatever method is chosen, the engineer platoon 

leader needs to be involved in the troop planning process. 

Section V. Ground Surveillance Radar Support

ORGANIZATION AND SUPPORT RELATIONSHIP 

A GSR team is organized for combat as shown in Figure 

8-10. The team(s) is normally attached or OPCON to a troop 

during combat operations. GSR is found only in heavy 

regiments and divisions. 

Figure 8-10. Ground surveillance radar team. 
8-21 

CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS 

GSRs provide mobile, all-weather battlefield surveillance. 

GSRs employed in pairs can provide observation from a 

given vantage point 24 hours a day, detecting targets and 

providing accurate range and azimuth readings. 

The AN/PPS-5 has a line-of-sight range of 10,000 meters 

against vehicles and 6,000 meters against personnel. A GSR 

can detect targets through light camouflage, smoke, haze, 

light snow and rain, darkness, and light foliage. Heavy rain 

and snow seriously restrict its radar detection capability. 

The GSR is generally ineffective against air targets unless 

the aircraft is flying close to the ground. The GSR is 

designed to detect targets moving in the presence of a 

background. It is vulnerable to enemy direction finding and 

jamming. 

EMPLOYMENT TECHNIQUES 

The troop will normally employ supporting GSR teams to 

augment the surveillance capabilities of its scout platoons. 

The commander should assign each GSR team a specific 

sector of surveillance and a frequency of coverage, or give 

the scout platoon leader guidance for employing the GSR 

team. The enemy can detect radar signals, so the GSR 

cannot conduct continuous surveillance. The tasks assigned 

GSR surveillance teams include— 

• Searching avenues of approach or possible enemy 

positions on a time-schedule basis or randomly to 

determine location, size, composition, and nature of 

enemy activity. 

• Monitoring point targets such as bridges, defiles, and 

road junctions and reporting quantity, type, and 

direction of enemy movement through the target. 
8-22 

• Extending the observation capabilities of scouts by 

enabling them to survey distant points and areas of 

special interest. 

• Vectoring patrols to keep them oriented during times 

of limited visibility. 

Position the GSRs in an area that is free of ground clutter 

and in one that affords them long-range observation and a 

wide field of view. Normally, they should be assigned a 

general area by the troop commander or scout platoon 

leader and the GSR team leader will select the specific 

location. The team should be prepared for rapid 

displacement, and have several alternate positions selected 

and reconnoitered to avoid enemy suppressive fires. 

Offensive Operations. Employ GSRs in the offense to 

augment reconnaissance and security efforts. Fast-moving 

operations may preclude the continuous, effective use of 

GSRs. 

In a movement to contact or a zone reconnaissance, 

employ GSRs on high-speed avenues of approach to the 

front or flanks of the troop to provide information on enemy 

movement. A GSR team can provide long-range observation 

while the scouts conduct a detailed reconnaissance of the 

local area. Employ GSR teams on the flanks of the troop's 

movement in pairs so they can bound forward. In this 

manner, the GSR can provide continuous early warning and 

keep pace with the operation. 

Defensive Operations. In defensive operations, employ 

GSR teams to augment scouts. Position them to provide 

long-range observation on expected avenues of approach or 

to maintain surveillance of flanks. 

Position the GSR teams behind the screen line if the 

terrain affords them long-range observation. Use GSR to 

assist scouts in maintaining contact with the enemy as the 

scouts deploy to subsequent screen lines. This also reduces 

their vulnerability to enemy fires. 
8-23 

Section VI. Air Defense 

SUPPORT RELATIONSHIP 

An air defense artillery (ADA) battery is organic to the 

regiment. For combat operations, these assets are normally 

attached or direct support to the squadron. The squadron 

commander may provide a slice of ADA to the troop. 

Air defense assets are scarce, so the troop cannot plan 

on dedicated air defense protection. It is the troop's 

responsibility to protect itself from enemy air attack. The 

commander must take measures to avoid enemy air attack, 

to limit the damage if attacked and, if necessary, to fight 

back. 

AIR DEFENSE EMPLOYMENT 

Include air defense planning in all tactical operations. Air 

defense includes passive and active air defense and the 

employment of ADA assets. 

Passive Air Defense 

Passive air defense measures are the troop's first line of 

defense against enemy air attack. They include all measures, 

other than active defense, taken to minimize the effects of 

hostile air action. There are two types of passive air 

defense—attack avoidance and damage limiting measures. 

Attack Avoidance. If the enemy pilot cannot find the troop, 

he cannot attack it. Use concealment, camouflage, 

obscuration, and deception to hide from the enemy. 

Select positions that provide good concealment. When 

adequate concealment is not available, camouflage the 

vehicles to blend with their surroundings. Cover all track 

marks leading into the troop's position. Cover all shiny 

objects that could reflect light and attract attention. Take all 
8-24 

actions necessary to reduce the enemy's ability to find the 

troop. 

Damage Limiting Measures. Damage limiting measures 

are taken to reduce the effects of enemy air attack. Disperse 

vehicles while occupying static positions such as assembly 

areas or when preparing to cross a water obstacle or a 

breached obstacle. Dispersion reduces the effects of 

munitions. While on the move, air guards must be alert for 

enemy air attacks. When an enemy air attack is identified, 

quickly disperse, go to a concealed position, if possible, and 

then stop moving. A stationary vehicle is more difficult to see 

than a moving vehicle, and dispersion will reduce the effect 

of the air attack. 

Use natural or man-made cover to reduce the effects of 

enemy air attack. Use folds in the earth, depressions, 

buildings, and sandbagged positions as damage limiting 

cover. These methods to reduce the effects of air attack 

must be used scrupulously by troop trains and command 

posts to reduce their vulnerability on the battlefield. 

Active Air Defense 

Although passive measures are the first line of defense 

against air attack, the troop must be prepared to fight back if 

necessary. The troop gains two things by fighting back. It 

may kill or drive off the attacker, and the morale and spirit of 

the troops improve by fighting back. 

The decision to fight an air threat is based on the situation 

and the capabilities of the troop's weapon systems. Generally 

the troop may defend itself against direct attack, but unless 

attacked, it does not engage aircraft unless directed to do so 

by the squadron commander. 
8-25 

Stinger/Avenger Employment 

Stingers/Avengers are used most effectively in point 

defense. However, mobility during tactical operations 

requires that Stinger crews move with the troop during 

maneuvering to provide the best possible air defense. 

The troop commander must determine the air defense 

priorities for each phase of the operation and brief the 

Stinger/Avenger section chief accordingly. In order for the 

section chief to design an effective troop air defense plan for 

the commander, the commander must furnish the section 

chief the mission, objective, routes of march, intended 

scheme of maneuver, battle formations, and intended 

response to hostile air activity. 

Unit air defense falls under two major categories: air 

defense of a fixed asset (assembly area or defensive 

position), and air defense of a mobile asset (convoy or 

maneuvering troop). 

Fixed Asset. The air defense section leader places his 

crews from 2 to 4 kilometers apart near the troop's position, 

which provides overlapping and mutually supporting fires for 

troop defense. He provides command and control to his 

section, and air defense early warning to the troop unit and 

his deployed crews. The commander must provide logistical 

support for the section, indirect protective fires for their 

defense, and security within the troop defensive perimeter 

during hours of darkness. 

Mobile Asset. While the unit moves, either in a tactical 

road march or during movement to contact, the air defense 

crews must move with each element to provide uninterrupted 

air defense protection. 

Convoy operations require the air defense section leader 

to weight his crews near the front and rear of the troop's 

column(s), and to spread the remainder of his crews evenly 

throughout the column(s). While traveling, he provides 

command and control to his crews and air defense early 

warning to the troop and his crews. 
8-26 

Section VII. Army Aviation Support 

SUPPORT RELATIONSHIP 

Army aviation units are seldom OPCON to the troop; 

however, the troop frequently conducts joint operations with 

air cavalry or attack helicopter units within the troop area of 

operations. Air and ground units work together to make an 

effective team in conducting cavalry operations. 

AVIATION TROOP COMMANDER 

Air operations are controlled and coordinated by one 

man, the aviation troop commander. He coordinates directly 

with the ground troop commander, on the command net, 

when air operations extend into the troop's area of 

operations. When time is available, coordinate face-to-face 

to prepare for an operation. Let him know— 

• Situation. 

− Enemy. Ground and ADA units by type and 

location. 

− Friendly. Locations and FLOT to include supporting 

artillery. 

• Mission. 

• Execution. 

− Scheme of maneuver. 

− Fire support. 

The aviation troop commander tells the ground troop 

commander— 

• His capabilities. 

− Number and type of aircraft. 

− Armament. 

− Time available. 
8-27 

• Execution. Scheme of maneuver to include approach 

direction into area. 

• Command and signal. 

− Aviation troop commander, frequency, and call 

sign. 

− Succession of command and designated platoon 

leader in the troop commander's absence. 

The aviation troop commander reports all spot reports 

and fire requests through the troop command post or FIST 

while operating in the ground troop's area of operations. 

Reconnaissance. The capabilities of air and ground scouts 

complement each other. Air scouts can quickly reconnoiter a 

large area while ground scouts are conducting a detailed 

terrain reconnaissance. Employ the air scouts forward to 

provide information about areas where the ground scouts 

need to concentrate their efforts, such as at possible fording 

sites or route restrictions. The ground scouts can focus their 

efforts where the air scouts have directed them, instead of 

conducting a complete and time-consuming reconnaissance. 

The air scouts can also provide early warning of enemy 

movement to the front or flanks of the troop. 

Security. During screen missions, employ the air assets 

to the front or flanks of the troop to observe areas between 

OPs and those areas that are difficult to observe from the 

ground. The air scouts can place effective indirect fires on 

the enemy and in maintaining contact with the enemy when 

the ground scouts move to subsequent screen lines. In 

offensive and defensive operations, Army aviation will 

normally work for the squadron to complement the squadron 

scheme of maneuver. 
8-28 

Section VIII. Close Air Support 

CAS sorties are usually allocated to the regiment by the 

corps commander to meet preplanned requests submitted by 

the regimental fire support element. CAS for the troop is 

obtained by submitting an immediate CAS request. 

CAS is requested by submitting an immediate request to 

the squadron air liaison officer. When CAS is on station, the 

tactical air control party may talk directly to the troop 

commander to determine enemy strengths, descriptions, and 

locations, as well as friendly unit locations. A forward air 

controller (FAC) normally directs the air strike. In the 

absence of a FAC, the troop FSO is trained to direct air 

strikes. 

The ground troop may be required to mark the target for 

CAS aircraft. Use the mortar section for this. Fire white 

phosphorus or illumination rounds set for a ground burst. The 

FIST can designate targets for aircraft equipped with laserspot trackers, such as Pave Penny or laser-guided bombs. 

CAS capabilities are listed below. 

• High speed and long range. 

• Versatile weapon and ammunition mix. 

• Accurate delivery. 

• Excellent air-ground communications in A-10 and 

A-16 aircraft. 

• Can locate and strike moving targets. 

CAS limitations include— 

• Limited resources. 

• Delivery restrictions caused by limited visibility and 

weather or the proximity of friendly forces. 

• Flight restrictions imposed by enemy air defense. 

• Delayed response and short time on station. 
Chapter 9

Combat Service Support

CONTENTS

Section I. Organization

Section II. Logistics

Section III. Personnel Service Support

Section IV. Prisoners of War

Mission accomplishment depends on the troop's ability to obtain, transport, and distribute fighting

resources such as fuel, ammunition, replacement personnel, and rations. Dependable ways to treat and

evacuate wounded soldiers are crucial to good morale. Evacuation and repair of combat equipment

sustain troop combat power and readiness to fight.

Section I. Organization

Troop trains are organized as combat trains and field trains. The combat trains are made up of immediate

battlefield service support. The rest of the troop CSS elements are collocated with squadron CSS assets

in the squadron field trains and at the unit maintenance collection point (UMCP). The troop CSS team

consists of the troop XO, first sergeant, supply sergeant, communications sergeant, maintenance

sergeant, and senior troop aidman.

There is no dedicated service support radio net at troop level. All logistical reports and initial requests for

logistical support are conducted on the troop command net. Additional coordination is conducted on the

platoon radio nets. Routine reports are sent before and after combat operations, and are delivered by

messenger when possible. All service support coordination with squadron is conducted on the squadron

administration and logistics (A/L) net. The first sergeant operates on this net. The command post does

not routinely operate on the A/L net, but uses it when necessary to forward reports and to conduct

logistical coordination.

COMBAT TRAINS

The troop combat trains provide CSS for the troop during combat operations. They are organized for

combat as shown in Figures 9-1 and 9-2.

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-1
Figure 9-1. Heavy troop combat trains.

Figure 9-2. Light troop combat trains.

The first sergeant, assisted by the maintenance sergeant, directs movement and employment of the

combat trains. He receives logistical reports directly from the platoon sergeants or through the troop

command post, coordinates logistical matters with the XO, and assists the XO in ensuring the troop is

logistically ready for battle. During operations, the first sergeant directs aidman teams and recovery

teams forward as needed, leads the troop LOGPAC forward from the logistics release point (LRP) to

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-2
resupply the troop and then leads it back to the LRP, and organizes the LOGPAC to conduct troop

resupply operations. He also directs the medical evacuation of soldiers who are wounded in action.

Additionally, he directs the evacuation of soldiers killed in action, enemy prisoners of war, and disabled

vehicles.

The troop combat trains can be consolidated and moved under the control of the first sergeant, or they

can be split and moved. If the combat trains are split, the motor sergeant and first sergeant will divide the

medics, mechanics, special tools, and high-use PLL items into equal portions and move parallel and

behind troop combat elements to provide responsive medical evacuation and battle damage assessment

across the troop zone. Recovery assets will continue to move center of zone to facilitate recovery. This

technique may be used if the troop zone is wide and split operations are necessary to provide proper

support.

Position the combat trains where they can support the troop, but will not be exposed to enemy direct

fires. This location is usually from 2 to 5 kilometers to the rear.

Offensive and Reconnaissance Operations.During such operations as a movement to contact or a zone

reconnaissance, position the trains in the center of the troop zone and about 2 kilometers, or one terrain

feature, behind the tank platoons. Use the established road network, if possible, to move the trains.

Bound the trains forward to successive concealed positions, based on the movement of the troop, to keep

them in position to support the troop.

Defensive and Security Operations.During defensive and security operations, position the combat trains

about 3 kilometers behind the tank platoon positions in the center of the troop sector. If possible, hide the

trains in a small built-up area, which provides cover and concealment and a road network to facilitate the

movement of the trains. The trains must be ready to move to support the troop or displace to a new

location. The XO and first sergeant plan subsequent locations, and as the situation requires, the first

sergeant or maintenance sergeant moves the trains to the next location.

Security.Trains must provide their own local security. They do not have the manpower or equipment to

clear large areas, so they should move into areas that have already been cleared by scouts. The trains' best

defense is to avoid detection. The trains should disperse their vehicles and camouflage the positions by

using natural concealment like a wooded area or a small built-up area. A built-up area is best, because

there are a limited number of approaches and the thermal signature of the trains is concealed. Enforce

strict noise and light discipline. Hide vehicles in barns or garages, if available. The buildings in a built-up

area and the trees in a wooded area provide some protection against the effects of indirect fires and

air-delivered munitions. Dispersion also limits the damaging effects of these weapons.

Establish OPs around the trains to provide early warning of enemy movement toward the position. Put

them where they can cover major avenues of approach. An OP has at least two soldiers, a crew-served

weapon (if available), a map, binoculars, a night observation device, and a radio or field phone. The OP

must immediately report, by radio or phone, enemy ground and air attacks so the trains can take

appropriate actions.

Passive defense is the trains' best defense against air attack. The steps taken to locate them properly,

disperse vehicles, camouflage positions, and use the cover and concealment of built-up or wooded areas

help prevent the enemy from detecting and attacking, and limit the effects of enemy munitions if

attacked.

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-3
Air attacks cannot always be avoided. If attacked, take active air defense measures. The first sergeant or

senior soldier present must coordinate the small arms fires of the trains for them to be effective against an

air threat. Refer to Chapter 8, Section VI, Air Defense, for a complete discussion of passive and active air

defense.

FIELD TRAINS

Troop CSS assets not in the combat trains are collocated with the squadron field trains or the UMCP, and

sustain the troop's fighting capability by moving rations, ammunition, fuel, repair parts, and replacements

from the squadron rear area to the troop on the battlefield. Troop field trains are controlled primarily by

the supply sergeant, and consist of the personnel and equipment shown in Figures 9-3 and 9-4. Troop

maintenance assets in the field trains may be consolidated under the control of the squadron maintenance

officer.

The troop supply sergeant is the troop representative in the squadron field trains. The supply sergeant is

responsible for the following tasks:

● Maintaining records of troop clothing and equipment.

Processing or forwarding requests for all Class I, II, III, IV, V, VI, and VII. He also assists the

maintenance section in ordering Class IX repair parts and the medics in resupplying Class VIII

(medical).

● 

Assembling and leading all vehicles in the troop LOGPAC from the field trains to the LRP. If the

squadron is conducting resupply operations, the supply sergeant may move under the control and

direction of one of the following squadron personnel: squadron support platoon leader or platoon

sergeant, S4, HHT commander, or XO.

● 

Assisting the first sergeant in organizing the LOGPAC site for troop resupply and in evacuating

soldiers who are killed in action, enemy prisoners of war, and disabled vehicles; and in medically

evacuating wounded and injured soldiers.

● 

● Delivering mail, when available, via the troop LOGPAC.

Figure 9-3. Heavy troop field trains.

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-4
Figure 9-4. Light troop field trains.

At the squadron field trains, the supply sergeant coordinates with the S4 and support platoon leader to

ensure the LOGPAC meets the troop's CSS requirements.

The supply sergeant will coordinate with the troop PLL clerk for parts and requisitions and with the

squadron personnel and administration center (PAC) section for mail, promotions, awards,

Standardization Installation/Division Personnel System (SIDPERS), and other personnel actions. He will

coordinate with squadron maintenance and communication for repaired vehicles and equipment and with

the squadron food service sergeant for rations. The supply sergeant must frequently check with the HHT

command post in the field trains for any additional troop requests reported on the A/L net.

The squadron field trains are responsible for their own local security. The supply sergeant will be tasked

to assist the HHT commander in maintaining security of the field trains. He must execute and supervise

security operations in accordance with the HHT commander's plan. During the movement through

nonsecure areas, the supply sergeant should ensure that all crew-served and individual weapons are

manned and ready. He should also ensure that all members of the troop field trains are briefed on

immediate action drills for enemy contact or vehicle breakdowns.

If available, the troop should provide the supply sergeant with a radio to enhance communications

between the supply sergeant and the first sergeant.

SQUADRON COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT

In addition to organic troop CSS, one or two medical/evacuation teams are attached to the troop for

combat operations from the squadron medical platoon. During resupply operations, the troop normally

receives two fuel and two ammunition carriers from the transportation section of the support platoon.

These carriers are not usually attached, but are provided to the troop as needed or as part of a

standardized LOGPAC. The LOGPAC is discussed in Section II, Logistics.

To ensure responsive CSS for the squadron, the S4 and squadron maintenance officer organize the

squadron support into echeloned trains and establish a main supply route (MSR), a UMCP, and an LRP.

These trains are made up of combat trains (which provide immediate recovery, maintenance, medical,

and emergency resupply support), and field trains (which provide the remainder of the squadron service

support and limited direct-support maintenance). The UMCP is established to provide maintenance

support for combat operations. It is positioned near or collocated with the squadron combat trains, and is

the closest point to which damaged or failed equipment and systems are recovered. The UMCP is the

focal point of the squadron maintenance effort. The MSR links troop combat trains to the squadron

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-5
combat trains or UMCP and the field trains. LRPs are established along the MSR to facilitate the

handover of LOGPACs and equipment between troops and squadron. An example of a squadron support

plan is shown in Figure 9-5.

Section II. Logistics

SUPPLY OPERATIONS

The supply sergeant is responsible for getting supplies and delivering them to the troop. He delivers

small items, but is largely dependent on support platoon assets to deliver bulky or high expenditure

items. The commander establishes priorities for delivery, but the demands of combat normally dictate

Classes I, III, V, VIII, and IX as most critical.

Figure 9-5. Squadron combat service support plan.

Class I (Rations).Meals ready to eat (MRE), C rations, are stocked on board each troop vehicle in a basic

load prescribed by SOP (three-day supply). Class I is delivered daily by the supply sergeant as part of the

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-6
LOGPAC from the squadron field trains. Hot meals (B or tray-pack rations) are served when possible,

but the normal ration cycle is C-C-C during combat operations. This requires resupply of at least 34 cases

of MRE per day per troop. Water is a critical item, and must be resupplied daily. Soldiers may require up

to 5 gallons of water per soldier per day, or more than 600 gallons for the entire troop. The troop can

transport only 400 gallons of water on the water trailer. Soldiers should top off their water cans when

possible. The supply sergeant should carry 5-gallon cans of water on his truck to supplement the needs of

the troop. When he resupplies the troop, he exchanges the full cans for empty ones.

Class II (Supplies and Equipment).Class II items are requisitioned through the S4 and delivered by the

supply sergeant as needed. The supply sergeant also maintains the following supplies, as a minimum, in

his troop supply:

● One set of NBC overgarments and filter per soldier.

● One case of BA-30s.

● One mile of WD-1 wire.

● Additional batteries as necessary for night-vision devices and other equipment.

● Five sets of TA-50, to include personal clothing of various sizes, stored in duffel bags.

● Fifteen body bags.

● Map cases, grease pencils, permanent markers, etc.

Class III (POL).Class III is delivered by support platoon assets both as part of the troop LOGPAC and on

an as-needed basis. Platoon sergeants report their Class III status to the command post daily, when status

is requested, or when any Class III item is below a certain percentage, usually 59 percent.

Each troop vehicle carries a small basic load of packaged products as prescribed by SOP, and the fuel

carriers normally have only small amounts of packaged products on board. Requests for large quantities

of packaged products must be requested through the S4.

Class IV (Construction Materials). Class IV supplies are requested through the CTCP (combat trains

command post) and delivered by the supply sergeant with the LOGPAC. Class IV supplies needed at

troop level may include concertina wire, sandbags, and lumber.

Class V (Ammunition).The troop deploys with a basic load of Class V as prescribed by the unit for each

type of vehicle. Ammunition status is reported by platoon sergeants to the command post daily, upon

completion of enemy contact, or as needed. Normal resupply of Class V is delivered by the support

platoon vehicles with the LOGPAC. Emergency resupply is requested through the first sergeant to the

S4, and is delivered from the combat trains if it is available. Emergency resupply of Class V will

normally consist of ammunition for major weapon systems, such as tank main guns, TOW missiles, and

25-mm guns in the heavy troop; and TOW missiles and caliber .50, 40-mm grenades, 7.62-mm, and

individual weapons ammunition in the light troop.

Class VI (Personal Demand Items).Class VI items (such as soap, toothpaste, and cigarettes) are requested

through the S4 by the first sergeant. They are usually picked up by the supply sergeant in the field trains

and delivered as part of the LOGPAC.

Class VII (Major End Items).Class VII items, such as vehicles and night-vision devices, are

automatically requested based on equipment shortages and battle losses. Items are delivered to the S4,

who notifies the troop of the availability of the equipment. The equipment is delivered with a LOGPAC

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-7
or brought forward immediately to an LRP where the first sergeant meets it and delivers it to the troop.

Class VIII (Medical Supplies).Class VIII is provided by the squadron medical platoon. The troop senior

medic requests supplies through the squadron aid station. During intense combat, supplies may be pushed

forward. They are then delivered to the combat trains where the troop medic picks them up from the

squadron aid station, or are brought forward on ambulances.

Class IX (Repair Parts).The troop PLL clerk, who is in the field trains or the UMCP, works under the

control of the squadron maintenance officer and the squadron maintenance technician. The PLL clerk

requisitions, receives, and maintains records for all Class IX items. All troop PLLs are consolidated

under the squadron maintenance officer during combat operations, and one or more PLL trucks remain in

the UMCP at all times to provide a supply of Class IX for forward area support. When the troop

maintenance sergeant needs a repair part, the request is sent through the squadron maintenance officer.

The squadron maintenance officer determines if the part is available through the PLL, and fills the

request if possible. If the part is not in the PLL, he then requests it through the squadron maintenance

team in the field trains. They have the troop PLL clerk requisition the part for immediate use or replenish

the part used from the PLL. The troop PLL clerk submits the requisition through squadron maintenance

to the supporting maintenance unit. The part is delivered through squadron maintenance to the troop

when the requisition is filled. The PLL clerk updates the records to reflect the requisition.

Maps.Maps are requested through the troop command post to the S4. As maps are available, the supply

sergeant picks them up in the field trains and delivers them to the troop as part of a LOGPAC.

RESUPPLY OPERATIONS

Resupply of combat resources is accomplished using standardized procedures to rearm, refuel, and refit

the troop as fast as possible to sustain its combat potential. There are two types of resupply

operations—routine and supplementary. Methods of resupply are tailgate issue and service station.

Routine Resupply

Routine resupply operations include daily resupply of Classes I, III, V, and IX, and mail and other items

needed by the troop. Routine resupply takes place when the troop is not in heavy contact, and may be

conducted in an assembly area or behind troop positions when the troop is deployed in sector or zone.

Class III is required more than once a day when the vehicles are in continuous operation.

Routine resupply is conducted using the LOGPAC from the field trains and the troop combat trains. The

LOGPAC is organized in the field trains. Its composition is based on the troop's needs as reported to the

S4, on requisitions, and on the availability of supplies. The troop supply sergeant reports to the S1 and S4

sections, squadron mess section, and squadron maintenance section to ensure all available supplies are

picked up and loaded on trucks for troop resupply. The S4, support platoon leader, and troop supply

sergeants assemble the LOGPACs for each troop by adding the troop supply trucks to the troop slice of

Class III and V trucks from the support platoon. The support platoon leader leads the LOGPACs to the

LRP, where the first sergeants meet them. Each first sergeant leads his LOGPAC to the troop resupply

site. When it arrives, members of the troop combat trains guide the LOGPAC vehicles into position.

Once the LOGPAC is established, the first sergeant reports to the command post that he is set. The troop

commander or the XO coordinates resupply operations, and ensures all platoons and sections are

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-8
resupplied. Resupply is conducted by one of two methods—tailgate issue or service station.

Tailgate Issue Method.The tailgate method is used in static positions such as assembly areas. Class III

and V supply vehicles and other bulk-issue vehicles move from vehicle to vehicle to conduct resupply.

The rest of the service support vehicles are centrally located in the troop area. Little or no movement is

required by the combat vehicles. Personnel move to a centralized location to receive supplies, Class I,

and mail. This method provides 360-degree security throughout the resupply operation; however, it is

very time-consuming and requires an adequate road network for the wheeled supply vehicles to reach

each vehicle. An example of this method is shown in Figure 9-6.

Figure 9-6. Tailgate issue method in a troop assembly area.

The following takes place during tailgate resupply:

Combat vehicles remain in place. POL and ammunition trucks travel in a clockwise direction

around the assembly area to each vehicle position, in turn, to conduct resupply.

● 

● Crewmen rotate through the feeding area and pick up supplies, water, and mail.

The first sergeant and platoon sergeants arrange for pickup of those killed in action (KIA) and their

personal effects. The KIA are brought to a holding area near the medical aid station, but kept out

of view.

● 

● Ambulances pick up, treat, and evacuate seriously wounded soldiers. Other wounded soldiers are

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-9
carried to the ambulance or walk to it for emergency medical treatment.

Prisoners are kept together and guarded. As soon as possible, they are moved to the squadron

trains on a returning supply vehicle.

● 

The troop armorer, the radio repairman, and the organizational mechanics repair known problems

and spot-check other vehicles.

● 

● Vehicles needing maintenance are brought to the maintenance area.

● The first sergeant and platoon sergeants closely monitor the resupply operation.

Empty LOGPAC vehicles are moved to a holding area, where they are loaded with KIA, prisoners

of war (PW) and inoperative equipment.

● 

The supply sergeant moves the LOGPAC back to an LRP to link up with the support platoon

leader and return to the field trains.

● 

Service Station Method.Service station resupply is used during tactical operations. It is most effective

when the troop is positioned in a zone or sector no more than 3 to 5 kilometers wide, such as is found in a

defend in sector or defend from a troop BP mission. Platoons or sections are resupplied at the LOGPAC

while the rest of the troop stays in position. The first sergeant sites the LOGPAC as shown in Figure 9-7.

LOGPAC security is provided by soldiers from the combat trains who are not involved in the resupply,

and by platoon vehicles that have completed or are awaiting resupply.

Figure 9-7. Service station method.

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-10
The following takes place during service station resupply:

Vehicles of the first platoon or section enter the LOGPAC at a designated location and follow

one-way traffic flow.

● 

The vehicle carrying the KIA in body bags moves to the holding area, out of view of the troop, and

leaves the remains and personal effects.

● 

● Soldiers requiring medical attention are delivered to medics and treated or prepared for evacuation.

The platoon sergeant supervises the operation and coordinates face-to-face with the first sergeant

for any special requirements.

● 

The platoon leader dismounts his vehicle and uses the first sergeant's vehicle and radio to contact

the troop commander for orders and situation reports.

● 

● Crews requiring unit-level maintenance remain in the maintenance holding area.

● Vehicles rotate through stations.

Unit-level mechanics, the armorer, and the radio repairman repair known problems and spot-check

other vehicles.

● 

● Crews rotate to the supply truck to pick up mail, supplies, and Class I.

● The platoon leader and platoon sergeant conduct precombat inspection.

● When the platoon or section has completed resupply, it moves to its designated position.

● The rest of the platoons rotate individually through the LOGPAC for resupply.

At the end of the resupply operation, the troop LOGPAC returns to the LRP where it links up with the

support platoon leader and returns to the field trains. In the field trains, the supply sergeant returns the

fuel and ammunition carriers to the support platoon, returns ration-serving equipment to the mess team,

delivers the KIA to the graves registration (GRREG) collection point, requests any additional supplies

from the squadron supply sergeant, and returns to his position in the field trains.

Supplementary Resupply

In the heavy troop, daily routine resupply will not sustain the combat power of the M1/M3 fleet when

operating without a break for 8 to 10 hours. The tanks will consume so much fuel that they will have to

supplement routine resupply of Class III one or two times daily. The troop may also need to resupply

Class V. Supplementary resupply can be conducted in a couple of ways depending on the mission and if

the troop is in contact with the enemy. Regardless of the technique used, the commander must push the

supplies forward to his platoons; the tempo of combat operations cannot be disrupted in order to

resupply. Conduct emergency resupply when in heavy contact with the enemy, and prestock resupply

when not. Once the supplies are brought forward, either the tailgate issue or service station methods are

used.

Supplementary resupply must be planned when continuous operations are expected. Resupply must be

requested through the S4 several hours in advance to ensure the service support assets are prepared to

support the operation. The troop must quickly resupply once fuel trucks are available, and then return

them to the field trains. There are few fuel carriers and drivers available in the squadron and these

valuable assets cannot be wasted.

Platoon Prestock.When operating over wide frontages, such as during screen, zone reconnaissance, or

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-11
movement to contact operations, break the supplies down into platoon packages and push the supplies

forward to each platoon position. Position the vehicles behind the platoon and resupply individual

vehicles or sections at a time using the service station method. If the situation allows, the resupply

vehicles can move through the platoon position and resupply the platoon in place using the tailgate issue

method.

Controlling platoon prestock is difficult because resupply vehicles are moving to several locations rather

than remaining under the centralized control of the first sergeant. The platoon leader must also provide

security for their own prestock (see Figure 9-8).

Figure 9-8. Platoon prestock.

Troop Prestock.Troop prestock is used to supplement routine resupply of Classes III and V. Troop

prestock is used when the troop is operating in a narrow zone or sector. The resupplies are pushed

forward to the troop position using either the service station or tailgate method. Each platoon rotates

through the resupply site, using the service station method, while the rest of the troop remains in

position; or each vehicle is resupplied in position using the tailgate method (see Figure 9-9).

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-12
Figure 9-9. Troop prestock.

Variations of these methods can be used to meet the troop's situation. The troop must, however, rehearse

these techniques to ensure it can quickly and efficiently conduct resupply operations and continue the

mission.

Emergency Resupply

Emergency resupply normally involves only fuel and ammunition and is conducted while in contact with

the enemy. The resupply begins at section and platoon level by redistributing ammunition between

vehicles to cross-level loads. The platoon sergeant reports his need for emergency resupply to the first

sergeant, who relays the request to the S4. The squadron combat trains maintain a small load of Class III

and V for these situations. The S4 or support platoon leader coordinates a linkup between the squadron

combat trains and the troop first sergeant. The first sergeant meets the resupply trucks and moves back to

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-13
the troop area. The first sergeant and troop XO choose a resupply point that is just behind the troop

position and masked by terrain from enemy direct fire and observation. If fuel is needed, the fuel truck is

moved to the resupply point and vehicles or sections go there to refuel.

Resupply Site Selection.The LOGPAC site must be carefully chosen to provide responsive support for

the troop, to support the movement of wheeled resupply vehicles, and to limit exposure to enemy fires.

The XO selects the general area to be used by the LOGPAC. He knows about the current tactical

situation, and can determine what the troop will be doing in the next couple of hours. The first sergeant

selects the exact LOGPAC site based on information from the XO and map and ground reconnaissance.

He selects a site that provides—

● Cover and concealment.

Proximity to the platoon positions, from 3 to 8 kilometers behind the FLOT and center of the

sector.

● 

A road or trail network that supports the wheeled resupply vehicles and the heaviest troop vehicles

and allows one-way traffic flow to the LOGPAC.

● 

● Enough room to disperse the vehicles.

● Reduction of thermal signature.

● Level enough to allow refueling.

MAINTENANCE AND RECOVERY OPERATIONS

The first sergeant supervises the troop maintenance section in the troop combat trains and the

maintenance sergeant runs the section. The maintenance sergeant operates on the troop command net and

stands by to provide responsive unit-level maintenance and recovery support for combat vehicles and

radio equipment. When needed, squadron maintenance augments troop assets. The troop armorer is

responsible for unit-level maintenance and repair of the troop's small arms weapons. Position him in the

combat trains where he can provide battlefield support.

Maintenance Operations.Maintenance responsibilities begin at crew level. Operator-level PMCS must be

performed before, during, and after operations. During operations, the crew begins the maintenance

process when it identifies the fault. Once a problem develops, the vehicle commander determines support

requirements, to include self-recovery, assistance from another vehicle, or assistance from troop or

squadron maintenance, and takes the following actions:

● Reports the situation to the platoon sergeant, providing condition(s), location, and circumstances.

● Attempts to self-recover, if mired.

Uses another vehicle to move to a secure location if exposed to enemy observation and fire. Uses

smoke to screen the area between the mired vehicle and the enemy.

● 

When repairs are beyond the capability of the crew, the platoon sergeant uses the troop command net to

notify the first sergeant of the situation and to request assistance. The crew must maintain radio contact

(if the radio is operational) on the platoon net and maintain local security. The maintenance sergeant

monitors the radio traffic. He switches his radio to the platoon frequency to coordinate maintenance

support and dispatches the appropriate assets to the "down" vehicle. The maintenance team checks

whether the problem can be corrected in place within the time criteria (30 minutes in defensive situations

and 2 hours in offensive situations). They move the vehicle to a more secure location, if necessary, and

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-14
fix the vehicle. If repairs will take too long, the maintenance sergeant uses the squadron A/L net to notify

the squadron maintenance officer who will coordinate for a handover of the equipment from troop to

squadron at the LRP or along the MSR. The squadron maintenance officer needs the following

information:

● Identification of the troop.

● Equipment involved.

● Location of equipment.

● Nature of damage.

● Pertinent information about the tactical situation, and any other necessary information.

Based on the information above, the squadron maintenance officer will designate a time and place for

equipment handover.

The troop does not have the personnel, equipment, or time to create a holding area in the troop combat

trains. If repairs will take more than the allowable time, evacuate the equipment to squadron.

Recovery Operations.When a vehicle cannot be repaired within the allowable time or is damaged beyond

repair, the maintenance section must recover it and pull it to the MSR where it is turned over to

squadron. Squadron maintenance will pull it to the UMCP or the field trains.

If a vehicle is catastrophic, or not able to be recovered based on the enemy situation, the commander may

authorize the destruction of the vehicle. Before using thermite grenades to destroy a vehicle, remove as

many valuable items as time permits, such as—

● Classified equipment and documents.

● Communications equipment.

● Weapons.

● Ammunition.

FIELD SERVICES

GRREG is performed by the field services platoon from corps, located in the regimental support area.

The initial collection, identification, safeguarding of personal effects, and evacuation of the dead is the

troop's responsibility.

When remains are discovered, be careful to preserve all items that may be used for identification. If

metal identification tags (dog tags) are on the remains, do not remove them. Secure all personal effects in

a bag or poncho and tie it to the remains. Place each casualty in a body bag, poncho, or shelter half and

evacuate with the first available means of transportation, such as LOGPAC vehicles or disabled vehicles,

to the squadron field trains. The supply sergeant receives all remains, and is responsible for turning them

over to the GRREG collection point.

If the tactical and logistical situation makes evacuation impossible, emergency on-site burial is

performed. On-site burial requires the permission of the squadron commander. If an on-site burial is

performed, do the following:

Complete two copies of DD Forms 551 and 1077 for each body. These forms are available through

the squadron PAC. The first sergeant and supply sergeant should carry them.

● 

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-15
● If there are several remains, engineer support may be needed to dig trenches.

Dig a trench 6-1/2 feet wide and 3-1/2 feet deep. The length is determined by the number of

remains.

● 

Remove one identification tag from each body, and string the tags on a wire in the order in which

the remains are buried.

● 

● Place the remains in the grave shoulder to shoulder.

● Bury all personal effects with the remains.

Mark the ends of each row with a stake. Tag each stake to identify the marker as a grave. Indicate

the length of the grave.

● 

● Prepare an overlay that shows the location of the grave site.

● Cover the grave with earth removed from the trench.

● Forward the completed forms, overlay, and identification tags to squadron.

If the remains are contaminated, the grave site must be clearly marked and separated from

noncontaminated grave sites. This must also be indicated on the grave-site overlay.

BATH AND LAUNDRY SERVICES

Bath and laundry services are provided by supply and service units from the corps support command.

When available, these services are coordinated through the S4.

Section III. Personnel Service Support

PERSONNEL AND ADMINISTRATIVE

All troop administrative and personnel actions are handled by the squadron PAC in the field trains. The

troop chain of command is responsible for ensuring that soldiers receive passes, leaves, promotions,

awards, mail, legal assistance, financial services, and other personnel and welfare services on a fair and

prompt basis. The first sergeant interfaces with PAC daily through the supply sergeant, at the

administrative/logistics operations center with the S1/S4, or at the LRP.

Casualties and missing personnel are reported on DA Forms 1155 and 1156. These forms are initiated by

the individual who witnessed the incident and are forwarded to the first sergeant. This action is the basis

for notification of the next of kin and awarding benefits such as Serviceman's Group Life Insurance

(SGLI), so accuracy is a must.

The commander should continuously manage the troop personnel situation to ensure trained personnel

are manning key positions, crew shortages are filled with available personnel, and replacement personnel

are trained and incorporated into crews. During combat, platoon leaders and platoon sergeants must

balance their crews after casualties are evacuated. They must fill key positions on vehicles with the most

qualified soldier. If necessary the commander may direct cross-leveling of personnel within the troop.

The troop submits daily personnel reports to the squadron as prescribed by SOP. The personnel reports

are important because they allow the squadron commander to make tactical decisions for the employment

of the troop. The reports also allow the S1, with the squadron commander's guidance, to properly

distribute personnel replacements. Replacement personnel are received by the supply sergeant in the field

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-16
trains. The supply sergeant in-processes the soldier into the troop, ensures he has the proper equipment,

then delivers him to the first sergeant during the troop LOGPAC.

combat health support

First Aid.First aid is the responsibility of all soldiers; they use first aid, self-aid, buddy-aid, and combat

lifesavers. All must be trained to take action after a soldier is wounded to keep him breathing, stop the

bleeding, prevent shock, and dress the wound until medical personnel are available to treat the soldier.

Training must include treatment of NBC casualties and crew evacuation drills to get soldiers out of a

vehicle without creating further injury. Selected soldiers from each platoon will be trained in advanced

medical skills in the combat lifesaver program.

Treatment.The first sergeant should position troop medical aid and evacuation teams on the battlefield

where they can be most responsive. They will usually operate under the control and direction of the first

sergeant in the troop combat trains. If the troop zone is pushing 10 kilometers wide, the troop may

operate split combat trains with the first sergeant controlling medical evacuation on one side of the zone

and the motor sergeant controlling the other half. The medics must know the locations of and routes to

each platoon, the troop combat trains, the squadron combat trains, and each collection point.

Combat Stress Control.The psychological effects of combat on soldiers influence their ability to execute

their missions. Individual self-control and self-discipline in the face of danger are maintained through

unit discipline and firm leadership. The commander and his subordinate leaders are key to the mental

toughness of soldiers. Commanders should be visible to soldiers and share their hardships with them.

They should talk to their soldiers individually and as a troop to keep them informed. The commander's

tone of voice on the radio must indicate that he has the situation under control. He should transmit the

successful accomplishments of the troop and tell the soldiers they are doing a good job. Keep details

about any casualties in the troop off the radio and ensure that soldiers who are killed in action are

covered up and kept out of view of the troop. The chaplain can be a great asset in maintaining troop

morale. Do not neglect the mental fitness of soldiers, because uncontrolled fear is contagious and can

quickly lead to chaos.

Evacuation.To receive medical assistance, a platoon leader or platoon sergeant calls the first sergeant on

the troop command net. The medic team monitors the call and goes to the platoon frequency to make any

other necessary coordination. The medic team moves to the reported location to treat the soldier(s). The

medics transport as many wounded soldiers as possible in their armored ambulance. Do not transport the

dead with the wounded; evacuate them separately. If the medics determine the soldiers are seriously

wounded, they either transport them directly to the squadron combat trains, or coordinate to hand them

over to squadron at a collection point. Soldiers with slight wounds should not be evacuated unless it is

necessary. They should be treated and returned to duty. Secure the seriously wounded soldiers on their

litters to prevent any further injury during the evacuation.

As a general rule, do not use combat vehicles to evacuate the wounded; this reduces combat strength.

Use combat vehicles only if absolutely necessary, and no other transportation is available.

Weapons and military equipment (except NBC protective equipment) of personnel being evacuated are

secured with the platoon sergeant, first sergeant, or supply sergeant. Ensure the soldier keeps his

protective mask and overgarments. When the situation permits, all equipment that was secured by the

first sergeant or platoon sergeant is turned over to the supply sergeant.

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-17
disease and nonbattle injuries

More soldiers are lost in combat to illness and disease than to combat-related wounds. Maintaining the

health and fighting fitness of the troop is a leadership responsibility. Personal hygiene, field sanitation,

and rest must be incorporated into all troop operations. If these are ignored, the combat effectiveness of

the troop will decrease rapidly.

UNIT MINISTRY TEAM

The unit ministry team (UMT), consisting of an appropriate number of chaplains and chaplain assistants,

is assigned to provide unit, area, and denominational coverage to all troops in the cavalry squadron.

UMT provides the following eight subfunctions of worship opportunities:

● Administration of sacraments, rites, and ordinances.

● Pastoral care and counseling.

● Development and management of the UMT.

● Management of material resources.

● Advising the commander on matters of religion, morale, and morals as affected by religion.

● Ministry in support of soldiers suffering from battle fatigue.

● Development of programs that enhance the total well-being of the soldier.

● Development of activities to enhance unit cohesion.

PERSONAL HYGIENE

The personal hygiene of the troop's soldiers is a leader's responsibility. Rules of hygiene must be

observed to ward off disease and improve troop morale. Ensure soldiers wash and change their socks and

underwear daily, if possible. All soldiers should shower as time and resources are available. The senior

aidman plays a big part in personal hygiene by educating soldiers and by checking for signs of trench

foot or immersion foot and frostbite.

Disease can quickly spread through the troop and incapacitate its soldiers. Watch for symptoms and

ensure the soldiers' immunizations are current.

REST

Rest is extremely important for both commanders and their soldiers. When the troop is at REDCON 3 or

4, troop leadership should ensure a sleep plan is planned and executed.

FIELD SANITATION

Field sanitation is vital to the prevention of the spread of disease. The medics must assist in this effort by

checking troop water supplies to ensure they are potable, and by ensuring mess utensils and equipment

are properly cleaned. In static situations, such as when in assembly areas, soldiers will use slit trenches or

latrines; at other times soldiers will use cat holes. Slit trenches and cat holes must be covered up after use

to prevent the spread of disease.

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

9-18
Section IV. Prisoners of War

CAPTURE AND HANDLING

Maps, military documents, letters, and diaries obtained on the battlefield, as well as PWs, are valuable

sources of combat intelligence. Scout platoons usually obtain information while searching the battlefield

in the conduct of reconnaissance operations or after contact with the enemy. They should rapidly report

this information to the troop commander for evacuation instructions. The scouts may be ordered to take

the documents to the troop command post or to rendezvous with the first sergeant at a specific location to

turn over the documents. Proper handling and evacuation of captured documents and equipment are

important. The materials must be immediately turned over to trained intelligence personnel. In most

cases, captured documents lose their value over time.

EVACUATION TECHNIQUES

In most situations, returning supply vehicles, aircraft, or troop headquarters vehicles can be used to

evacuate PWs from the troop combat trains to the squadron collection point. The troop is responsible for

guarding PWs until they are turned over to the S1. Wounded PWs are treated through normal medical

channels, but are kept separate from US soldiers.

When support vehicles are not readily available and the troop must continue its operation, secure the

PWs in a holding area such as a basement or compound. Notify the first sergeant and the S1 of the PW

location and continue the mission. The first sergeant will pick up the PWs and complete their evacuation

to the collection point.

FM 17-97 Chapter 9

 9-19
Appendix A

Fratricide Prevention

Fratricide is as old as warfare itself, a complex problem that defies simple solutions. Fratricide can be

broadly defined as the employment of friendly weapons and munitions, with the intent to kill the enemy

or destroy his equipment or facilities, that results in unforeseen and unintentional death or injury to

friendly personnel. This appendix focuses on actions leaders can take with current resources to reduce the

risk of fratricide.

CONTENTS

Section I. Magnitude of the Problem

Section II. Risk Identification and Preventive Measures

Section III. Risk Assessment

Section IV. Fratricide Reduction Measures

Section V. Fratricide Risk Considerations (OPORD Format)

Section I. Magnitude of the Problem

The modern battlefield is more lethal than any in history. The tempo of operations is rapid, and the

nonlinear nature of the battlefield creates command and control challenges for all unit leaders.

The accuracy and lethality of modern weapons make it possible to engage and destroy targets at these

extended acquisition ranges. At the same time, however, the ability of US forces to acquire targets using

thermal imagery and other sophisticated sighting systems exceeds our ability to accurately identify these

targets as friend or foe. As a result, friendly elements can be engaged unintentionally and destroyed in a

matter of seconds.

Added to this is the problem of battlefield obscuration, which becomes a critical consideration whenever

thermal sights are the primary source of target identification. Rain, dust, fog, smoke, and snow degrade

identification capability by reducing the intensity and clarity of thermal images.

On the battlefield, positive visual identification cannot be the sole engagement criteria at ranges beyond

1,000 meters. Situational awareness is the key; it must be maintained throughout an operation.

FM 17-97 Appendix A

A-1
Section II. Risk Identification and Preventive Measures

Reduction of fratricide risk begins during the planning phase of an operation and continues throughout

preparation and execution. Risk identification must be conducted at all levels during each phase, and the

results clearly communicated up and down the chain of command so risk assessment can begin. This

section covers considerations that influence risk identification; it also focuses on measures the platoon

leader can implement both to make the identification process more effective and to help prevent friendly

fire incidents from occurring. Section III of this appendix covers the risk assessment process; Section IV

lists additional fratricide reduction measures and guidelines.

Planning Phase

A plan that is thoroughly developed and understood helps to minimize fratricide risk. The following

considerations help indicate the potential for fratricide in a given operation:

● The clarity of the enemy situation.

● The clarity of the friendly situation.

● The clarity of the commander's intent.

● The complexity of the operation.

● The planning time available at each level.

Graphics are a basic tool that commanders at all levels use to clarify their intent, add precision to their

concept, and communicate their plan to subordinates. As such, graphics can be a very useful tool in

reducing the risk of fratricide. Commanders at all levels must understand the definitions and purpose of

operational graphics and the techniques of their employment.

Note. See FM 101-5-1 for the definitions of each type of graphic control measure.

Preparation Phase

The following factors may cause fratricide risks to become evident during rehearsals:

● Number and type of rehearsals.

● Training and proficiency levels of units and individuals.

● The habitual relationships between units conducting the operation.

● The physical readiness (endurance) of the troops conducting the operation.

Backbriefs and rehearsals are primary tools in identifying and reducing fratricide risk during the

preparation phase. The following are some considerations for their use:

Backbriefs ensure subordinates understand the commander's intent. They often highlight areas of

confusion, complexity, or planning errors.

● 

● The type of rehearsal conducted determines what types of risks are identified.

● Rehearsals should extend to all levels of command and involve all key players.

Execution Phase

During execution, in-stride risk assessment and reaction are necessary to overcome unforeseen fratricide

FM 17-97 Appendix A

A-2
risk situations. The following are factors to consider when assessing fratricide risks:

● Intervisibility between adjacent units.

● Amount of battlefield obscuration.

● Ability or inability to positively identify targets.

Similarities and differences in equipment, vehicles, and uniforms among friendly and enemy

forces.

● 

● Vehicle density on the battlefield.

● The tempo of the battle.

Maintaining situational awareness at all levels and at all times is another key to fratricide reduction as an

operation progresses. Units must develop and employ effective techniques and SOPs to aid leaders and

crewmen in this process. These techniques include—

● Monitoring on the next higher net.

● Radio cross-talk between units.

● Accurate position reporting and navigation.

● Training and use/exchange of liaison officers (LO).

Section III. Risk Assessment

Risk assessment must be conducted whenever fratricide risk factors are identified. It must take place at

all levels during each phase of operations. As with risk identification, the results of the assessment must

be passed on to all levels of the chain of command so that fratricide reduction measures can be developed

and implemented. Refer to Section IV for specific reduction measures.

Figure A-1 is a worksheet for evaluating fratricide risk in the context of mission requirements. The

worksheet lists six mission-accomplishment factors that affect the risk of fratricide, along with related

considerations for each factor. Assess the potential risk in each area as low, medium, or high, and assign

a point value to each (one point for low risk, two for medium risk, three for high risk). Add the point

values for the overall fratricide assessment score. Use the resulting score only as a guide, however. The

final assessment must be based both on observable risk factors like those on the worksheet and on your

"feel" for the intangible factors affecting the operation. Note that descriptive terms are listed only in the

low- and high-risk columns of the worksheet. The assessment of each factor will determine whether the

risk matches one of these extremes or lies somewhere between them as a medium risk.

FACTORS LOW (1) MEDIUM (2) HIGH (3)

1. UNDERSTAND PLAN

● Commander's Intent

● Complexity

● Enemy Situation

● Friendly Situation

● ROE

Clear

Simple

Known

Clear

Clear

Foggy

Complex

Unknown

Unclear

Unclear

FM 17-97 Appendix A

A-3
2. ENVIRONMENT

● Intervisibility

● Obscuration

● Battle tempo

● Positive target ID

Favorable

Clear

Slow

100%

Unfavorable

Obscured

Fast

0%

3. CONTROL

MEASURES

● Command relationships

● Audio

● Visual

● Graphic

● SOPs

● LOs

● Location/Navigation

Organic

Loud/Clear

Well Seen

Standard

Standard

Proficient

Sure

Joint/Combined

Jammed

Obscured

Not understood

Not used

Untrained

Unsure

4. EQUIPMENT

(Compared to US)

● Friendly

● Enemy

Similar

Different

Different

Similar

5. TRAINING

● Individual proficiency

● Unit proficiency

● Rehearsal

● Habitual relationship

● Endurance

MOS Qual

Trained

Multiple

Yes

Alert

Untrained

Untrained

None

No

Fatigued

6. PLANNING TIME

(1/3 - 2/3 Rule)

● Higher HQ

● Own HQ

● Lower HQ

Adequate

Adequate

Adequate

Inadequate

Inadequate

Inadequate

OVERALL FRATRICIDE

ASSESSMENT

LOW

26-46%*

MEDIUM

42-62%*

HIGH

58-78%*

● Commander may use numbers as the situation dictates.

● Numbers alone may not give accurate fratricide risk.

Figure A-1. Fratricide risk assessment worksheet.

FM 17-97 Appendix A

A-4
Section IV. Fratricide Reduction Measures

The following measures are provided as a guide to actions that can reduce fratricide risk. They are not

directive in nature, nor are they intended to restrict initiative. Apply them as appropriate based on the

specific situation and METT-T factors.

Identify and assess potential fratricide risks in the estimate of the situation. Express these risks in

the OPORD or FRAGO.

● 

Maintain situational awareness, focusing on such areas as current intelligence; unit locations and

dispositions; denial areas (minefields/FASCAM); contaminated areas, such as ICM and NBC;

SITREPs; and METT-T factors.

● 

Ensure positive target identification. Review vehicle/weapon ID cards. Know at what ranges and

under what conditions positive identification of friendly vehicles/weapons is possible.

● 

Establish a command climate that stresses fratricide prevention. Enforce fratricide prevention

measures, emphasize the use of doctrinally sound tactics, techniques, and procedures. Ensure

constant supervision in the execution of orders and the performance of all tasks and missions to

standard.

● 

Recognize the signs of battlefield stress. Maintain unit cohesion by taking quick, effective action

to alleviate it.

● 

Conduct individual, leader, and collective (unit) training covering fratricide awareness, target

identification and recognition, and fire discipline.

● 

● Develop a simple, decisive plan.

● Give complete and concise mission orders.

Use SOPs that are consistent with doctrine to simplify mission orders. Periodically review and

change SOPs as needed.

● 

● Strive for maximum planning time for you and your subordinates.

Use common language/vocabulary and doctrinally correct standard terminology and control

measures, such as fire support coordination line, zone of engagement, and restrictive fire lines.

● 

● Ensure thorough coordination is conducted.

● Plan for and establish effective communications.

Plan for collocation of command posts whenever it is appropriate to the mission, such as during a

passage of lines.

● 

● Designate and employ LOs as appropriate.

● Ensure rules of engagement are clear.

● Include fratricide risk as a key factor in terrain analysis (OCOKA).

● Conduct rehearsals whenever the situation allows time to do so.

Be in the right place at the right time. Use position location/navigation devices (GPS and

POSNAV); know your location and the locations of adjacent units (left, right, leading, and

follow-on); and synchronize tactical movement.

● 

● Include discussion of fratricide incidents in after-action reports.

FM 17-97 Appendix A

A-5
Section V. Fratricide Risk Considerations (OPORD Format)

This section, which parallels the five-paragraph OPORD, contains key factors and considerations in

fratricide reduction. This is not a change to the OPORD format; rather, it should be used during OPORD

development to ensure fratricide reduction measures are included in the order. It is not a strict guide. The

factors and considerations are listed where they would likely appear in the OPORD, but they may

warrant evaluation during preparation of other paragraphs.

1. Situation.

a. Enemy forces.

(1) Are there similarities among enemy and friendly equipment and uniforms that could lead to

fratricide?

(2) What languages do enemy forces speak? Could these contribute to fratricide risk?

(3) What are the enemy's deception capabilities and his past record of deception activities?

(4) Do you know the locations of enemy forces?

b. Friendly forces.

(1) Among the allied forces, are there differences (or similarities with enemy forces) in language,

uniform, and equipment that could increase fratricide risk during combined operations?

(2) Could differences in equipment and uniforms among US armed forces increase fratricide risk during

joint operations?

(3) What differences in equipment and uniforms can be stressed to help prevent fratricide?

(4) What is the friendly deception plan?

(5) What are the locations of your unit and adjacent units (left, right, leading, follow-on)?

(6) What are the locations of neutrals and noncombatants?

c. Own forces.

(1) What is the status of training activities? What are the levels of individual, crew, and unit proficiency?

(2) Will fatigue be a factor for friendly forces during the operation? Has an effective sleep plan been

developed?

(3) Are friendly forces acclimatized to the area of operations?

(4) What is the age (new, old, or mix) and condition of equipment in friendly units? What is the status of

new equipment training?

(5) What are the expected MOPP requirements for the operation?

d. Attachments and detachments.

(1) Do attached elements understand pertinent information regarding enemy and friendly forces?

(2) Are detached elements supplied this pertinent information by their gaining units?

FM 17-97 Appendix A

A-6
e. Weather.

(1) What are the expected visibility conditions (light data and precipitation) for the operation?

(2) What effect will heat and cold have on soldiers, weapons, and equipment?

f. Terrain.

(1) Do you know the topography and vegetation (such as urban, mountainous, hilly, rolling, flat, desert,

swamp/marsh, prairie/steppe, jungle, dense forest, open woods) of the expected area of operations?

(2) Have you evaluated the terrain using the factors of OCOKA?

2. Mission. Is the mission, as well as all associated tasks and purposes, clearly understood?

3. Execution.

a. Task organization.

(1) Has the unit worked under this task organization before?

(2) Are SOPs compatible with the task organization (especially with attached units)?

(3) Are special markings or signals (for example, cats' eyes, chemlites, or panels) needed for positive

identification of uniforms and equipment?

(4) What special weapons and/or equipment will be used? Do they look or sound like enemy weapons

and/or equipment?

b. Concept of the operation.

(1) Maneuver. Are main and supporting efforts identified to ensure awareness of fratricide risks and

prevention measures?

(2) Fires (direct and indirect).

(a) Are priorities of fires identified?

(b) Have target lists been developed?

(c) Has the fire execution matrix/overlay been developed?

(d) Have locations of denial areas (minefields, FASCAM) and contaminated areas (ICM, NBC) been

identified?

(e) Are the locations of all supporting fire targets identified in the OPORD/OPLAN overlays?

(f) Are aviation and CAS targets clearly identified? Have signals been established to positively identify

these targets for the aircraft? Have airspace coordination areas been developed? Have enemy air defense

systems been suppressed?

(g) Has the direct-fire plan been developed and synchronized with the fire support plan?

(h) Have final protective fires been designated?

(i) Have you identified and verified sector limits?

FM 17-97 Appendix A

A-7
(j) Have executors for each target been assigned and do they understand when and where to shoot? Do

the shooters have "eyes on" the target?

(k) Are the observers surveyed in or are they using a map spot? Target location errors can cause big

problems.

(l) Do all leaders and executors understand where the fire support coordination measures are and when

they go into effect? Rehearsal is the key.

(m) Can the fire support officer hear what targets are being called on the maneuver nets?

(n) Have all targets been rehearsed with the executors and the field artillery battalion?

(o) Does the reinforcing or general support reinforcing field artillery have all the proper graphics and

understand where they fit in? Did they attend the rehearsal?

(p) Have restrictions on specific munitions been established and does everyone know where they are

planned and emplaced?

(3) Engineer tasks.

(a) Are friendly minefields, including FASCAM and ICM dud-contaminated areas, known?

(b) Are obstacles identified, along with the approximate time needed for reduction/breaching of each?

(4) Tasks to each subordinate unit. Are friendly forces identified, as appropriate, for each subordinate

maneuver element?

(5) Tasks to CS/CSS units. Have locations of friendly forces been reported to CS/CSS units?

(6) Coordinating instructions.

(a) Will rehearsals be conducted? Are they necessary? Are direct and indirect fires included?

(b) Is a backbrief necessary?

(c) Are appropriate control measures clearly explained and illustrated in the OPORD and overlays? Have

they been disseminated to everyone who has a need to know? What is the plan for using these control

measures to synchronize the battle and prevent fratricide?

(d) Have target/vehicle identification drills been practiced?

(e) Do subordinate units know the immediate action, drill, or signal for "CEASE FIRE" or "I AM

FRIENDLY" if they come under unknown or friendly fire? Is there a backup action?

(f) Is guidance in handling dud munitions, such as ICM and CBUs, included?

4. Service Support.

a. Are train locations and identification markings known by everyone?

b. Do medical and maintenance personnel know the routes between train units?

5. Command and Signal.

FM 17-97 Appendix A

A-8
a. Command.

(1) What are the locations of the commander and key staff members?

(2) What is the chain of command and the succession of command?

b. Signal.

(1) Do instructions include backup code words and visual signals for all special and emergency events?

(2) Do instructions cover how to identify friendly forces to aircraft?

(3) Are SOI distributed to all units with a need to know, such as higher, lower, adjacent, leading, and

follow-on elements?

FM 17-97 Appendix A

A-9
Appendix B

Standing Operating Procedures

The intent of this appendix is to provide an outline as an aid for developing a squadron tactical SOP.

I. GENERAL

A. Purpose: This tactical SOP prescribes standard procedures for use during all combat situations and

provides a comprehensive reference for conducting operations in a field environment.

B. Conformity: All assigned, attached and OPCON personnel will read and comply with the provisions

of this tactical SOP.

II. BATTLE COMMAND

A. Command.

1. Organization.

a. Succession of command.

b. Cues for assuming command.

c. Operation of the command post.

(1) Shifts.

(2) Displacement/set-up/tear-down.

2. Troop-leading procedures.

a. Estimate input (checklist).

b. Precombat inspection (checklist).

c. Backbriefs.

d. Rehearsals.

e. Combat orders.

(1) Formats.

(2) Preparation.

FM 17-97 Appendix B

B-1
(3) Reproduction.

(4) Dissemination.

3. Coordination with adjacent units (checklist).

4. Liaison with main body elements (checklist).

B. Control.

1. Combat graphics and symbols.

2. Control measures designation (numbering system).

3. Terrain index reference system (TIRS).

4. Operational terms.

5. Vehicle identification marking system.

6. Unit recognition signals.

7. Communication.

a. Net diagrams.

b. Fixed call signs.

c. Brevity codes/cue words.

d. Antijamming actions.

e. Alternate means.

8. Reports.

a. Battle.

b. Intelligence.

c. Logistical.

III. MANEUVER

A. Readiness condition (REDCON).

B. Quartering party.

C. Road marches.

D. Assembly areas.

E. Squadron organization for combat.

F. Formations.

FM 17-97 Appendix B

B-2
G. Battle plays.

1. Actions on contact.

2. Fix and bypass.

3. Close assault.

4. In-stride breach.

5. Bridges/defile.

6. Formation changes.

7. Passage of lines.

8. Hasty defense.

9. Consolidate on the objective.

10. Ambush.

11. Other plays.

H. Reconnaissance operations.

1. Zone reconnaissance.

a. Graphics.

b. Critical tasks.

2. Area reconnaissance.

a. Graphics.

b. Critical tasks.

3. Route reconnaissance.

a. Graphics.

b. Critical tasks.

I. Security operations.

1. Screen.

a. Graphics.

b. Critical tasks.

2. Area security.

a. Route.

FM 17-97 Appendix B

B-3
b. Convoy.

J. Offensive operations.

1. Movement to contact.

2. Hasty attack.

3. Offensive graphics.

K. Defensive operations (defensive graphics).

L. Limited visibility operations (checklist).

M. Break in action (checklist).

1. Redistribution of ammunition, personnel, and equipment.

2. Evacuation of casualties and PWs.

3. Redistribution of ammunition under fire.

N. Relief in place.

1. Relief in place graphics.

2. Critical tasks.

O. Air-ground team.

1. Command relationship.

2. Formations/techniques of movement.

IV. MOBILITY AND SURVIVABILITY

A. Mobility.

1. Standard tasks.

2. Standard priorities.

B. Countermobility.

1. Standard tasks.

2. Standard priorities.

3. Engineer target turnover (checklist).

C. Survivability.

1. Standard tasks.

2. Standard priorities.

FM 17-97 Appendix B

B-4
3. Fighting position construction.

D. NBC defense.

1. NBC team organization and equipment.

2. Unit NBC equipment.

3. Defense against nuclear attack.

4. Defense against chemical/biological attack.

5. Decontamination.

6. NBC reconnaissance.

V. FIRE SUPPORT

A. Fire support request sequence.

B. Fire support planning and execution matrix format.

C. Graphics.

VI. AIR DEFENSE

A. Air defense warning and cue words.

B. Weapons control status and cue words.

VII. INTELLIGENCE/ELECTRONIC WARFARE

A. Intelligence.

1. Standard tasks.

2. Standard priorities.

B. Electronic warfare.

1. Standard tasks.

2. Standard priorities.

3. Countermeasures.

VIII. LOGISTICS

A. Resupply procedures.

1. LOGPAC procedures.

2. Battle loss actions.

B. Combat Health Support.

FM 17-97 Appendix B

B-5
1. Emergency medical treatment.

2. Medical evacuation.

3. Field hygiene and sanitation.

4. Combat stress control.

5. Routine sick call.

C. Maintenance support.

1. Battle damage assessment and repair.

2. Exchange criteria.

3. Cannibalization criteria.

4. Destruction criteria.

5. Maintenance repair time guidelines.

D. Personnel.

1. Replacements.

2. Accountability.

3. Personnel actions.

E. Combat trains.

1. Layout.

2. Operations.

IX. SAFETY

FM 17-97 Appendix B

B-6 
Appendix C

Operations Order

Operations order format

A sample OPORD is outlined below.

1. Situation.

a. Enemy.

(1) Weather (note effects - include light data).

(a) Light data.

(b) Weather forecast for operation.

(c) Effects of weather and light data on operations.

● Trafficability.

● Visibility.

● Effect on lasers/thermals.

● Effect on air operations.

(2) Terrain.

(a) Obstacles, hills, valleys, road types and conditions, streams, rivers, bridges, towns.

(b) Avenues of approach.

● Size unit supported.

● Start and end point.

● Objective.

(c) Key terrain.

(d) Observation.

(e) Cover and concealment.

(f) Engagement areas.

(g) Effect of terrain on the operation.

(3) Enemy forces.

(a) Identification of enemy forces.

FM 17-97 Appendix C

C-1
(b) Activity of enemy forces.

(c) Location of enemy units.

(d) Disposition of enemy forces.

(e) Strength of enemy forces.

(f) Composition of enemy forces, to include type of equipment.

(g) Other enemy information critical to the upcoming operation, to include the following:

● Chemical and nuclear capabilities.

● Air defense artillery (ADA).

● Aviation, including helicopters.

● Electronic warfare.

(h) Enemy courses of action.

(i) Probable enemy course of action.

b. Friendly.

(1) Mission of higher headquarters (squadron) and commander's intent.

(2) Mission of adjacent units (left, right, front, rear).

(3) Mission of other organic units in higher headquarters.

(4) Mission of reserves in higher headquarters.

(5) Mission of supporting units who are in direct support/reinforcing (DS/R) to higher headquarters (field

artillery, engineer, ADA).

(6) Which element from higher headquarters has priority of fires.

(7) Reinforcing units with a reinforcing/general support (R/GS) role to supporting units.

(8) Close air support (CAS) and number of sorties allocated to higher headquarters.

c. Attachments and detachments to the troop.

2. Mission. The who, what, when, where, and why for troop/company. State the essential task or tasks to

be accomplished by the entire unit, to include on-order missions. Clearly define the troop's objective.

3. Execution.

a. Concept of the Operation. This paragraph explains the commander's intent by stating the purpose,

method, and endstate of the operation. The purpose tells the "why" of the operation. The method tells

how the commander visualizes achieving success with respect to the troop as a whole and the utilization

of any combat multipliers, in general terms. The endstate tells what the final disposition of forces will be

and how the endstate will facilitate future operations. For example--

We will conduct the reconnaissance to determine the location, disposition, and composition of enemy

main defensive belt in order to facilitate movement through zone, and penetration of the main defensive

belt by 52d ID (Mech), allowing 10th Corps to continue offensive operations to the north. We will

conduct a forward passage of lines, and perform zone reconnaissance in a troop vee with the engineer

platoon conducting a detailed route reconnaissance of Route Cherry behind the scout platoons. Initially

movement will be rapid and aggressive until we make contact with the enemy main defensive belt, then

transition to a more deliberate, detailed reconnaissance. Indirect fires will be used to provide immediate

suppression and assist in the development of the situation by scout platoons. Success is determining the

disposition, composition, and location of the enemy main defensive belt then determining the axis and

FM 17-97 Appendix C

C-2
point for the 52d ID (Mech) penetration of the enemy's defense. Our endstate is the troop screening along

the enemy main defensive belt ready to pass elements of the 52d ID (Mech) forward for their attack.

(1) Scheme of Maneuver. How major units (maneuver and combat support) will be employed; including

movement techniques, bypass criteria (if any), and engagement/disengagement criteria. See the following

example.

C Troop moves at 130430 from TAA Viper along Route Dog in troop column. Order of march on Route

Dog is Red, Blue, Mortars, FIST, Engineers, Black 6, White, Green, TOC, and combat trains.

C Troop crosses LD at 0500 with Red on left (south), Blue on right (north), Mortars, Engineers, White,

Green, TOC, and combat trains moving center of zone (troop vee).

Scout platoons reconnoiter in zone abreast, establishing contact at designated troop internal and flank

contact points. Upon enemy contact, develop the situation at platoon level, initially with indirect fire, and

report. Destroy squad- and section-sized light-armored and soft-skinned vehicles, within capability.

Anything beyond capability, be prepared to assist hasty attack by White and/or Green. Bypass only

enemy dismount elements squad-sized or smaller. Bypass all built-up areas larger than 1 kilometer

square not on Route Cherry. Upon contact with enemy main defensive belt, conduct dismounted patrols

to ascertain enemy disposition, composition, orientation, and location of obstacles.

Mortars cross LD and establish MFP 10 following Blue. Maneuver from MFP 11 to MFP 12 through

MFP 25 in sequence. Maintain ability to range at least one-third maximum range forward of lead scouts.

Key movement on scouts reporting crossing of phase lines throughout zone.

Engineers cross LD following the FIST and conduct a detailed route reconnaissance of Route Cherry

from SP to RP. Maneuver on Route Cherry approximately 500 meters rearward of scouts. Upon

identification of enemy's main defensive belt, be prepared to assist scouts with obstacle reconnaissance.

White and Green cross LD in platoon columns, White leading. Deploy into platoon wedges forward of

LD, terrain permitting. Maneuver in center of troop zone, Green following White by 500 meters. White

and Green maneuver approximately one phase line behind Red and Blue through hide positions T-44

through T-52 in sequence. Key movement on scouts reporting crossing of phase lines throughout zone.

Scouts will assist in positioning tanks for conduct of hasty attacks by fire or by fire and maneuver upon

approval of the troop commander.

TOC and combat trains cross LD in column, following Green. TOC maneuvers center troop zone,

establishing positions H-44 through H-48 in sequence. Remains approximately two phase lines rearward

of lead scouts. Trains move center troop zone in column, establishing positions T-27 through T-32 in

sequence. Remain approximately two phase lines rearward of lead scouts. Key movement on scouts

reporting crossing of phase lines throughout zone.

(2) Fires.

(a) Purpose for field artillery and mortar fires. (How will indirect fires support the scheme of maneuver?)

(b) Preparation starting time, duration and description of any fires landing in the area of operations.

(c) Allocation of final protective fires (FPF).

(d) Which element will have priority of fires.

(e) Number of priority targets allocated and who will control them.

(f) Special fires, restrictions, allocation/use of smoke, illumination, or CAS.

FM 17-97 Appendix C

C-3
(g) Description of scheduled fires (offensive).

(h) Reference to fire support or target annexes.

(3) Obstacles, mines, fortifications.

(a) Priority of engineer effort.

(b) Priority of engineer mission.

(c) Obstacle overlay.

(d) Obstacle list.

(e) Logistical constraints.

(f) On-order missions.

b. Specific tasks to subordinate units. List specific missions in "battle sequence" for each subordinate

unit, including attached units. Include movement techniques, flank coordination requirements, other

details, and any "be-prepared" missions.

c. Coordinating instructions.

(1) Movement instructions.

(2) Time schedule of events.

● Rehearsal.

● Backbrief times.

● Precombat inspection time.

● First movement time.

(3) Passage of lines.

● Contact points.

● Passage points.

● Lanes and identification.

(4) Mission-oriented protection posture (MOPP) level.

(5) Operational exposure guide (OEG).

(6) Actions on contact.

(7) Actions at danger areas.

(8) Priority intelligence requirements (PIR) and intelligence requirements (IR).

(9) Effective time of attachment or detachment.

(10) Rally points.

(11) Rules of engagement (ROE).

(12) Priority targets for direct-fire weapons.

(13) Uniform and equipment, to include weapon and ammunition.

(14) Any changes regarding battlecarry and battlesight ranges.

(15) Air defense posture and weapons control status.

(16) Any instructions not provided in concept of the operation or specific instructions.

4. Service Support.

a. General.

(1) Organization of trains (squadron and troop).

FM 17-97 Appendix C

C-4
● Combat.

● Field.

(2) Location of trains (initial and subsequent).

(3) Movement of trains (movement instructions).

b. Materiel and services.

(1) Supply.

● Class I: Time and type.

● Class III: Time, location, and method.

● Class V: Time, amount, and type.

● LOGPAC instructions (include squadron logistics release point [LRP]).

(2) Transportation. Location of main supply route.

(3) Services.

● Mortuary affairs.

● Clothing exchange and bath.

● Maintenance.

c. Medical evacuation and treatment.

(1) Location of squadron aid station.

(2) Displacement of squadron aid station.

(3) Location of regimental clearing station.

(4) Aero-medical evacuation information.

(5) Location of ambulance exchange points.

(6) Handling of contaminated wounded personnel.

d. Personnel.

(1) Prisoner of war (PW) handling and disposition instructions.

(2) PW guard instructions.

(3) Location of PW collection point.

(4) Instructions for interaction with local civil populace (ROE).

(5) Number of expected replacements.

(6) Cross-leveling procedures.

e. Miscellaneous.

5. Command and Signal.

a. Command.

(1) Location of troop commander/troop TOC/squadron command post.

(2) Succession of command.

b. Signal.

FM 17-97 Appendix C

C-5
(1) SOI index and edition in effect.

● Key frequencies.

● Key call signs.

● Current item number identifier.

(2) KY-57 fill and change over.

(3) Current sign and countersign.

(4) Code words.

(5) Action if jamming or "hot mike" occurs.

(6) Pyrotechnics use.

(7) Periods and conditions of listening silence.

FM 17-97 Appendix C

C-6
Appendix D

Operations Other Than War

Operations other than war are military activities during peacetime and conflict that do not necessarily

involve armed clashes between two organized forces. A cavalry troop will conduct reconnaissance,

security, offensive, defensive, and other tactical operations in support of operations other than war. Some

examples of operations other than war that a cavalry troop may be involved in are as follows:

PEACETIME CONFLICT

Counterdrug Strikes and raids

Disaster relief Peace enforcement

Civil support Support to insurgency

Peace-building Anti-terrorism

Nation assistance Peacekeeping

Noncombatant evacuation

operations (NEO)

The primary operational constraints during operations other than war are defined by the rules of

engagement (ROE). These rules range from the use of force for self-defense only to total impartiality

when applying force. The rules of engagement for peacetime will be more restrictive than those for

conflict. The troop commander should consider the following in relation to the rules of engagement:

The degree of force used must only be sufficient to achieve the task at hand and prevent, as far as

possible, loss of human life or serious injury.

● 

Leaders at all levels must ensure that the ROE do not limit the soldiers' ability to defend

themselves.

● 

● Leaders must never tape over magazines to keep soldiers from chambering rounds.

Leaders must ensure all soldiers understand what conditions must be met before chambering

rounds.

● 

The ROE must be realistic, simple, and easy to understand. Develop a single card that clearly

outlines the ROE and issue it to all soldiers for reference, keeping in mind that the card in itself is

not the answer. Soldiers must know and understand the ROE.

● 

During peacekeeping, forces have no mandate to prevent violations of peace agreements by the

active use of force. (Observe and report only.) To maintain the peace, units may be positioned

● 

FM 17-97 Appendix D

D-1
between belligerents. Troop commanders must realize that soldiers are being placed at risk. The

protection of the troop must be emphasized.

Peace enforcement missions allow the active use of force. The peacetime ROE resemble the ROE

for hostilities (wartime).

● 

● The formulation of ROE should consider the cultural differences of multinational forces.

Soldiers should be trained in the ROE, using tactical vignettes or simulated events. Train soldiers

to avoid unnecessary collateral damage to property.

● 

Actions on contact and the troop's ability to develop the situation will be affected by the rules of

engagement for the theater in which the troop is operating. The troop commander should rehearse battle

drills based on those rules.

In preparing for operations other than war, a troop may require specialized training. They could benefit

from training in the following areas:

● Nature of peacekeeping.

● Regional orientation/culture of belligerents.

● Negotiating skills.

● Mine/booby trap/unexploded ordnance training.

● Checkpoint operations.

● Investigating and reporting.

● Information collection.

● Patrolling.

● Media inter-relationships.

● Establishing a buffer zone.

● Supervising a truce or cease-fire.

● Contributing to maintenance of law and order.

● Demilitarizing cities or geographical areas.

● Border surveillance/security.

FM 17-97 Appendix D

D-2
Glossary-1 

Glossary 

AAR after-action review 

A&O assault and obstacle 

ACE armored combat earthmover 

ACR armored cavalry regiment

ACT air cavalry troop 

ADA air defense artillery 

A/L administrative/logistics 

ALO air liaison officer 

ALOC administrative/logistics operations center 

AO area of operations 

APERS antipersonnel (ammunition) 

AT antitank 

APC armored personnel carrier 

arty artillery 

AVLB armored vehicle launched bridge 

BHL battle handover line 

BP battle position 

BUA built-up area 

C2 command and control 

cal caliber 

CAS close air support 

cbt combat 

CBU cluster bomb unit 

CEOI communications-electronics operation 

 instructions 

CEV combat engineer vehicle 

CDR commander 

CFV cavalry fighting vehicle 

cGy/hr centigray(s) per hour 

CHEMWARN chemical warning (message sent in the 

 event of a friendly strike) 

COA course of action 

COMSEC communications security 

COT counter obstacle team 

CP command post 

CS combat support 

CSS combat service support 
Glossary-2 

CTCP combat trains command post 

DA Department of the Army 

DS direct support 

DS/R direct support/reinforcing 

EA engagement area 

engr engineer 

EPW enemy prisoner of war 

evac evacuate; evacuation 

EW electronic warfare 

1SG first sergeant 

FA field artillery 

FASCAM family of scatterable mines 

FAC forward air controller 

FEBA forward edge of the battle area 

FIST fire support team 

FLOT forward line of own troops 

FM frequency modulation (radio); field manual 

FPF final protective fires 

FRAGO fragmentary order 

FS fire support 

FSCL fire support coordination line 

FSE fire support element 

FSO fire support officer 

FSN fire support net 

GLD ground laser designator 

GPS global positioning system 

GRREG graves registration 

GSR ground surveillance radar 

HC heavy concentration (smoke) 

HE high explosive 

HEMTT heavy expanded mobile tactical truck 

HHT headquarters and headquarters troop 

HMMWV high mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle 

HQ headquarters 

hvy heavy 

ICM improved conventional munitions 
Glossary-3 

ID identification 

IPB intelligence preparation of the battlefield 

IR intelligence requirements 

KIA killed in action 

km kilometers 

LACR light armored cavalry regiment 

LC line of contact 

LD line of departure 

ldr leader 

LID light infantry division 

LO liaison officer 

LOA limit of advance 

LOGPAC logistics package 

LRP logistics release point 

lt light 

maint maintenance 

MBA main battle area 

MCOO modified combined obstacle overlay 

mech mechanized 

METT-T mission, enemy, terrain, troops and time 

 available 

MFP mortar firing point 

MICLIC mine clearing line charge 

MOPP mission-oriented protection posture 

mort mortar 

MRB motorized rifle battalion 

MRC motorized rifle company 

MRE meals ready to eat 

MRP motorized rifle platoon 

MSR main supply route 

MTOE modified table(s) of organization and 

 equipment 
Glossary-4 

NAI named area(s) of interest 

NBC nuclear, biological, chemical 

NCO noncommissioned officer 

NCOIC noncommissioned officer in charge 

NEO noncombatant evacuation operations 

NET new equipment training 

NPL no penetration line 

NUCWARN nuclear warning (message sent in the event 

 of a friendly strike) 

obj objective 

OCOKA observation and fields of fire, cover and 

 concealment, obstacles, key terrain, 

 avenues of approach (considerations in 

 evaluating terrain as part of METT-T) 

OEG operational exposure guidance 

OI operations and intelligence 

OIC officer in charge 

OP observation post 

OPCON operational control 

OPLAN operation plan 

OPORD operations order 

OPSEC operations security 

PAC personnel and administration center 

PD point of departure 

PEWS platoon early warning system 

PIR priority intelligence requirements 

PL phase line 

PLL prescribed load list 

plt platoon 

PMCS preventive maintenance checks and 

 services 

POL petroleum, oils, and lubricants 

POSNAV position navigation 

PSG platoon sergeant 

PW prisoner of war 
Glossary-5 

recon reconnaissance; reconnoiter 

REDCON readiness condition 

RFA restricted fire area 

RFL restricted fire line 

R/GS reinforcing/general support 

ROE rules of engagement 

ROM refuel on the move 

RP release point 

rte route 

S1 adjutant (US Army) 

S2 intelligence officer (US Army) 

S3 operations and training officer (US Army) 

S4 supply officer (US Army) 

SCO squadron commander 

sec ldr section leader 

SEE small emplacement excavator 

SGLI Serviceman's Group Life Insurance 

sgt sergeant 

SIDPERS Standardization Installation/Division 

 Personnel System 

SIGSEC signal security 

SITREP situation report 

SOI signal operation instructions 

SOP standing operating procedure 

SP start point 

sqd ldr squad leader 

TAA tactical assembly area 

TAC CP tactical command post 

TACFIRE tactical fire direction system 

TC tank commander 

TIRS terrain index reference system 

TOC tactical operations center 

TOE table(s) of organization and equipment 

TOW tube-launched, optically-tracked, wire- 

 guided (missile) 

TRADOC Training and Doctrine Command 

TRP/trp target reference point; troop 

TTP tactics, techniques, and procedures 

UMCP unit maintenance collection point 
Glossary-6 

UMT unit ministry team 

US United States 

veh vehicle 

WIA wounded in action 

wrkr wrecker 

XO executive officer 
References-1 

References

SOURCES USED

These are the sources quoted or paraphrased in this 

publication. 

Army Publications

FM 17-15 Tank Platoon. 7 October 1987. 

FM 17-95 Cavalry Operations. 19 September 1991. 

FM 17-95-10 Armored Cavalry Regiment and 

 Squadron. 22 September 1993. 

FM 17-98 Scout Platoon. 9 September 1994. 

FM 71-1 Tank and Mechanized Infantry 

 Company. 22 November 1988. 

Command Publications 

Command publications cannot be obtained through 

Armywide resupply channels. Determine availability by 

contacting the address below. 

Commander 

USAARMC 

ATTN: ATZK-IMO-RS 

Fort Knox, KY 40121-5000 

FKSM 17-97-3 Cavalry Troop Common SOP. 

 15 July 1994. 

READINGS RECOMMENDED
References-2 

These readings contain relevant supplemental information. 

Army Publications 

ARTEP 17-57-10-MTP Mission Training Plan for the Scout 

 Platoon. 27 December 1988. 

ARTEP 17-237-10-MTP Mission Training Plan for the Tank 

 Platoon. 3 October 1988. 

ARTEP 17-487-30-MTP Mission Training Plan for the 

 Regimental Armored Cavalry 

 Troop. 3 September 1991. 

DA Form 1155 Witness Statement on Individual. June 

 1966. 

DA Form 1156 Casualty Feeder Report. June 1966. 

DA Form 1971-R Radiological Data Sheet Monitoring and 

 Point Technique. September 1986. 

DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications 

 and Blank Forms. February 1974. 

DD Form 551 Record of Interment. August 1984. 

DD Form 1077 Collecting Point Register of Deceased 

 Personnel. July 1984. 

FM 1-114 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for 

 the Regimental Aviation Squadron. 

 20 February 1991. 

FM 1-116 Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for 

 the Air Cavalry/Reconnaissance Troop. 

 20 February 1991. 

FM 3-3 Chemical and Biological Contamination 

 Avoidance. 16 November 1992. 

FM 3-4 NBC Protection. 20 May 1992. 

FM 3-5 NBC Decontamination. 23 July 1992. 

FM 3-50 Smoke Operations. 4 December 1990. 

FM 3-100 NBC Defense, Chemical Warfare, 

 Smoke, and Flame Operations. 
References-3 

 23 May 1991. 

FM 3-101 Chemical Staffs and Units. 22 April 1987. 

FM 5-36 Route Reconnaissance and 

 Classification. 10 May 1985. 

FM 5-100 Engineer Combat Operations. 

 22 November 1988. 

FM 5-250 Explosives and Demolitions. 

 15 June 1992. 

FM 6-20 Fire Support in the AirLand Battle. 

 17 May 1988. 

FM 7-91 Tactical Employment of Antiarmor 

 Platoons, Companies, and Battalions. 

 30 September 1987. 

FM 7-98 Operations in a Low-Intensity 

 Conflict. 19 October 1992. 

FM 8-55 Planning for Health Service Support. 

 15 February 1985. 

FM 10-63-1 Graves Registration Handbook. 

 17 July 1986. 

FM 17-12-1-1 Tank Gunnery (Abrams), Volume I. 

 19 March 1993. 

FM 17-12-1-2 Tank Gunnery (Abrams), Volume II. 

 19 March 1993. 

FM 17-12-8 Light Cavalry Gunnery. 28 October 1994. 

FM 17-18 Light Armor Operations. 8 March 1994. 

FM 20-32 Mine/Countermine Operations. 

 30 September 1992. 

FM 21-10 Field Hygiene and Sanitation. 

 22 November 1988. 

FM 21-10-1 Unit Field Sanitation Team. 

 11 October 1989. 

FM 21-11 First Aid for Soldiers. 

 27 October 1988. 

FM 22-100 Military Leadership. 31 July 1990. 
References-4 

FM 23-1 Bradley Fighting Vehicle Gunnery. 

 1 March 1991. 

FM 34-3 Intelligence Analysis. 15 March 1990. 

FM 44-1 US Army Air Defense Artillery 

 Employment. 9 May 1983. 

FM 44-3 Air Defense Artillery Employment: 

 Chaparral/Vulcan/Stinger. 15 June 1984. 

FM 44-8 Small Unit Self-Defense Against Air 

 Attack. 30 December 1981. 

FM 44-18-1 Stinger Team Operations. 

 31 December 1984. 

FM 71-2 The Tank and Mechanized Infantry

 Battalion Task Force. 

 27 September 1988. 

FM 100-2-1 Soviet Army Operations and Tactics. 

 16 July 1984. 

FM 100-2-3 The Soviet Army: Troops, 

 Organization, and Equipment. 

 6 June 1991. 

FM 100-5 Operations. 14 June 1993. 

FM 101-5-1 Operational Terms and Symbols. 

 21 October 1985. 

TC 6-40A Field Artillery Automated Cannon 

 Gunnery. 21 April 1989. 

Command Publications

Contact the address shown on page References-1 for these 

command publications. 

FKSM 17-15-3 Tank Platoon SOP. February 1989. 
References-5 

FKSM 17-98-3 Scout Platoon SOP. November 1994. 

FKSM 17-98-4 Scout Platoon Leader’s Notebook. 

Standardization Agreements (STANAGs)

To requisition these documents, complete DD Form 1425 

and send it to— 

Naval Publications and Forms Center 

5801 Tabor Avenue 

Philadelphia, PA 19120 

STANAG 2002 Warning Signs for the Marking of 

 Contaminated or Dangerous Land 

 Areas, Complete Equipment, 

 Supplies and Stores. 

 2 December 1989. 

STANAG 2014 Operation Orders, Warning Orders 

 and Administrative/Logistics Orders. 

 14 August 1991. 

STANAG 2029 Method of Describing Ground 

 Locations, Areas and Boundaries. 

 10 June 1991. 

STANAG 2036 Land Mine Laying, Marking, 

 Recording and Reporting 

 Procedures. 29 April 1988. 

STANAG 2044 Procedures for Dealing with 

 Prisoners of War (PW). 

 12 July 1988. 

STANAG 2047 Emergency Alarms of Hazard or 

 Attack (NBC and Air Attack Only). 

 10 October 1990. 

STANAG 2082 Relief of Combat Troops. 

 24 July 1991. 

STANAG 2083 Commanders’ Guide on Nuclear 

 Radiation Exposure of Groups. 
References-6 

 10 September 1990. 

STANAG 2084 Handling and Reporting of Captured 

 Enemy Equipment and Documents. 

 26 June 1986. 

STANAG 2103 Reporting Nuclear Detonations, 

 Biological and Chemical Attacks, 

 and Predicting and Warning of 

 Associated Hazards and Hazard 

 Areas. 10 June 1991. 

STANAG 2104 Friendly Nuclear Strike Warning. 

 12 December 1989. 

STANAG 2112 NBC Reconnaissance. 

 5 August 1986. 

STANAG 2113 Denial of a Unit’s Military Equipment 

 and Supplies to an Enemy. 

 11 July 1991. 

STANAG 2129 Identification of Land Forces on the 

 Battlefield. 16 May 1989. 

STANAG 2889 Marking of Hazardous Areas and 

 Routes Through Them. 

 8 February 1990. 
FM 17-97

3 OCTOBER 1995

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

DENNIS J. REIMER

General, United States Army

Chief of Staff

Official:

JOEL B. HUDSON

Administrative Assistant to the

Secretary of the Army

DISTRIBUTION:

Active Army, USAR, and ARNG: To be distributed in accordance with

DA Form 12-11E, requirements for FM 17-97, Cavalry Platoon (Qty rqr block no. 1040).

00649